CLP-970
CLP-970C
Owner’s manual
IMPORTANT
Check your power supply
Make sure that your local AC mains voltage
matches the voltage specified on the name
plate on the bottom panel. In some areas a
voltage selector may be provided on the bottom
panel of the main keyboard unit near the power
cord. Make sure that the voltage selector is set
for the voltage in your area. The voltage
selector is set at 240V when the unit is initially
shipped. To change the setting use a “minus”
screwdriver to rotate the selector dial so that
the correct voltage appears next to the pointer
on the panel.
CLP-970M
SPECIAL MESSAGE SECTION
PRODUCT SAFETY MARKINGS:
Yamaha electronic
products may have either labels similar to the graphics
shown below or molded/stamped facsimiles of these
graphics on the enclosure. The explanation of these
graphics appears on this page. Please observe all cautions
indicated on this page and those indicated in the safety
instruction section.
See bottom of Keyboard enclosure for graphic symbol markings
The exclamation point within the
equilateral triangle is intended to alert
the user to the presence of important
operating and maintenance (servic-
ing) instructions in the literature
accompanying the product.
The lightning flash with arrowhead
symbol, within the equilateral trian-
gle, is intended to alert the user to the
presence of uninsulated “dangerous
voltage” within the product’s enclo-
sure that may be of sufficient magni-
tude to constitute a risk of electrical
shock.
IMPORTANT NOTICE:
All Yamaha electronic products
are tested and approved by an independent safety testing
laboratory in order that you may be sure that when it is
properly installed and used in its normal and customary
manner, all foreseeable risks have been eliminated. DO
NOT modify this unit or commission others to do so
unless specifically authorized by Yamaha. Product perfor-
mance and/or safety standards may be diminished.
Claims filed under the expressed warranty may be denied
if the unit is/has been modified. Implied warranties may
also be affected.
SPECIFICATIONS SUBJECT TO CHANGE:
The
information contained in this manual is believed to be
correct at the time of printing. However, Yamaha reserves
the right to change or modify any of the specifications
without notice or obligation to update existing units.
ENVIRONMENTAL ISSUES:
Yamaha strives to pro-
duce products that are both user safe and environmentally
friendly. We sincerely believe that our products and the
production methods used to produce them, meet these
goals. In keeping with both the letter and the spirit of the
law, we want you to be aware of the following:
Battery Notice:
This product MAY contain a small non-
rechargable battery which (if applicable) is soldered in
place. The average life span of this type of battery is
approximately five years. When replacement becomes
necessary, contact a qualified service representative to
perform the replacement.
Warning:
Do not attempt to recharge, disassemble, or
incinerate this type of battery. Keep all batteries away
from children. Dispose of used batteries promptly and as
regulated by applicable laws. Note: In some areas, the
servicer is required by law to return the defective parts.
However, you do have the option of having the servicer
dispose of these parts for you.
Disposal Notice:
Should this product become damaged
beyond repair, or for some reason its useful life is consid-
ered to be at an end, please observe all local, state, and
federal regulations that relate to the disposal of products
that contain lead, batteries, plastics, etc.
NOTICE:
Service charges incurred due to lack of knowl-
edge relating to how a function or effect works (when the
unit is operating as designed) are not covered by the man-
ufacturer’s warranty, and are therefore the owners respon-
sibility. Please study this manual carefully and consult
your dealer before requesting service.
NAME PLATE LOCATION:
The graphic below indi-
cates the location of the name plate. The model number,
serial number, power requirements, etc., are located on
this plate. You should record the model number, serial
number, and the date of purchase in the spaces provided
below and retain this manual as a permanent record of
your purchase.
CAUTION
RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK
DO NOT OPEN
CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK.
DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK).
NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE.
REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.
CLP-970/970M/970C
Model
Serial No.
Purchase Date
92-469
1
CLP-970
3
PRECAUTIONS
PLEASE READ CAREFULLY BEFORE PROCEEDING
* Please keep these precautions in a safe place for future reference.
WARNING
Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of serious injury or even
death from electrical shock, short-circuiting, damages, fire or other hazards. These precautions
include, but are not limited to, the following:
• Do not open the instrument or attempt to disassemble the internal parts or modify them in any way. The
instrument contains no user-serviceable parts. If it should appear to be malfunctioning, discontinue use
immediately and have it inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel.
• Do not expose the instrument to rain, use it near water or in damp or wet conditions, or place containers on
it containing liquids which might spill into any openings.
• If the power cord or plug becomes frayed or damaged, or if there is a sudden loss of sound during use of
the instrument, or if any unusual smells or smoke should appear to be caused by it, immediately turn off the
power switch, disconnect the electric plug from the outlet, and have the instrument inspected by qualified
Yamaha service personnel.
• Only use the voltage specified as correct for the instrument. The required voltage is printed on the name
plate of the instrument.
• Before cleaning the instrument, always remove the electric plug from the outlet. Never insert or remove an
electric plug with wet hands.
• Check the electric plug periodically and remove any dirt or dust which may have accumulated on it.
(1) B-6
4
CLP-970
PRECAUTIONS
CAUTION
Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of physical injury to you or
others, or damage to the instrument or other property. These precautions include, but are not limited
to, the following:
• Do not place the power cord near heat sources such as heaters or radiators, and do not excessively bend
or otherwise damage the cord, place heavy objects on it, or place it in a position where anyone could walk
on, trip over, or roll anything over it.
• When removing the electric plug from the instrument or an outlet, always hold the plug itself and not the
cord. Pulling by the cord can damage it.
• Do not connect the instrument to an electrical outlet using a multiple-connector. Doing so can result in lower
sound quality, or possibly cause overheating in the outlet.
• Remove the electric plug from the outlet when the instrument is not to be used for extended periods of time,
or during electrical storms.
• Before connecting the instrument to other electronic components, turn off the power for all components.
Before turning the power on or off for all components, set all volume levels to minimum. Also, be sure to set
the volumes of all components at their minimum levels and gradually raise the volume controls while playing
the instrument to set the desired listening level.
• Do not expose the instrument to excessive dust or vibrations, or extreme cold or heat (such as in direct sun-
light, near a heater, or in a car during the day) to prevent the possibility of panel disfiguration or damage to
the internal components.
• Do not use the instrument near other electrical products such as televisions, radios, or speakers, since this
might cause interference which can affect proper operation of the other products.
• Do not place the instrument in an unstable position where it might accidentally fall over.
• Before moving the instrument, remove all connected cables.
• When cleaning the instrument, use a soft, dry or slightly damp cloth. Do not use paint thinners, solvents,
cleaning fluids, or chemical-impregnated wiping cloths. Also, do not place vinyl, plastic or rubber objects on
the instrument, since this might discolor the panel or keyboard.
• Do not rest your weight on, or place heavy objects on the instrument, and do not use excessive force on the
buttons, switches or connectors.
• Take care that the key cover does not pinch your fingers, and do not insert a finger or hand in the key cover
gap.
• Never insert or drop paper or metallic or other objects between the slits of the key cover and the keyboard.
If this happens, immediately turn off the power and remove the electric plug from the outlet and have the
instrument inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel.
• Do not place the instrument against a wall (allow at least 3 cm/one-inch from the wall), since this can cause
inadequate air circulation, and possibly result in the instrument overheating.
• Read carefully the attached documentation explaining the assembly process. Failure to assemble the
instrument in the proper sequence might result in damage to the instrument or even injury.
• Do not operate the instrument for a long period of time at a high or uncomfortable volume level, since this
can cause permanent hearing loss. If you experience any hearing loss or ringing in the ears, consult a phy-
sician.
(1) B-6
CLP-970
5
PRECAUTIONS
■
USING THE BENCH (If included)
• Do not play carelessly with or stand on the bench. Using it as a tool or step-ladder or for any other purpose
might result in accident or injury.
• Only one person should sit on the bench at a time, in order to prevent the possibility of accident or injury.
• If the bench screws become loose due to extensive long-term use, tighten them periodically using the
included tool.
■
SAVING USER DATA
• Always save data to a floppy disk or an external device such as the Yamaha MIDI Data Filer MDF3 fre-
quently, in order to help prevent the loss of important data due to a malfunction or user operating error.
Yamaha cannot be held responsible for damage caused by improper use or modifications to the instrument,
or data that is lost or destroyed.
Always turn the power off when the instrument is not in use.
(1) B-6
6
CLP-970
Thank you for choosing the Yamaha Clavinova CLP-970/970M/970C. In order to make the most
of your Clavinova’s performance potential and features, please read this Owner’s Manual
thoroughly, and keep it in a safe place for later reference.
About this Owner’s Manual and Reference Booklet
This manual consists of four main sections: “Introduction,” “Basic Operation,” “Detailed Settings,” and “Appendix.” Also,
a separate “Reference Booklet” is provided.
Introduction:
Please read this section first. In the “Application Index” section on page 11 and “Features” on
page 16, you can learn how to use the Clavinova and its functions in particular situations.
Basic Operation:
This main section explains how to use the basic functions. Refer to this section while you
play the Clavinova. If you have questions or come across the words you do not know, refer to
the section entitled “Questions about Operations and Functions” on page 97, or the “Index”
on page 109.
Detailed Settings:
This section explains how to make detailed settings for the Clavinova’s various functions.
Refer to this section as necessary.
Appendix:
This section introduces troubleshooting, a description of preset voices, and other reference
material.
Reference Booklet:
XG Voice List, MIDI Data Format, etc.
* The models CLP-970M and CLP-970C will be referred to as the CLP-970 in this Owner’s Manual.
• The illustrations and LCD screens as shown in this Owner’s Manual are for instructional purposes only, and
may appear somewhat different from those on your instrument.
• Unauthorized copying of copyrighted software for purposes other than the purchaser’s personal use is pro-
hibited.
■
Trademarks
• Apple and Macintosh are trademarks of Apple Computer, Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.
• IBM-PC/AT is a trademark of International Business Machines Corporation.
• Windows is the registered trademark of Microsoft® Corporation.
All other trademarks are the property of their respective holders.
“The Clavinova-Computer Connection” is a supplementary guidebook that describes, for beginners, what
you can do with your Clavinova and a personal computer and how to set up a Clavinova-Computer system
(the manual is not written for any specific models). The document is available as a PDF file (in English) at
the following Internet address:
Clavinova Web site:
http://www.yamaha.co.jp/english/product/cl/
Yamaha Manual Library
(Electronic Musical Instruments)
http://www2.yamaha.co.jp/manual/english/
CLP-970
7
Table of contents
Introduction.......................................................... 2
PRECAUTIONS........................................................................................................................................ 3
About this Owner’s Manual and Reference Booklet..................................................................................................... 6
Table of contents ................................................................................................................................... 7
Application Index
Use this index to find reference pages that may be helpful for your application and situation. ................................. 11
Handling the Floppy Disk Drive(FDD) and Floppy Disk ...................................................................... 13
Maintenance ........................................................................................................................................ 14
Included Accessories ............................................................................................................................ 15
Features ................................................................................................................................................ 16
Before Using the Clavinova.................................................................................................................. 18
Key cover ....................................................................................................................................................................... 18
Music stand ................................................................................................................................................................... 18
Turning the power on................................................................................................................................................... 19
Adjusting the display contrast...................................................................................................................................... 20
Setting the volume ........................................................................................................................................................ 20
Using headphones......................................................................................................................................................... 20
Basic Operation .................................................. 21
Part Names........................................................................................................................................... 22
Listening to the Demonstration Tunes................................................................................................ 24
Listening to 50 Piano Preset Songs ..................................................................................................... 26
Playing the 50 piano preset songs ................................................................................................................................ 26
Practicing a one-hand part using 50 preset songs....................................................................................................... 28
Selecting and Playing Voices ............................................................................................................... 30
Selecting Voices............................................................................................................................................................. 30
Using the pedals ............................................................................................................................................................ 31
Adding variation to the sound [BRILLIANCE]/[REVERB]/[CHORUS].................................................................. 32
Transposition ... [TRANSPOSE].................................................................................................................................. 34
Combining two voices (Dual mode)............................................................................................................................ 35
Splitting the keyboard range and playing two different voices (Split mode) ............................................................ 37
Using the metronome................................................................................................................................................... 40
Recording Your Performance............................................................................................................... 41
Recording a New Song.................................................................................................................................................. 41
Recording to [TRACK 1]........................................................................................................................................ 41
Re-recording TRACK 1........................................................................................................................................... 43
Re-recording TRACK 1 partially............................................................................................................................ 44
Recording to [TRACK2]......................................................................................................................................... 45
Recording to the third or more tracks [EXTRA TRACKS] .................................................................................. 46
Other recording techniques.......................................................................................................................................... 46
Adding data to or recording over an existing song ............................................................................................... 46
8
CLP-970
Table of contents
Changing a voice or tempo after recording........................................................................................................... 47
Adjusting the volume balance between playback and your performance [SONG BALANCE] ......................... 48
Recording in Dual or Split mode ........................................................................................................................... 49
Saving Recorded Songs and Handling the Files...[FILE]...................................................................... 50
Clavinova memory.................................................................................................................................................. 50
Basic file operation.................................................................................................................................................. 51
Saving recorded or other songs to Clavinova Storage memory...[SaveToMemory]................................................. 52
Saving recorded or other songs to floppy disk...[SaveToDisk] .................................................................................. 53
Deleting songs in Clavinova Storage memory or a floppy disk...[DeleteSong]......................................................... 53
Renaming a song...[RenameSong]............................................................................................................................... 54
Copying data from one floppy disk to another...[CopyDisk] .................................................................................... 55
Formatting a floppy disk...[FormatDisk] .................................................................................................................... 56
Changing the type of characters on screen...[CharacterCode]................................................................................... 56
Playing Back Recorded Songs and Commercially-available Music Data............................................. 57
Playing back a song ....................................................................................................................................................... 57
Turning track playback on and off............................................................................................................................... 59
Supported song data type ............................................................................................................................................. 59
Connections ......................................................................................................................................... 61
Connectors .................................................................................................................................................................... 61
Connecting a personal computer................................................................................................................................. 63
Detailed Settings ................................................ 69
Detailed Settings.................................................................................................................................. 70
Parameter List ............................................................................................................................................................... 70
Making detailed settings ............................................................................................................................................... 72
Detailed settings for recording and playback [SONG SETTING] ........................................................ 74
Correcting note timing [Quantize].............................................................................................................................. 74
Specifying whether playback starts immediately along with the first voicing [QuickPlay]...................................... 75
Auditioning the channels [ChannelListen] ................................................................................................................. 75
Deleting data from each channel [ChannelClear]....................................................................................................... 75
Specifying the range and playing back repeatedly [FromToRepeat] ......................................................................... 75
Playing back the phrase specified by the phrase number [PhraseMark] ................................................................... 76
Playing back a song repeatedly [SongRepeat] ............................................................................................................. 76
Detailed settings for the metronome METRONOME [SETTING]........................................................ 77
Setting the metronome time signature [TimeSignature]............................................................................................ 77
Setting the metronome volume level [MetronomeVolume]...................................................................................... 77
Selecting the metronome voice [MetronomeSound] ................................................................................................. 77
Detailed settings for the voices [VOICE SETTING].............................................................................. 78
Setting the octave [Octave]*......................................................................................................................................... 78
Setting the volume level [Volume]*............................................................................................................................. 78
Setting the position of right and left channels [Pan]* ................................................................................................ 79
Fine tuning the pitch (only in Dual mode) [Detune]................................................................................................. 79
Selecting the reverb type [ReverbType]....................................................................................................................... 79
Setting the reverb depth [ReverbSend]*...................................................................................................................... 79
CLP-970
9
Table of contents
Selecting the chorus type [Chorus Type]..................................................................................................................... 80
Setting the chorus depth [ChorusSend]*..................................................................................................................... 80
Setting the chorus on/off [ChorusOnOff]................................................................................................................... 80
Selecting the variation effect type [VariationType] .................................................................................................... 80
Setting the variation effect depth [VariationSend]* ................................................................................................... 81
Setting the touch sensitivity [TouchSense]*................................................................................................................ 81
Setting the right pedal function [RPedal].................................................................................................................... 81
Setting the center pedal function [MPedal] ................................................................................................................ 82
Setting the left pedal function [LPedal]....................................................................................................................... 82
Setting the auxiliary pedal function [AuxPedal] ......................................................................................................... 82
MIDI [MIDI SETTING]........................................................................................................................... 83
About MIDI................................................................................................................................................................... 83
Setting the MIDI transmit channel [MidiOutChannel] ............................................................................................. 84
Setting the MIDI receive channel (Port A) [MidiInAChannel] ................................................................................. 84
Setting the MIDI receive channel (Port B) [MidiInAChannel] ................................................................................. 85
Setting Local control on/off [LocalControl]................................................................................................................ 85
Selecting performance from the keyboard or song data for MIDI transmission [MidiOutSelect].......................... 85
Selecting a type of data received via MIDI [ReceiveParameter]................................................................................. 85
Selecting a type of data transmitted via MIDI [TransmitParameter] ........................................................................ 86
Executing song data bulk dump [SongBulkDump].................................................................................................... 86
Transmitting the initial settings on the panel [InitialSetup]...................................................................................... 86
Executing voice data bulk dump [VoiceBulkDump].................................................................................................. 86
Other settings ...................................................................................................................................... 87
Selecting a touch response [TouchResponse] ............................................................................................................. 87
Fine tuning the pitch [Tune]........................................................................................................................................ 87
Selecting a tuning curve for a piano voice [PianoTuningCurve]............................................................................... 87
Selecting a scale [Scale]................................................................................................................................................. 88
Depth of string resonance [StringResonanceDepth] .................................................................................................. 88
Depth of sustain sampling for the damper pedal [SustainSamplingDepth].............................................................. 88
Setting the speed of vibraphone’s vibrato effect [VibraphoneRotorSpeed] .............................................................. 89
Selecting a pedal function for vibraphone [VibraphonePedalMode]........................................................................ 89
Assigning the START/PAUSE function to a pedal [PedalStart/Pause]...................................................................... 89
Selecting a type of auxiliary pedal [AuxPedalType].................................................................................................... 89
Setting the point at which the damper pedal starts to affect the sound [HalfPedalPoint] ....................................... 90
Pitch bend range [PitchBendRange]............................................................................................................................ 90
Replacing the XG voices with preset voices [XGAlternative]..................................................................................... 90
Selecting items saved at shutdown [MemoryBackUp] ............................................................................................... 91
Restoring the normal (default) settings [FactorySet] ................................................................................................. 91
Other method for restoring the normal settings......................................................................................................... 91
Message List ......................................................................................................................................... 92
Questions about Operations and Functions........................................................................................97
10
CLP-970
Table of contents
Appendix ............................................................ 99
Troubleshooting................................................................................................................................. 100
Data Compatibility............................................................................................................................. 101
Preset Voice List ................................................................................................................................. 103
Voice Combination Examples (Dual and Split) ................................................................................. 105
CLP-970/970M/970C: Keyboard Stand Assembly ............................................................................. 106
Index................................................................................................................................................... 109
CLP-970
11
Application Index
Use this index to find reference pages that may be helpful for your application
and situation.
Listening
Listening to demo songs...............................................“Listening to the Demonstration Tunes” on page 24
“Playing the 50 piano preset songs” on page 26
Listening to demo songs with different voices ............“Listening to the Demonstration Tunes” on page 24
Listening to songs from “50 greats for the Clavinova” .......“Playing the 50 piano preset songs” on page 26
Listening to my recorded performance ............................................ “Recording to [TRACK 1]” on page 41
“Playing back a song” on page 57
Listening to songs in a floppy disk............................................................. “Playing back a song” on page 57
Playing
Using three pedals.............................................................................................“Using the pedals” on page 31
Playing an accompaniment that matches pitch ................... “Transposition ... [TRANSPOSE]” on page 34
Changing tonal color
Viewing the list of voices................................................................................ “Preset Voice List” on page 103
Simulating a concert hall...........................................................................................“[REVERB]” on page 33
Combining two voices..................................................... “Combining two voices (Dual mode)” on page 35
Playing different sounds with left and right hands
...........................“Splitting the keyboard range and playing two different voices (Split mode)” on page 37
Making a voice brighter and sharper, or softer and smoother ........................“[BRILLIANCE]” on page 32
Adding spread to the sound .................................................................................... “[CHORUS]” on page 33
Practicing
Muting the right- or left-hand part ........... “Practicing a one-hand part using 50 preset songs” on page 28
Practicing with an accurate and steady tempo.......................................“Using the metronome” on page 40
Practicing using your recorded song .......................................... “Recording Your Performance” on page 41
“Turning track playback on and off” on page 59
Recording
Recording your performance......................................................“Recording Your Performance” on page 41
Saving recorded songs to floppy disks or memory
...........................................................“Saving Recorded Songs and Handling the Files...[FILE]” on page 50
12
CLP-970
Application Index
Use this index to find reference pages that may be helpful for your application and situation.
Settings
Making detailed settings for recording and playback
............................................“Detailed settings for recording and playback [SONG SETTING]” on page 74
Making detailed settings for the metronome
......................................... “Detailed settings for the metronome METRONOME [SETTING]” on page 77
Making detailed settings for the voices
................................................................. “Detailed settings for the voices [VOICE SETTING]” on page 78
Making detailed settings for MIDI ....................................................“MIDI [MIDI SETTING]” on page 83
Making detailed settings for the Clavinova.........................................................“Other settings” on page 87
Connecting the Clavinova to other devices
What is MIDI?..................................................................................... “MIDI [MIDI SETTING]” on page 83
Recording your performance.....................................................“AUX OUT [R], [L/L+R] jacks” on page 61
Raising the volume ..................................................................... “AUX OUT [R], [L/L+R] jacks” on page 61
Outputting other instruments’ sound from the Clavinova.......... “AUX IN [R], [L/L+R] jacks” on page 62
Connecting a computer........................................................ “Connecting a personal computer” on page 63
Assembling
Assembling and disassembling the Clavinova
................................................................... “CLP-970/970M/970C: Keyboard Stand Assembly” on page 106
Quick solution
What the Clavinova offers............................................................................. “Application Index” on page 11
“Features” on page 16
Returning to the main screen..............................................................................“[EXIT] button” on page 23
Resetting the Clavinova to the default setting
................................................................“Restoring the normal (default) settings [FactorySet]” on page 91
Meaning of the messages........................................................................................ “Message List” on page 92
If you have questions about operations and functions
..............................................................................“Questions about Operations and Functions” on page 97
Troubleshooting............................................................................................. “Troubleshooting” on page 100
CLP-970
13
Handling the Floppy Disk
Drive(FDD) and Floppy Disk
Precautions
Be sure to handle floppy disks and treat the disk drive with
care. Follow the important precautions below.
Compatible Disk Type
3.5" 2DD and 2HD type floppy disks can be used.
Inserting/Ejecting Floppy Disks
To insert a floppy disk into the disk drive:
Hold the disk so that the label of the disk is facing upward and
the sliding shutter is facing forward, towards the disk slot.
Carefully insert the disk into the slot, slowly pushing it all the
way in until it clicks into place and the eject button pops out.
To eject a floppy disk:
Before ejecting the disk, be sure to confirm that the floppy
disk drive is stopped. If the disk drive is operating (during
the [SaveToDisk] (P53), [DeleteSong] (P53), [RenameSong]
(P54), [CopyDisk] (P55), or [FormatDisk] (P56) opera-
tion), the Clavinova displays [Executing].
Never attempt to remove the disk or turn the power off
when the disk drive is operating. Doing so can damage the
disk and possibly the disk drive.
Press the eject button slowly as far as it will go; the disk will
automatically pop out. When the disk is fully ejected, care-
fully remove it by hand.
If the eject button is pressed too quickly, or if it is not
pressed in as far as it will go, the disk may not eject properly.
The eject button may become stuck in a half-pressed posi-
tion with the disk extending from the drive slot by only a few
millimeters. If this happens, do not attempt to pull out the
partially ejected disk, since using force in this situation can
damage the disk drive mechanism or the floppy disk. To
remove a partially ejected disk, try pressing the eject button
once again, or push the disk back into the slot and then
repeat the eject procedure.
Be sure to remove the floppy disk from the disk drive before
turning off the power. A floppy disk left in the drive for
extended periods can easily pick up dust and dirt that can
cause data read and write errors.
Cleaning the Disk Drive Read/Write Head
• Clean the read/write head regularly. This instrument
employs a precision magnetic read/write head which,
after an extended period of use, will pick up a layer of
magnetic particles from the disks used that will eventually
cause read and write errors.
• To maintain the disk drive in optimum working order
Yamaha recommends that you use a commercially-avail-
able dry-type head cleaning disk to clean the head about
once a month. Ask your Yamaha dealer about the avail-
ability of proper head-cleaning disks.
• Never insert anything but floppy disks into the disk drive.
Other objects may cause damage to the disk drive or
floppy disks.
Eject button
14 CLP-970
Handling the Floppy Disk Drive(FDD) and Floppy Disk
About the Floppy Disks
• To handle floppy disks with care:
• Do not place heavy objects on a disk or bend or apply
pressure to the disk in any way. Always keep floppy disks
in their protective cases when they are not in use.
• Do not expose the disk to direct sunlight, extremely high
or low temperatures, or excessive humidity, dust or liq-
uids.
• Do not open the sliding shutter and touch the exposed
surface of the floppy disk inside.
• Do not expose the disk to magnetic fields, such as those
produced by televisions, speakers, motors, etc., since
magnetic fields can partially or completely erase data on
the disk, rendering it unreadable.
• Never use a floppy disk with a deformed shutter or housing.
• Do not attach anything other than the provided labels to
a floppy disk. Also make sure that labels are attached in
the proper location.
• To protect your data (Write-protect Tab):
• To prevent accidental erasure of important data, slide the
disk’s write-protect tab to the “protect” position (tab
open).
• Data backup
• For maximum data security Yamaha recommends that
you keep two copies of important data on separate floppy
disks. This gives you a backup if one disk is lost or dam-
aged. To make a backup disk use the Copy Disk function
on page 55.
Maintenance
Clean the instrument using a dry, soft cloth or slightly damp, soft cloth (wring well).
Do not use benzine, thinner, detergent, or chemical cloth for cleaning. Do not place vinyl, plastic, or rubber
products on the instrument.
Otherwise, the panel or keys may be discolored or degraded.
Before using the Clavinova, be sure to read “Precautions” on pages 3-5.
Tuning
Unlike an acoustic piano, the Clavinova does not need to be tuned. It always stays perfectly in tune.
Transporting
If you move to another location, you can transport the Clavinova along with other stuff. You can move the unit as it
is (assembled) or you can disassemble the unit down to the condition when you first open the package. Transport the
keyboard horizontally. Do not lean it to the wall and the like.
write-protect tab open
(protect position)
16 CLP-970
The music stand can be removed to allow
placement of a laptop-type personal computer or
other equipment on top of the instrument. (page 18)
A set of standard
stereo headphones
can be plugged in
here for private
practice. (page 20)
Connect an optional
pedal here and assign
one of the various
functions to the pedal.
(page 62)
Connect the pedal
cord here to use the
Clavinova’s pedals.
(page 63)
These jacks allow you to connect
an external tone generator to
reproduce the sound via the
Clavinova’s internal sound system
and speakers. (page 62)
Connect a MIDI device
here to use various
MIDI functions.
(page 63, 66)
(About MIDI—page 83)
Connect recording equipment
(such as a cassette tape
recorder) here to record your
performance. (page 61)
This jack and selector switch allow direct
connection to a personal computer for
sequencing and other music applications.
(page 62-67)
PHONES
MIDI
HOST SELECT
PC-1 PC-2
Mac MIDI
TO HOST
AUX PEDAL
PEDAL
OUT INTHRU
L/L
+
RR
AUX IN
L/L
+
RR
AUX OUT
POWER
MIDI
SETTING
OTHER
SETTING
EFFECT
BRILLIANCE
VOICE
SETTING
CHORUSREVERBSTRINGS/
CHOIR
ORGAN
BASS
MALLET
ORGAN/
STRINGS
VOICE
E. PIANO/
BASS
PIANO
MAIN
LEFT
PIANO/
E. PIANO
SPLIT
POINT
HARPSI-
CHORD
HARPSI/
MALLET
TEMPO
METRONOME
UPDOWN
FILE
SONG
SETTING
SETTINGSTART/STOP
TRACK
1
SONG SELECTDEMO
TRANSPOSEMAX
MASTER VOLUME
MIN
CLP-970
SONG BALANCE
NEW SONG
TRACK
2
EXTRA
TRACKS
STOP
SONG
SYNCHRO START
START/
PAUSE
REC
CONTRASTB
D
YES
EXIT
NO
A
C
Features
The Yamaha Clavinova CLP-970 digital piano offers unmatched sonic realism and natural grand-piano type playabil-
ity as well as Yamaha’s original “AWM Dynamic Stereo Sampling” tone generation technology for rich, musical
voices, and a special “Graded Hammer” keyboard that provides graded key weight and response throughout the key-
board range. The CLP-970 GrandPiano1 voice features totally new samples painstakingly recorded from a full con-
cert grand piano. The CLP-970 GrandPiano1 voice features five velocity-switched samples (Dynamic Sampling), a
“Soundboard Reverb” (page 33) effect that accurately simulates the resonance of a piano soundboard, “String Reso-
nance” (page 88) that recreates resonance of piano strings, special “Sustain Sampling” (page 88)that samples the
unique resonance of an acoustic grand piano’s soundboard and strings when the damper pedal is pressed, and “Key-
off Samples” that add the subtle sound produced when the keys are released. The CLP-970 comes much closer to the
sound of a true acoustic piano.
CLP-970 17
Features
[OTHER SETTING]
Fine-tune the touch response
and pitch, etc. (page 87)
The Clavinova includes 50 preset
songs.
This section enables you to listen to
these songs, practice using a
convenient practice function, play back
Clavinova music data (sold in music
stores), and record and play back your
performance. (page 26, 41, 57)
The display allows
accurate control
and operation.
(page 23)
[MIDI SETTING]
Make detailed MIDI
settings, such as MIDI
receive/transmit
channels. (page 83)
[FILE]
Save recorded songs and
manage song files. (page 50)
MAIN voice gruop buttons
Select voices from 25 internal sounds
including Grand Piano 1. (page 30)
You can also combine two voices at a
time. (page 35)
[DEMO]
Demonstration playback
is available for each
voice. (page 24)
[METRONOME]
Use the
metronome
functions.
(page 40)
[CONTRAST]
Adjust the
brightness of
the display
using this
control.
(page 20)
[REVERB]/
[CHORUS]
Add reverb
(reverberation) and
spread (chorus) to
the sound.
(page 33)
[MASTER
VOLUME]
Adjust the
volume level
using this
slider.
(page 20)
[SONG SETTING]
Make detailed
settings for song
recording and
playback. (page 74)
[EXIT]
The screen returns to
its main display when
you press this button.
(page 23)
TRANSPOSE [ ] [ ]
You can shift the pitch
of the entire keyboard
up or down so that the
pitch will match that of
another instrument or
singer, while you play
the same keys.
(page 34)
TEMPO [DOWN]
[UP]
You can change the
song tempo
(speed).
(page 27, 40, 42, 58)
[VOICE
SETTING]
You can make
detailed settings
for tone and
effects.
(page 78)
BRILLIANCE
[ ] [ ]
Adjust the
brightness of
the tone using
these buttons.
(page 32)
LEFT voice group buttons/
[SPLIT POINT]
You can play different voices on
the left- and right-hand sections of
the keyboard. (page 37)
MIDI
SETTING
OTHER
SETTING
EFFECT
BRILLIANCE
VOICE
SETTING
CHORUSREVERBSTRINGS/
CHOIR
ORGAN
BASS
MALLET
ORGAN/
STRINGS
VOICE
E. PIANO/
BASS
PIANO
MAIN
LEFT
PIANO/
E. PIANO
SPLIT
POINT
HARPSI-
CHORD
HARPSI/
MALLET
CONTRASTB
D
YES
EXIT
NO
A
C
TEMPO
METRONOME
UPDOWN
FILE
SONG
SETTING
SETTINGSTART/STOP
TRACK
1
SONG SELECTDEMO
TRANSPOSEMAX
MASTER VOLUME
MIN
CLP-970
SONG BALANCE
NEW SONG
TRACK
2
EXTRA
TRACKS
STOP
SONG
SYNCHRO START
START/
PAUSE
REC
18 CLP-970
Before Using the Clavinova
Key cover
To open the key cover:
Lift the cover slightly, then push and slide it open.
To close the key cover:
Slide the cover toward you and gently lower the
cover over the keys.
Music stand
To install the music stand:
Hold the upper and bottom sides of the music stand with both hands and insert the peg on the speaker box
into the holes on the rear of the stand.
To remove the music stand:
Lift the music stand slightly, then pull it toward you to remove it.
Be careful to avoid catching your fingers
when opening or closing the cover.
CAUTION
Hold the cover with both hands when opening or closing it. Do not release it until it is fully opened or closed. Be
careful to avoid catching fingers (yours or others, especially children’s between the cover and the unit.
Do not place objects such as a piece of metal or paper on top of the key cover. Small objects placed on the key
cover may fall inside the unit when the cover is opened and may be nearly impossible to remove. This could
cause electric shock, short circuit, fire or other serious damage to the instrument.
• The music stand can be removed to allow
placement of a laptop personal computer or
other equipment on top of the instrument.
CLP-970 19
Before Using the Clavinova
Turning the power on
1. Connect the power cable.
First insert the plug of the power cable into the AC connector on the Clavinova, then plug the other end of
the cable into the proper AC outlet on the wall.
In some areas a plug adaptor may be provided to match the pin configuration of the AC wall outlets in
your area.
WARNING!
Make sure your CLP-970 is rated for the AC voltage supplied in the area in which it is to be used (voltage rating appears on the
name plate on the bottom panel). In some areas, a voltage selector may be provided on the bottom panel of the main keyboard
unit near the power cord. Make sure that the voltage selector is set for the voltage in your area. Connecting the unit to the wrong
AC supply can cause serious damage to the internal circuitry and may even pose a shock hazard!
Use only the AC power cord supplied with the CLP-970. If the supplied cord is lost or damaged and needs to be replaced, con-
tact your Yamaha dealer. The use of an inappropriate replacement can pose a fire and shock hazard!
The type of AC power cord provided with the CLP-970 may be different depending on the country in which it is purchased. (In
some areas a plug adaptor may be provided to match the pin configuration of the AC wall outlets in your area.) Do NOT modify
the plug provided with the CLP-970. If the plug will not fit the outlet, have a proper outlet installed by a qualified electrician.
2. Turn on the power to the Clavinova.
Press the [POWER] switch located on the right of the keyboard to turn the power on.
• The screen located in the center of the front panel and the power indica-
tor located below the left end of the keyboard lights up.
Power indicator
If you close the key cover
without turning the power
off, the power indicator
remains lit, indicating that
the power is still on.
Press the [POWER] switch again to turn off the power to the Clavinova.
• The screen and the power indicator turn off.
12
The power connector is located on the bottom of the key-
board, set back deeply.
(The shape of plug differs
depending on locale.)
TIP
Power indicator
[POWER] switch
A B
C D
NO YES
When you turn on the power to the Clavinova, a voice name
appears on the screen.
20 CLP-970
Before Using the Clavinova
Adjusting the display contrast
You can adjust the contrast of the display by turning the [CONTRAST] knob located to the right of the LCD.
CONTRAST:
difference between bright-
ness and darkness
Setting the volume
While playing the keyboard, adjust the volume level by moving the [MASTER VOLUME] slider on the left of
the front panel to the left or right.
MASTER VOLUME:
The volume level of the
entire keyboard sound
You can also adjust the
[PHONES] output level and
the AUX IN input level using
the [MASTER VOLUME]
slider.
Using headphones
Connect a pair of headphones to
one of the [PHONES] jacks. When
the headphones are plugged into
either of the [PHONES] jacks, the
internal speaker system is automat-
ically shut off.
Two [PHONES] jacks are provided.
Two sets of standard stereo head-
phones can be plugged in. (If you
are using only one pair of head-
phones, you can plug them into
either of these jacks.)
TERMINOLOGY
A B
C D
NO YES
CONTRAST
EXIT
Use this knob.
TERMINOLOGY
TIP
The level decreases. The level increases.
MASTER VOLUME
MIN MAX
Do not use the Clavinova at
a high volume level for a
long period of time, or your
hearing may be damaged.
PHONES
standard stereo phone plug
bottom surface
Optional headphones
HPE-160 Yamaha head-
phones.
TIP
21 CLP-970
Basic Operation
CLP-970 21
22 CLP-970
Part Names
Center “C”
POWER
MIDI
SETTING
OTHER
SETTING
EFFECT
BRILLIANCE
VOICE
SETTING
CHORUSREVERBSTRINGS/
CHOIR
ORGAN
BASS
MALLET
ORGAN/
STRINGS
VOICE
E. PIANO/
BASS
PIANO
MAIN
LEFT
PIANO/
E. PIANO
SPLIT
POINT
HARPSI-
CHORD
HARPSI/
MALLET
CONTRASTB
D
YES
EXIT
NO
A
C
TEMPO
METRONOME
UPDOWN
FILE
SONG
SETTING
SETTINGSTART/STOP
TRACK
1
SONG SELECTDEMO
TRANSPOSEMAX
MASTER VOLUME
MIN
CLP-970
SONG BALANCE
NEW SONG
TRACK
2
EXTRA
TRACKS
STOP
SONG
SYNCHRO START
START/
PAUSE
REC
MIDI
SETTING
OTHER
SETTING
EFFECT
BRILLIANCE
VOICE
SETTING
CHORUSREVERBSTRINGS/
CHOIR
ORGAN
BASS
MALLET
ORGAN/
STRINGS
VOICE
E. PIANO/
BASS
PIANO
MAIN
LEFT
PIANO/
E. PIANO
SPLIT
POINT
HARPSI-
CHORD
HARPSI/
MALLET
CONTRASTB
D
YES
EXIT
NO
A
C
TEMPO
METRONOME
UPDOWN
FILE
SONG
SETTING
SETTINGSTART/STOP
TRACK
1
SONG SELECTDEMO
TRANSPOSEMAX
MASTER VOLUME
MIN
CLP-970
SONG BALANCE
NEW SONG
TRACK
2
EXTRA
TRACKS
STOP
SONG
SYNCHRO START
START/
PAUSE
REC
PHONES
C0 D0 E0 F0 G0 A0 B0 C1 D1 E1 F1 G1 A1 B1 C2 D2 E2 F2 G2 A2 B2 C3 D3 E3 F3 G3 A3 B3 C4 D4 E4 F4 G4 A4 B4
C5 D5 E5 F5 G5 A5 B5 C6 D6 E6 F6 G6 A6 B6 C7
B-1A-1
]
1
2
3 5
D
E
F
H
L M O
G I J K N P
7 B
8
4 6 0 A
9 C
R
Q
S
T
Top panel
1
[POWER]..............................................P19
2 [MASTER VOLUME].............................P20
3 [DEMO] ...............................................P24
4 TRANSPOSE [ ] [ ] ..........................P34
5 SONG SELECT [ ] [ ]..........P26, 41, 57
6 SONG BALANCE [ ] [ ]....................P48
7 [TRACK1] [TRACK2] /
[EXTRA TRACKS] ............... P28, 41–46, 59
8 [FILE] ...................................................P50
9 SONG [STOP] /
[START/PAUSE] .......................P26, 42, 58
0 [REC]....................................................P42
A [SONG SETTING] ................................P74
B METRONOME [START/STOP] /
[SETTING]......................................P40, 77
C TEMPO [DOWN] [UP] .......P27, 40, 42, 58
D LCD buttons A [–] [+] / B [– (NO)] [+ (YES)] /
C [–] [+] / D [–] [+]...............................P23
E LCD screen ..........................................P23
F [CONTRAST] knob...............................P20
G [EXIT]...................................................P23
H Voice group buttons for the MAIN
section.................................................P30
I [SPLIT POINT] .....................................P38
J Voice group buttons for the LEFT
section.................................................P37
K [VOICE SETTING] ................................P78
L [REVERB]..............................................P33
M [CHORUS]............................................P33
N BRILLIANCE [ ] [ ] ...........................P32
O [MIDI SETTING]...................................P83
P [OTHER SETTING] ...............................P87
Q [PHONES] ............................................P20
R Soft pedal............................................P31
S Sostenuto pedal ..................................P31
T Damper pedal .....................................P31
CLP-970 23
Part Names
Connectors
D LCD buttons
E LCD
Use the LCD button A, B, C, or D to select the contents displayed on the LCD.
Check the screen located in the center of the top panel after every operation. A
voice name appears on the screen when you turn on the power to the unit.
G[EXIT] button
When you press this button, the unit returns to the default screen (the
screen that indicates a voice name(s) and is displayed when the power is
turned on).
MIDI
HOST SELECT
PC-1 PC-2
Mac MIDI
TO HOST
AUX PEDAL
PEDAL
OUT INTHRU
L/L
+
RR
AUX IN
L/L
+
RR
AUX OUT
[
U
V
WX Y
Z
U AUX OUT [R] [L/L+R]..........................P61
V AUX IN [R] [L/L+R] .............................P62
W [AUX PEDAL] ......................................P62
X [TO HOST] ..........................................P62
Y HOST SELECT ..................................... P62
Z MIDI [IN] [OUT] [THRU] .................... P63
[ [PEDAL] .............................................. P63
\
\
Floppy disk drive.................................P13
]
Panel logos
GM System Level 1
“GM System Level 1” is an addition to the MIDI
standard which guarantees that any data conform-
ing to the standard will play accurately on any
GM-compatible tone generator or synthesizer
from any manufacturer.
XG Format
XG is a new Yamaha MIDI specification which sig-
nificantly expands and improves on the “GM Sys-
tem Level 1” standard with greater voice handling
capacity, expressive control, and effect capability
while retaining full compatibility with GM.
bottom surface
A B
C D
NO YES
24 CLP-970
Listening to the Demonstration
Tunes
The Clavinova provides demonstration tunes that effectively demonstrate each of the MAIN voice groups.
Refer to the table below for voice names and corresponding demo songs.
Demonstration tunes
Procedure
Mode:
A mode is a status under
which you can execute a
certain function. In demo
mode, you can play back
demonstration tunes.
1. Engage the demo mode.
Press the [DEMO] button to engage the demo mode.
The MAIN voice group (upper row) button indicators light up in
sequence.
To adjust the volume level of
the demo songs, use the
[MASTER VOLUME] slider.
2. Select a tune and start playback.
Press the voice group button (upper row) of the desired
demonstration tune.
The corresponding voice button indicator lights up and playback
starts. Until you stop playback, the selected tune will be played
repeatedly using different voices (in the following order: PIANO
→
E. PIANO/BASS → HARPSICHORD → MALLET → ORGAN →
STRINGS/CHOIR).
Voice group Tunes Composer
PIANO
E.PIANO/BASS
HARPSICHORD
MALLET
ORGAN
STRINGS/CHOIR
Chanson de l’adieu
Original
Le Coucou
Original
Organ Concerto Op.4 No.2
Original
F.F. Chopin
–
L.C. Daguin
–
G.F. Händel
–
DEMO SONG SELECT
TRANSPOSE
MASTER VOLUME
TEMPO VOICE EFFECT
SONG
CLP-970
MIN MAX
NEW SONG
SONG BALANCE
UPDOWN
BRILLIANCE
TRACK
1
TRACK
2
EXTRA
TRACKS
FILE METRONOME
CONTRAST
SONG
SETTING
START/ STOP SETTING
SPLIT
POINT
VOICE
SETTING
REVERB
CHORUS MIDI
SETTING
OTHER
SETTING
REC
PIANO
MAIN
LEFT
E. PIANO/
BASS
HARPSI-
CHORD
MALLET ORGAN STRINGS/
CHOIR
STOP
START/
PAUSE
SYNCHRO START
EXIT
PIANO/
E. PIANO
HARPSI/
MALLET
ORGAN/
STRINGS
BASS
A B
C D
NO YES
1 4
3
4
2 3
MAIN voice
group buttons
TERMINOLOGY
A B
C D
NO YES
NOTE
26 CLP-970
Listening to 50 Piano Preset
Songs
The Clavinova provides performance data of 50 piano songs. You can just listen to these songs (page 26) or
use them for practice (page 28). You can also refer to the included “50 greats for the Clavinova” that contains
the scores for 50 piano preset songs.
Playing the 50 piano preset songs
Procedure
Song:
On the Clavinova, perfor-
mance data is called a
“Song.” This includes dem-
onstration tunes and piano
preset tunes.
1. Select a song.
Press one of the [SONG SELECT] buttons repeatedly to
select the desired piano song from P-001 to P-050.
You can play the keyboard
along with the preset song
playback. You can change the
voice playing on the keyboard.
2. Play a preset song.
Press the [START/PAUSE] button to start playback.
DEMO SONG SELECT
TRANSPOSE
MASTER VOLUME
TEMPO VOICE EFFECT
SONG
CLP-970
MIN MAX
NEW SONG
SONG BALANCE
UPDOWN
BRILLIANCE
TRACK
1
TRACK
2
EXTRA
TRACKS
FILE METRONOME
CONTRAST
SONG
SETTING
START/ STOP SETTING
SPLIT
POINT
VOICE
SETTING
REVERB
CHORUS MIDI
SETTING
OTHER
SETTING
REC
PIANO
MAIN
LEFT
E. PIANO/
BASS
HARPSI-
CHORD
MALLET ORGAN STRINGS/
CHOIR
STOP
START/
PAUSE
SYNCHRO START
EXIT
PIANO/
E. PIANO
HARPSI/
MALLET
ORGAN/
STRINGS
BASS
A B
C D
NO YES
1
2
3
4
METRONOME [START/STOP]
TEMPO [DOWN] [UP]
TERMINOLOGY
A B
C D
NO YES
The song number appears on the display.
Song select screen
TIP
• You can also use the C
[–]/[+] buttons to select a
song after pressing the
[SONG SELECT] button.
• [P-000: NewSong] is a
blank song provided for
you to record your perfor-
mance. (See page 41.)
• Use the SongRepeat
parameter in the “SONG
SETTING” menu to
select repeat playback of
all songs or repeat play-
back of a single song.
(See page 76.)
TIP
A B
C D
NO YES
the number of measures
CLP-970
27
Listening to 50 Piano Preset Songs
Adjusting the tempo
You can also use the D[–]/[+]
buttons to change the tempo.
Resetting the tempo
Whenever you select a new
preset song, the tempo is
automatically reset to the
song’s original value.
You can use the TEMPO [DOWN]/[UP] buttons to adjust the playback
tempo as required. The default tempo (the song’s original tempo) is set when
you press the [DOWN] and [UP] buttons simultaneously.
Press either of the SONG SELECT [ ]/[ ] buttons to return to the song
select screen.
3.
Stop the song playback.
When playback is complete, it automatically stops and the Clavinova
locates the top of the song. To stop playback in the middle of a song,
press the [STOP] button. You can also pause playback by pressing the
[START/PAUSE] button. Playback stops when you press the button.
Fast forward and rewind
You can perform the following operations in the song select screen:
• Use the B [–]/[+] buttons to move back and forth (rewind and fast for-
ward) through the song while the song is played or stopped.
• Press the SONG SELECT [ ] or the C [–] button during playback to
restart playback from the top of the song.
• Press the SONG SELECT [ ] or the C [+] button during playback to start
playback from the next song.
• Press the SONG SELECT [ ] or the C [–] button while playback is
stopped in the middle of the song to locate the top of the song.
Default screen:
The default screen is a voice
select screen (page 30) that
appears when you turn on
the power to the Clavinova.
4.
Return to the default screen.
Press the [EXIT] button.
TIP
NOTE
A B
C D
NO YES
TERMINOLOGY
28 CLP-970
Listening to 50 Piano Preset Songs
Practicing a one-hand part using 50 preset songs
The 50 preset songs have separate left- and right-hand parts on individual tracks. You can turn the left- and
right-hand parts on or off as required so you can practice the corresponding part (the part that is turned off)
on the keyboard. The right-hand part is played by [TRACK 1] and the left-hand part is played by [TRACK 2].
procedure
You can turn parts on or off,
even during playback.
1. Turn off the playback part you wish to practice.
After you select a song to practice, press the [TRACK1] or
[TRACK2] button to turn off the corresponding part.
When you first select a song, both [TRACK1] and [TRACK2] indica-
tors light up, indicating that you can play back both parts. When you
press one of the buttons to turn off playback, the corresponding but-
ton indicator turns off and the corresponding part playback is muted.
Pressing the buttons repeatedly toggles between playback on and off.
2. Start playback and playing.
Press the [START/PAUSE] button to start playback. Play the
part you just turned off.
Synchro:
Synchronous;occurring at the
same time
Starting playback automatically as you start playing the
keyboard (Synchro Start)
You can start playback as soon as you start playing the keyboard. This
is called the “Synchro Start” function.
To enter Synchro Start standby mode, press and hold down the
[STOP] button and press the [START/PAUSE] button. The [START/
PAUSE] indicator flashes.
Now play the keyboard. Playback starts simultaneously.
To cancel the Synchro Start function, press the [STOP] button while
the Clavinova is in Synchro Start standby mode.
DEMO SONG SELECT
TRANSPOSE
MASTER VOLUME
TEMPO VOICE EFFECT
SONG
CLP-970
MIN MAX
NEW SONG
SONG BALANCE
UPDOWN
BRILLIANCE
TRACK
1
TRACK
2
EXTRA
TRACKS
FILE METRONOME
CONTRAST
SONG
SETTING
START/ STOP SETTING
SPLIT
POINT
VOICE
SETTING
REVERB
CHORUS MIDI
SETTING
OTHER
SETTING
REC
PIANO
MAIN
LEFT
E. PIANO/
BASS
HARPSI-
CHORD
MALLET ORGAN STRINGS/
CHOIR
STOP
START/
PAUSE
SYNCHRO START
EXIT
PIANO/
E. PIANO
HARPSI/
MALLET
ORGAN/
STRINGS
BASS
A B
C D
NO YES
23
1
TIP
TERMINOLOGY
CLP-970 29
Listening to 50 Piano Preset Songs
3. Stop playback.
Resetting the part play-
back
Both parts are automatically
turned ON whenever you
select a new song.
When playback is complete, it automatically stops and the Clavinova
locates the top of the song. If you wish to stop playback in the middle
of a song, press the [STOP] button. You can also pause playback by
pressing the [START/PAUSE] button. Playback stops when you press
the button.
TIP
You can also assign a phrase in a song to repeatedly practice that part. Refer to
the [FromToRepeat] option in the “SONG SETTING” menu on page 75.
30 CLP-970
Selecting and Playing Voices
Selecting Voices
Procedure
To learn characteristics of
the voices, listen to demo
songs for each voice group
(page 24). Refer to “Preset
Voice List” on page 103 for
more information on charac-
teristics of each preset voice.
1. Select a voice group.
Press one of the MAIN voice group buttons (upper row).
Voice
On the Clavinova, a voice
means “tone” or “tonal color.”
You can control the loudness
of a voice by how hard you
play the keyboard, although
different playing styles (touch
sensitivities) have little or no
effect with the sound of cer-
tain musical instruments.
Refer to “Preset Voice List” on
page 103.
2. Select a voice.
Use the A [–]/[+] buttons to select a voice.
DEMO SONG SELECT
TRANSPOSE
MASTER VOLUME
TEMPO VOICE EFFECT
SONG
CLP-970
MIN MAX
NEW SONG
SONG BALANCE
UPDOWN
BRILLIANCE
TRACK
1
TRACK
2
EXTRA
TRACKS
FILE METRONOME
CONTRAST
SONG
SETTING
START/ STOP SETTING
SPLIT
POINT
VOICE
SETTING
REVERB
CHORUS MIDI
SETTING
OTHER
SETTING
REC
PIANO
MAIN
LEFT
E. PIANO/
BASS
HARPSI-
CHORD
MALLET ORGAN STRINGS/
CHOIR
STOP
START/
PAUSE
SYNCHRO START
EXIT
PIANO/
E. PIANO
HARPSI/
MALLET
ORGAN/
STRINGS
BASS
A B
C D
NO YES
1
2
MAIN voice
group buttons
TIP
TERMINOLOGY
TIP
Voice group Voice name Voice group Voice name
PIANO
GrandPiano1
MALLET
Vibraphone
GrandPiano2 Marimba
E.PIANO/
BASS
E.Piano1 Celesta
E.Piano2
ORGAN
PipeOrganPrincipal
SynthPiano PipeOrganFlute1
WoodBass PipeOrganFlute2
ElectricBass PipeOrganTutti
Bass&Cymbal JazzOrgan
HARPSI-
CHORD
Harpsichord8'
STRINGS/
CHOIR
Strings
Harpsichord8'+4' SynthStrings
ElectricClavichord SlowStrings
Choir
SlowChoir
Scat
CLP-970 31
Selecting and Playing Voices
Using the pedals
The Clavinova has three foot pedals: damper pedal (right), sostenuto
pedal (center), and soft pedal (left) that produce a range of expressive
effects similar to those produced by the pedals on an acoustic piano.
If the damper pedal doesn’t
work, or notes are sustained
even when the pedal is not
pressed, make sure that the
pedal cord is properly
plugged into the PEDAL jack
on the unit (see step 5 on
page 107). Also, make sure
that the RPedal parameter
in the “VOICE SETTING”
menu is set to ON (see page
81).
Damper (right) pedal
When you press the damper pedal, the notes
you play have a longer sustain.
When you select Grand Piano 1, pressing the
damper pedal activates the instrument’s special
“Sustain Samples” to accurately recreate the
unique resonance of an acoustic grand piano’s
soundboard and strings.
You can adjust the depth of
the resonance produced by
the “Sustain Samples” using
the Sustain Sampling Depth
parameter in the “OTHER
SETTING” menu. (See page
88.)
Sostenuto (center) pedal
If you play a note or chord on the keyboard
and press the sostenuto pedal while holding
the note(s), the notes will sustain as long as
the pedal is held. All subsequent notes will
not sustain.
You can assign a function to
each pedal via the “R
Pedal”, “M Pedal”, and “L
Pedal” parameters in the
“VOICE SETTING” menu.
(See page 81, 82.)
The center and left pedals
can also be assigned to
song start/stop operation
(START/PAUSE function) via
the “PedalStart/Pause”
parameter in the “OTHER
SETTING” menu (on page
89).
Soft pedal (left)
The soft pedal reduces the volume and slightly changes the timbre of notes
played while the pedal is pressed. (The soft pedal will not affect notes that are
already playing when it is pressed. Press the pedal immediately before you
play the target notes.)
With the Vibraphone and Jazz Organ voices, this pedal turns vibrato on and
off or toggles the speed of vibrato. (See page 82.)
TIP
q
h
.
q
.
q
.
When you press the damper
pedal here, the notes you
play before you release the
pedal have a longer sustain.
TIP
q
h
.
q
.
q
.
When you press the sostenuto
pedal here while holding the
note(s), the notes will sustain
as long as you hold the pedal.
TIP
TIP
32 CLP-970
Selecting and Playing Voices
Adding variation to the sound
[BRILLIANCE]/[REVERB]/[CHORUS]
The Effect function enables you to add expression to the sound. The Clavinova effects include Brilliance,
Reverb, and Chorus.
[BRILLIANCE]
You can use this control to adjust the brilliance of the tone and change the tonality to suit your preference.
Procedure
You can also use the D [–]/
[+] buttons after you press
one of the [BRILLIANCE]
buttons to select the desired
option.
Normal setting = Normal
Normal setting:
The “Normal setting” refers
to the default setting (factory
setting) obtained when you
first turn on the power to the
Clavinova.
If you select [Bright] or
[Metallic] as the type of bril-
liance, the volume level will
increase slightly. Under this
condition, if you raise the
[MASTER VOLUME] slider
setting, the sound may
become distorted. In this
case, lower the volume
accordingly.
Press one of the BRILLIANCE [ ]/ [ ] buttons to select the
desired tonality.
Dark.................... Dark tone
Mellow ................ Soft and mellow tone
Normal ............... Standard tone
Bright ................. Bright tone
Metallic............... Sharp metallic tone
Press the [EXIT] button to return to the main screen.
DEMO SONG SELECT
TRANSPOSE
MASTER VOLUME
TEMPO VOICE EFFECT
SONG
CLP-970
MIN MAX
NEW SONG
SONG BALANCE
UPDOWN
BRILLIANCE
TRACK
1
TRACK
2
EXTRA
TRACKS
FILE METRONOME
CONTRAST
SONG
SETTING
START/ STOP SETTING
SPLIT
POINT
VOICE
SETTING
REVERB
CHORUS MIDI
SETTING
OTHER
SETTING
REC
PIANO
MAIN
LEFT
E. PIANO/
BASS
HARPSI-
CHORD
MALLET ORGAN STRINGS/
CHOIR
STOP
START/
PAUSE
SYNCHRO START
EXIT
PIANO/
E. PIANO
HARPSI/
MALLET
ORGAN/
STRINGS
BASS
A B
C D
NO YES
[REVERB] [CHORUS]
BRILLIANCE [ ] [ ]
TIP
TIP
TERMINOLOGY
NOTE
A B
C D
NO YES
CLP-970 33
Selecting and Playing Voices
[REVERB]
This control adds reverberation to the sound by simulating the natural reverberation of a concert hall.
Procedure
You can select a reverb type
via the Reverb Type param-
eter in the “VOICE SET-
TING” menu, and adjust the
reverb depth for the selected
voice via the Reverb Send
parameter. (See page 79.)
Normal setting = ON
Pressing the [REVERB] button repeatedly toggles the reverb
on and off.
Even if the reverb effect is turned off, a “soundboard reverb” effect
will be applied when the GrandPiano1 or GrandPiano2 voice is
selected.
[CHORUS]
This control adds spread and spaciousness to the sound.
Procedure
You can select a chorus type
via the Chorus Type param-
eter in the “VOICE SET-
TING” menu, and adjust the
chorus depth for the
selected voice via the
Reverb Send parameter. You
can also turn chorus on or
off via the Chorus On Off
parameter. (See page 80.)
Normal Setting
The normal chorus on/off
setting is different for each
voice.
Pressing the [CHORUS] button repeatedly toggles the cho-
rus on and off.
You can turn the chorus effect on and off by pressing the [CHORUS]
ON/OFF buttons on the panel and by setting the Chorus On Off
parameter in the VOICE SETTING menu (see page 80). The [CHO-
RUS] ON/OFF button setting on the panel is temporary. That is, if
you select another voice, the chorus setting for the previous voice is
cancelled. The Chorus On Off parameter setting is saved for each
voice. That is, if you select a given voice, the chorus setting is auto-
matically turned on or off according to the saved chorus setting.
TIP
TIP
TIP
TIP
34 CLP-970
Selecting and Playing Voices
Transposition ... [TRANSPOSE]
The Clavinova’s Transpose function makes it possible to shift the pitch of the entire keyboard up or down in
semitone intervals to facilitate playing in difficult key signatures, and to let you easily match the pitch of the
keyboard to the range of a singer or other instruments. For example, if you set the transposition amount to
“5,” playing key C produces pitch F. In this way, you can play the song as if it were in C major, and the Clavi-
nova will transpose it to the key of F.
You can also change the key signature of playback songs, in addition to your own performance.
Procedure
Transpose:
Changing the key signature
of a song. On the Clavinova,
transposing shifts the pitch
of the entire keyboard.
1. Display the Transpose screen.
Press one of the TRANSPOSE [ ] and [ ] buttons.
2. Select a type of transposition from Manual or Song.
Use the C [–] and [+] buttons to select Manual or Song.
Manual ............... Your manual performance
Song .................... Playback song
The transposition range is
from “–12 semitones” (down
one octave) through “0” (nor-
mal pitch) to “12 semitones”
(up one octave).
3. Set the transposition amount.
Use the D [–] and [+] or TRANSPOSE [ ] and [ ] buttons
to set the transposition amount.
To set the amount of transposition to “0,” press the D [–] and [+] but-
tons or the TRANSPOSE [ ] and [ ] buttons simultaneously.
4. Return to the main screen.
Press the [EXIT] button.
DEMO SONG SELECT
TRANSPOSE
MASTER VOLUME
TEMPO VOICE EFFECT
SONG
CLP-970
MIN MAX
NEW SONG
SONG BALANCE
UPDOWN
BRILLIANCE
TRACK
1
TRACK
2
EXTRA
TRACKS
FILE METRONOME
CONTRAST
SONG
SETTING
START/ STOP SETTING
SPLIT
POINT
VOICE
SETTING
REVERB
CHORUS MIDI
SETTING
OTHER
SETTING
REC
PIANO
MAIN
LEFT
E. PIANO/
BASS
HARPSI-
CHORD
MALLET ORGAN STRINGS/
CHOIR
STOP
START/
PAUSE
SYNCHRO START
EXIT
PIANO/
E. PIANO
HARPSI/
MALLET
ORGAN/
STRINGS
BASS
A B
C D
NO YES
21 3 3
4
TERMINOLOGY
A B
C D
NO YES
TIP
CLP-970 35
Selecting and Playing Voices
Combining two voices (Dual mode)
You can play two voices simultaneously across the entire range of the keyboard. In this way, you can simulate
a melody duet or combine two similar voices to create a thicker sound. Refer to “Voice Combination Exam-
ples (Dual and Split)” on page 105 for examples of effective voice combinations.
Dual mode using voices in different voice groups
Procedure
1. Enter Dual mode.
Press two MAIN voice group buttons (upper row) simulta-
neously.
2. Select a voice.
Use the A [–]/[+] buttons and B [–]/[+] buttons to select a
voice.
The voices listed in the upper row in “Preset Voice List” on page 103
are called 1st voices, and those listed in the bottom row are called 2nd
voices.
3. Exit Dual mode and return to normal play mode.
Press any MAIN voice group button.
DEMO SONG SELECT
TRANSPOSE
MASTER VOLUME
TEMPO VOICE EFFECT
SONG
CLP-970
MIN MAX
NEW SONG
SONG BALANCE
UPDOWN
BRILLIANCE
TRACK
1
TRACK
2
EXTRA
TRACKS
FILE METRONOME
CONTRAST
SONG
SETTING
START/ STOP SETTING
SPLIT
POINT
VOICE
SETTING
REVERB
CHORUS MIDI
SETTING
OTHER
SETTING
REC
PIANO
MAIN
LEFT
E. PIANO/
BASS
HARPSI-
CHORD
MALLET ORGAN STRINGS/
CHOIR
STOP
START/
PAUSE
SYNCHRO START
EXIT
PIANO/
E. PIANO
HARPSI/
MALLET
ORGAN/
STRINGS
BASS
A B
C D
NO YES
1 32
2 3 1 4
2
MAIN voice
The numbers on the upper row indicate the steps
The numbers on the bottom row indicate the steps
group buttons
in Dual mode using voices from different groups.
in Dual mode using voices from the same group.
MAIN voice
group buttons
A B
C D
NO YES
1st voice 2nd voice
36 CLP-970
Selecting and Playing Voices
Dual mode using voices in the same voice group
Procedure
1. Select a voice group.
In normal play mode, press the desired MAIN voice group
button.
2. Select a voice.
Use the A [–]/[+] buttons to select a voice.
3. Select another voice.
Use the B [–]/[+] buttons to select another voice in the
same voice group.
To use the identical voices, press the B [–]/[+] buttons once. To use
different voices within the same voice group, press the B [–]/[+] but-
tons repeatedly.
4. Exit Dual mode and return to normal play mode.
Press any MAIN voice group button.
A B
C D
NO YES
CLP-970 37
Selecting and Playing Voices
Splitting the keyboard range and playing two differ-
ent voices (Split mode)
Split mode enables you to play two different voices on the keyboard — one with the left hand and another
with the right hand. For example, you can play a bass part using the Wood Bass or Electric Bass voice with the
left hand, and a melody with the right hand. Refer to “Voice Combination Examples (Dual and Split)” on
page 105 for examples of effective voice combinations.
Procedure
1. Enter Split mode.
Press one of the LEFT voice group buttons (bottom row).
2. Select a voice for the right hand.
Use the MAIN voice group buttons (upper row) and the A
[–]/[+] buttons.
3. Select a voice for the left hand.
Use the LEFT voice group buttons (bottom row) and the C
[–]/[+] buttons.
DEMO SONG SELECT
TRANSPOSE
MASTER VOLUME
TEMPO VOICE EFFECT
SONG
CLP-970
MIN MAX
NEW SONG
SONG BALANCE
UPDOWN
BRILLIANCE
TRACK
1
TRACK
2
EXTRA
TRACKS
FILE METRONOME
CONTRAST
SONG
SETTING
START/ STOP SETTING
SPLIT
POINT
VOICE
SETTING
REVERB
CHORUS MIDI
SETTING
OTHER
SETTING
REC
PIANO
MAIN
LEFT
E. PIANO/
BASS
HARPSI-
CHORD
MALLET ORGAN STRINGS/
CHOIR
STOP
START/
PAUSE
SYNCHRO START
EXIT
PIANO/
E. PIANO
HARPSI/
MALLET
ORGAN/
STRINGS
BASS
A B
C D
NO YES
2
1 3 5
2
3 44
MAIN voice
LEFT voice
group buttons
group buttons
A B
C D
NO YES
38 CLP-970
Selecting and Playing Voices
A specified “split point” key
is included in the left-hand
range.
4. Specify the split point (the border between the right-
and left-hand range).
The normal setting of the split point is “F
I
2.”
Voice group
Voice name
MAIN LEFT
PIANO PIANO/E.PIANO GrandPiano1
GrandPiano2
E.PIANO/BASS E.Piano1
E.Piano2
SynthPiano
BASS WoodBass
ElectricBass
Bass&Cymbal
HARPSICHORD HARPSICHORD/MALLET Harpsichord8'
Harpsichord8'+4'
EcelctricClavichord
MALLET Vibraphone
Marimba
Celesta
ORGAN ORGAN/STRINGS PipeOrganPrincipal
PipeOrganFlute1
PipeOrganFlute2
PipeOrganTutti
JazzOrgan
STRINGS/CHOIR Strings
SynthStrings
SlowStrings
Choir
SlowChoir
Scat
TIP
F
2
Center “C”
CLP-970 39
Selecting and Playing Voices
To change the split point setting:
Press the [SPLIT POINT] button, then use the D [–]/[+] but-
tons to specify the split point.
(Optional) Press and hold down the [SPLIT POINT] button
and play the key you wish to assign as the split point.
Press the [EXIT] button to return to the main screen.
5. Exit Split mode and return to normal play mode.
Press the voice group button that you pressed for the left-
hand range.
In Split mode, you can use Dual mode (see page 35) for the MAIN and
LEFT ranges respectively.
A B
C D
NO YES
A B
C D
NO YES
40 CLP-970
Selecting and Playing Voices
Using the metronome
The Clavinova is built-in metronome (a device that keeps an accurate tempo) is a convenient feature for
practice.
Procedure
1. Start the metronome.
Press the METRONOME [START/STOP] button.
When the metronome is sounding, the beat indicator flashes at the
current tempo.
Adjusting the tempo
The default tempo is 120. (If
a song has been selected,
the song tempo is used.)
Press the TEMPO [DOWN] or [UP] button.
You can set the time signa-
ture, metronome volume,
and metronome tone using
the METRONOME [SET-
TING] button. (See page 77.)
To adjust the tempo (number of beats per minute: 10–400), use the TEMPO
[DOWN]/[UP] or the D [–]/[+] buttons. To reset the tempo to the normal
(default) setting, press the [DOWN] and [UP] keys or the D [–] and [+] keys
simultaneously.
Press the [EXIT] button to return to the normal screen.
2. Stop the metronome.
Press the METRONOME [START/STOP] button.
DEMO SONG SELECT
TRANSPOSE
MASTER VOLUME
TEMPO VOICE EFFECT
SONG
CLP-970
MIN MAX
NEW SONG
SONG BALANCE
UPDOWN
BRILLIANCE
TRACK
1
TRACK
2
EXTRA
TRACKS
FILE METRONOME
CONTRAST
SONG
SETTING
START/ STOP SETTING
SPLIT
POINT
VOICE
SETTING
REVERB
CHORUS MIDI
SETTING
OTHER
SETTING
REC
PIANO
MAIN
LEFT
E. PIANO/
BASS
HARPSI-
CHORD
MALLET ORGAN STRINGS/
CHOIR
STOP
START/
PAUSE
SYNCHRO START
EXIT
PIANO/
E. PIANO
HARPSI/
MALLET
ORGAN/
STRINGS
BASS
A B
C D
NO YES
1 2
TEMPO [DOWN] [UP]
TIP
A B
C D
NO YES
TIP
CLP-970 41
Recording Your Performance
You can record your perfor-
mance (audio data) to a cas-
sette tape recorder or other
recording devices via the
AUX OUT connector. (see
page 61.)
This chapter explains how to record your performance using the Clavinova
recording function.
You can, for example, play back what you have played on the Clavinova key-
board for an effective practice aid. You can also record just the left-hand part,
then practice the right-hand part while playing back the recorded left-hand
part.
Since you can record up to sixteen tracks separately, you could record the left-
and right-hand parts separately, or record each part of a four-handed perfor-
mance or ensemble song one by one to build a song.
Recording vs. Saving:
The format of performance data recorded on a cassette tape differs from that of data recorded on the Clavinova. A cas-
sette tape records audio signals. On the other hand, the Clavinova “saves” information regarding note timing, voices, and
a tempo value, but not audio signals. When you play back recorded songs, the Clavinova produces sound based on the
saved information. Therefore, recording on the Clavinova may be more accurately called “saving information.” However,
this book often uses the word “recording” because it seems to make more sense.
A message (information or confirmation dialog) sometimes appears on the screen to facilitate operation.
Refer to the “Message List” on page 92 for an explanation of each message, appropriate actions to take, and
troubleshooting information.
Recording a New Song
Recording to [TRACK 1]
Procedure
If you select a song other
than “P-000: NewSong” and
record on a track that already
has data, the existing data on
the track will be lost.
1. Select “NewSong” for recording.
Press the SONG SELECT [ ] [ ] buttons simulta-
neously.
TIP
TERMINOLOGY
DEMO SONG SELECT
TRANSPOSE
MASTER VOLUME
TEMPO VOICE EFFECT
SONG
CLP-970
MIN MAX
NEW SONG
SONG BALANCE
UPDOWN
BRILLIANCE
TRACK
1
TRACK
2
EXTRA
TRACKS
FILE METRONOME
CONTRAST
SONG
SETTING
START/ STOP SETTING
SPLIT
POINT
VOICE
SETTING
REVERB
CHORUS MIDI
SETTING
OTHER
SETTING
REC
PIANO
MAIN
LEFT
E. PIANO/
BASS
HARPSI-
CHORD
MALLET ORGAN STRINGS/
CHOIR
STOP
START/
PAUSE
SYNCHRO START
EXIT
PIANO/
E. PIANO
HARPSI/
MALLET
ORGAN/
STRINGS
BASS
A B
C D
NO YES
3
3 5
4 6
5
1
2
NOTE
A B
C D
NO YES
New Song screen
42 CLP-970
Recording Your Performance
Set the tempo in Step 3.
See page 49 for more infor-
mation on recording in Dual/
Split mode.
2. Select a voice.
Select a voice (or voices) for recording (see page 30).
Set the other parameters, such as reverb and chorus.
Adjust the [MASTER VOLUME] slider to set the volume level to suit
your preference. You can also use the slider to adjust the level during
playback.
After you set the tempo or if the record standby screen does not
appear, press one of the SONG SELECT [ ] [ ] buttons once to
return to the New Song screen.
3. Enter record mode and select a recording track.
Press and hold down the [REC] button and press the
[TRACK 1] button.
The [TRACK 1] indicator flashes in red. (To cancel recording, press
the [REC] or [STOP] button.)
Set the tempo, if necessary.
If this record standby screen does not appear, press one of the SONG
SELECT [ ] [ ] buttons once.
You can record data while
using the metronome. The
metronome is not recorded.
When you press the
[START/PAUSE] button dur-
ing recording, recording is
paused. To resume record-
ing, press the [START/
PAUSE] button again or play
a note on the keyboard.
4. Start and stop recording.
Recording begins automatically as soon as you play a
note on the keyboard.
(Optional) Press the [START/PAUSE] button to start recording.
The recording screen displays the current measure number.
When you press the [REC]
button, recording pauses.
To stop recording, press the [STOP] button. The Clavinova
locates the top of the song.
The [TRACK 1] indicator lights up in green. (Record mode is auto-
matically cancelled.)
NOTE
NOTE
Record standby screen
A B
C D
NO YES
TIP
TIP
A B
C D
NO YES
Measure number in recording
Record screen
TIP
CLP-970 43
Recording Your Performance
To erase recorded data from
a track, use the Channel
Clear parameter in the
“SONG SETTING” menu.
(See page 75.)
5. Play back the recorded performance.
Press the [START/PAUSE] button to play back the recorded
performance.
When playback is complete, it automatically stops and the Clavinova
locates the top of the song. To stop playback in the middle of a song,
press the [STOP] button. You can also pause playback by pressing the
[START/PAUSE] button. Playback stops when you press the button.
Re-recording TRACK 1
This section explains how to record again in case your performance was not satisfactory.
Procedure
1. Select a voice or voices for recording, if necessary.
Repeat Step 2 on page 42 if you wish to change the previ-
ous settings.
Follow the procedure from Step 3 on page 42 to re-record.
The original performance data will be overwritten by new performance data.
NOTE
When you turn off the power to the Clavinova, the recorded performance
data will be lost. If you wish to keep the recording, save the data using the
SaveToMemory parameter (page 52) or SaveToDisk parameter (page 53) in
the File menu.
44 CLP-970
Recording Your Performance
Re-recording TRACK 1 partially
This section explains how to record part of a song again.
Procedure
If the playback screen is not
displayed, press one of the
SONG SELECT
[] []
buttons once.
1. Pause the song at the beginning of the part you wish
to re-record.
Use the B [–]/[+] buttons while the playback screen is dis-
played to move through the measures or play back the
recording and press the [START/PAUSE] button to locate a
point slightly prior to the beginning of the part you wish
to re-record.
2. Select a voice or voices for recording, if necessary.
Repeat Step 2 on page 42 if you wish to change the previ-
ous settings.
3. Select the recording method and enter record mode.
3-1 Press and hold down the [REC] button, and press the
C [–]/[+] buttons repeatedly to specify how the
recording should start and press the D [–]/[+] buttons
repeatedly to specify how the recording should end.
While you are holding down the [REC] button, the following record-
ing method select screen appears.
Starting methods:
Norm (Normal) — The existing data will be erased after re-recording
starts.
Key On — Data that exists prior to the point where you start playing a
note will not be erased.
NOTE
A B
C D
NO YES
Playback screen
A B
C D
NO YES
CLP-970 45
Recording Your Performance
Ending methods:
Replace – The data after the point you stop recording will also be
erased.
Punch Out — The data after the point you stop recording will remain.
If you cancel recording by
pressing the [REC] button,
recording stops when you
press the button. If you can-
cel recording by pressing
the [STOP] button, the Clavi-
nova locates the top of the
song.
3-2 Keep holding down the [REC] button and press the
[TRACK 1] button.
The [TRACK 1] indicator flashes in red.
(To stop recording, press the [REC] button again or press the [STOP]
button.)
Follow the procedure beginning with Step 4 on page 42.
Recording to [TRACK2]
This section explains how to record another part on the second track.
Procedure
1. Select a voice.
Select a voice (or voices) for recording.
Repeat Step 2 on page 42.
Pressing the [TRACK 1] but-
ton repeatedly toggles
between playback on (the
indicator lights up in green)
and off (the indicator turns
off).
2. Enter record mode and select a recording track.
Press and hold down the [REC] button and press the
[TRACK 2] button.
The [TRACK 2] indicator flashes in red. (To cancel recording, press
the [REC] or [STOP] button.)
Make the recording by following the procedure beginning with Step 4 on page 42.
You can record a new part while listening to playback of the recorded [TRACK 1] data.
TIP
DEMO SONG SELECT
TRANSPOSE
MASTER VOLUME
TEMPO VOICE EFFECT
SONG
CLP-970
MIN MAX
NEW SONG
SONG BALANCE
UPDOWN
BRILLIANCE
TRACK
1
TRACK
2
EXTRA
TRACKS
FILE METRONOME
CONTRAST
SONG
SETTING
START/ STOP SETTING
SPLIT
POINT
VOICE
SETTING
REVERB
CHORUS MIDI
SETTING
OTHER
SETTING
REC
PIANO
MAIN
LEFT
E. PIANO/
BASS
HARPSI-
CHORD
MALLET ORGAN STRINGS/
CHOIR
STOP
START/
PAUSE
SYNCHRO START
EXIT
PIANO/
E. PIANO
HARPSI/
MALLET
ORGAN/
STRINGS
BASS
A B
C D
NO YES
2
2
1
TIP
46 CLP-970
Recording Your Performance
Recording to the third or more tracks [EXTRA TRACKS]
You can continue recording other parts into tracks 3–16 [EXTRA TRACKS] one by one.
Procedure
1. Hold down the [REC] button in step 2 in the “Record-
ing to [TRACK2]” on page 45 and use the B [–]/[+] but-
tons to select a recording track (3–16).
2. While holding down the [REC] key, press the [EXTRA
TRACKS] button.
Then, follow the procedure beginning with Step 4 on page 42.
Other recording techniques
Adding data to or recording over an existing song
The previous section explains how to record your performance from the beginning by selecting a blank “P-
000: NewSong.” You can also add your performance to or overwrite existing songs (such as 50 preset songs
[P-001—P-050], commercially-available music data [see page 60], or your old recorded performances [see
page 50]).
Procedure
If you record on a track that
already has data, the exist-
ing data on the track will be
lost.
1. Select a song for recording (P-001 – P-050).
Select one of the preset songs (P-001–P-050) instead of “P-000:
NewSong” as described in Step 1 of “Recording to [TRACK1]” on
page 41. To select a song from commercial music data sold in stores or
from already-recorded data, see Steps 1 and 2 on page 57.
To continue recording, follow the procedure described in “Recording a New Song” from page 41 to 46.
A B
C D
NO YES
select a recording track (3-16)
NOTE
CLP-970 47
Recording Your Performance
Changing a voice or tempo after recording
You can change the voice and tempo after recording to change a song’s feel or to set a more suitable tempo.
You can also change these elements in the middle of a song.
Procedure
Refer to “Questions about
Operations and Functions”
on page 97 for information
on the settings that can be
changed here.
1. Select a song you wish to change by using the SONG
SELECT [ ] [ ] buttons.
2. To change the voice or tempo in the middle of the
song, specify the measure to change using the B [–]/
[+] buttons.
Change the tempo in Step 4.
3. Change the settings (voice, reverb, etc.).
For example, if you wish to change the recorded E.Piano1 voice to E.
Piano2, use the MAIN voice group buttons and the A [–]/[+] buttons
to select E.Piano2.
When the setting is complete, press one of the SONG SELECT [ ]
[ ] buttons once to return to the song select screen.
The edited settings (except
for the tempo setting) will be
saved in memory and you
will not be able to restore the
previous settings. Proceed
with caution.
4. Press and hold down the [REC] button and select the
track to change.
The indicator for the selected track lights up in red.
Change the tempo setting now, if necessary.
At this point, do not play the keyboard or press the [START/PAUSE]
button. Otherwise, recording will start, erasing the recorded data.
5. Press the [STOP] or [REC] button to exit record mode.
TIP
TIP
CAUTION
48 CLP-970
Recording Your Performance
Adjusting the volume balance between playback and your performance [SONG
BALANCE]
While recording multiple parts into tracks one by one, you can adjust the volume balance between the play-
back of the recorded parts and your current performance.
Procedure
Commercially-available
song data contains a large
amount of data. If you are
using such songs, be sure to
adjust the song balance.
1. Press one of the SONG BALANCE [ ] [ ] buttons.
The song balance setting is
also used during playback.
(See page 57.)
2. Adjust the song balance using the SONG BALANCE
[ ] [ ] or D [–]/[+] buttons.
To lower the volume of the playback sound, press the SONG BAL-
ANCE [ ] or D [–] button.
To lower the volume of the performance sound, press the SONG BAL-
ANCE [ ] or D [+] button.
Setting range:
127:127 – 1:127 (Lowering the volume of the playback sound)
127:127 – 127:1 (Lowering the volume of the performance sound)
Normal setting: 127:127
TIP
A B
C D
NO YES
TIP
CLP-970 49
Recording Your Performance
Recording in Dual or Split mode
When you record in Dual or Split mode, the Clavinova records each voice onto a separate track. The follow-
ing table shows how tracks are assigned to each voice.
CAUTION
When you record multiple parts into tracks one by one, or when you record new data over an existing song (see
page 46), the existing data will be erased. Proceed with caution.
In the following example, Tracks 1, 2, and EXTRA TRACKn have been selected for recording.
Note: TRACKn = TRACK 3 – TRACK 16
If “n+1,” “n+2,” and “n+3” exceed 16, TRACKs 1, 2, and 3 are used.
Switching between Dual and Split mode in a song is not recorded.
Tracks assigned for
recording
Dual Split Split+Dual
TRACK1 TRACK2
EXTRA
TRACKn
TRACK1 TRACK2
EXTRA
TRACKn
TRACK1 TRACK2
EXTRA
TRACKn
↓↓↓ ↓↓↓ ↓↓↓
Tracks
used for
record-
ing
MAIN
(1st voice)
TRACK1 TRACK2 TRACKn TRACK1 TRACKn TRACK1 TRACKn
LEFT
(1st voice)
–
TRACK2 TRACKn+1 TRACK2 TRACKn +1
MAIN
(2nd voice)
TRACK3 TRACK4
TRACKn
+2
–
TRACK3 TRACKn +2
LEFT
(2nd voice)
––
TRACK4 TRACKn +3
TIP
50 CLP-970
Saving Recorded Songs and
Handling the Files...[FILE]
File
A file contains a group of
data. On the Clavinova, a
song file includes song data
and a song number.
Memory
Memory is a location inside
the Clavinova in which you
can save and edit data.
Formatting (Initializing)
Floppy disks are a conve-
nient media that allow you to
save various data for per-
sonal computers and other
devices. There are many
ways (formats) to save data
on floppy disks, depending
on the device. Therefore,
you need to prepare a floppy
disk by assigning a format
before you can use it on a
particular type of device.
This operation is called “for-
matting.”
Character code
Type of characters
File screens (accessed via the [FILE] button) enables you to handle song files
(e.g., save, delete, and rename recorded songs), copy and format disks, and
change the characters on the screen.
The following parameters are provided for these operations:
Clavinova memory
The Clavinova has the following three types of memory:
• Current memory:
This is a temporary memory area where you can temporarily place and edit
the currently-selected song before playback or recording.
• Preset song memory:
This read-only memory area saves 50 piano preset songs.
• Storage memory:
This memory area enables you to save recorded songs or song data loaded
from floppy disk.
When you select a song in the song select screen, it is loaded from Preset song
memory, Storage memory, or floppy disk, into Current memory.
You will use Current memory to play back and record songs. When you turn
off the power to the Clavinova, songs saved in Preset song memory and Stor-
age memory are not erased. On the other hand, songs in Current memory are
lost. If you wish to keep a song in Current memory, you must save it in Stor-
age memory or on a floppy disk (see page 52, 53).
In this manual, a song located in a song recorded in Current memory, is
referred to as a “Current song,” a song in Storage memory is a “Memory
song,” and a song on a floppy disk is a “Disk song.”
TERMINOLOGY
Settings
Parameter
name
Reference
page
Saves recorded and other songs in Clavinova memory SaveToMemory 52
Saves recorded and other songs on floppy disks SaveToDisk 53
Deletes song data from Clavinova memory or floppy disk
DeleteSong 53
Changes the title of songs RenameSongs 54
Copies data from floppy disk to floppy disk CopyDisk 55
Formats a floppy disk FormatDisk 56
Change the type of characters on the screen CharacterCode 56
A
Floppy disk
Clavinova
Preset song
memory
Storage memory
Current memory
CLP-970 51
Saving Recorded Songs and Handling the Files...[FILE]
Basic file operation
A message (information or confirmation dialog) sometimes appears on the screen to facilitate operation.
Refer to the “Message List” on page 92 for an explanation of each message, appropriate actions to take, and
troubleshooting information.
Procedure
1. Select a song, or have a floppy disk ready.
Select a song you wish to save or rename.
(Optional) Insert a floppy disk for copying or formatting into the disk
drive.
2. Access the File menu.
Press the [FILE] button.
To close the File menu, press the [EXIT] button once or twice.
3. Select the desired parameter.
Press the [FILE] or A [–]/[+] buttons repeatedly to display the desired
item from the following:
“SaveToMemory”, “SaveToDisk,” “DeleteSong”, “RenameSong”,
“CopyDisk”, “FormatDisk”, “CharacterCode”.
4. Set the parameter or execute the command.
Use the B [– (NO)]/[+ (YES)], C [–]/[+], D [–]/[+] buttons.
For more information regarding this procedure, refer to the corre-
sponding section below.
5. Close the File menu.
Press the [EXIT] button.
DEMO SONG SELECT
TRANSPOSE
MASTER VOLUME
TEMPO VOICE EFFECT
SONG
CLP-970
MIN MAX
NEW SONG
SONG BALANCE
UPDOWN
BRILLIANCE
TRACK
1
TRACK
2
EXTRA
TRACKS
FILE METRONOME
CONTRAST
SONG
SETTING
START/ STOP SETTING
SPLIT
POINT
VOICE
SETTING
REVERB
CHORUS MIDI
SETTING
OTHER
SETTING
REC
PIANO
MAIN
LEFT
E. PIANO/
BASS
HARPSI-
CHORD
MALLET ORGAN STRINGS/
CHOIR
STOP
START/
PAUSE
SYNCHRO START
EXIT
PIANO/
E. PIANO
HARPSI/
MALLET
ORGAN/
STRINGS
BASS
A B
C D
NO YES
[FILE]
A B
C D
NO YES
52 CLP-970
Saving Recorded Songs and Handling the Files...[FILE]
Saving recorded or other songs to Clavinova Storage
memory...[SaveToMemory]
If you record a song, then turn off the power to the Clavinova, the song will be erased. To save the recorded
song, you must save it into the Clavinova Storage memory or to a floppy disk. (To save a song to a floppy
disk, refer to the next section [SaveToDisk].) You can also save the preset songs, disk songs, and additional or
overwriting recordings (page 46) to Storage memory.
Procedure
See page 51 the basic operation information. The following is a detailed pro-
cedure of Step 4.
4-1 Name the song.
To move the cursor (a small underline), use the C [–]/[+] buttons.
To insert a space, press the C [–]/[+] buttons simultaneously.
To select a character on the cursor, use the D [–]/[+] buttons.
To delete a character, press the D [–]/[+] buttons simultaneously.
You can use up to 58 characters for a song name. If the name is longer
than the screen, use the C [–]/[+] buttons to move the cursor and
scroll the name.
“Execute?→”: Do you wish
to execute the operation?
“Sure?→”: Are you sure?
“Executing”: The Clavinova
is executing the operation.
“Completed”: The operation
is complete.
4-2 Execute the operation.
Press the B [+ (YES)] button located next to “Execute?→”
“Sure?
→.” appears on the screen. Press the B [+ (YES)] button again
to confirm the operation. (To cancel the operation, press the B [–
(NO)] button.)
The Clavinova displays “Executing” on the screen during the opera-
tion. When the operation is complete, “Completed” appears.
The song is automatically numbered as “Mxx,” where “M” means
“Memory” and “xx” is a number.
Do not turn off the power
while the screen displays
“Executing.”
If Storage memory contains one or more songs, and you save a new song, the Clavi-
nova automatically sorts the songs alphabetically and renumbers them.
A B
C D
NO YES
TIP
• You can change the type
of characters on the
screen using the Char-
acterCode parameter.
• When you select a saved
song later, the name with
an extension “.MID” will
appear.
TERMINOLOGY
CAUTION
TIP
CLP-970 53
Saving Recorded Songs and Handling the Files...[FILE]
Saving recorded or other songs to floppy
disk...[SaveToDisk]
You can save recorded songs, preset songs, Memory songs, and additional or overwriting recordings
(page 46) songs onto a floppy disk.
Procedure
The song data is saved in
the SMF format (format 0).
Therefore, you can play the
disk on instruments that
support the SMF format.
Do not turn off the power or
eject the floppy disk while
the screen displays “Execut-
ing.”
See page 51 for basic operation information. The following is a detailed pro-
cedure of Step 4.
4. Make sure that a formatted floppy disk (page 56) is
inserted in the disk drive.
Follow the steps for the [SaveToMemory] operation (see page 52) to
name and save the song.
The song is automatically numbered as “Dxx,” where “D” means
“Disk” and “xx” is a number.
Deleting songs in Clavinova Storage memory or a
floppy disk...[DeleteSong]
To delete a Current song,
select “ALL” for the Channel-
Clear parameter in the
“SONG SETTING” menu
(page 75). Alternatively,
press the SONG SELECT
[ ]/[ ]
buttons simul-
taneously to display “Song
Changed Save?”. This
means “A song has been
edited. Do you wish to save
the change?” Press the B [–
(NO)] button. The Current
song is deleted and a blank
“NewSong” is selected.
You can delete Memory songs and Disk songs, but not Preset songs or Cur-
rent songs.
Procedure
See page 51 for basic operation information. The following is a detailed pro-
cedure of Step 4.
A B
C D
NO YES
TIP
CAUTION
TIP
A B
C D
NO YES
54 CLP-970
Saving Recorded Songs and Handling the Files...[FILE]
If you select a Memory song
or Disk song, deleting the
song does not erase song
data from Current memory.
However, if you return to the
song select screen, song
information other than the
song name is replaced by
“--------------”.
4-1 Select a song to delete.
Use the C [–]/[+] buttons to select a song.
After you delete a song, the
Clavinova automatically
updates the song numbers.
Do not turn off the power or
eject the floppy disk while
the screen displays “Execut-
ing.”
4-2 Execute the operation.
Press the B [+ (YES)] button located next to “Execute?→.”
Follow the instructions on screen.
Renaming a song...[RenameSong]
You can change a song’s title (except for the preset songs and [P-000: NewSong].
Procedure
Do not turn off the power or
eject the floppy disk while
the screen displays “Execut-
ing.”
After you rename a song,
the Clavinova sorts songs
alphabetically and renum-
bers them.
See page 51 for basic operation information. The following is a detailed pro-
cedure for Step 4.
4. Name the song as described in the [SaveToMemory]
section (page 52).
TIP
TIP
CAUTION
A B
C D
NO YES
CAUTION
TIP
CLP-970 55
Saving Recorded Songs and Handling the Files...[FILE]
Copying data from one floppy disk to
another...[CopyDisk]
You can copy the entire contents of one floppy disk to another floppy disk.
Procedure
Use the same type of disk
(2DD or 2HD) for the desti-
nation disk as the source
disk.
See page 51 for basic operation information. The following is a detailed pro-
cedure for Step 4.
4-1 Make sure that a formatted floppy disk is inserted in
the disk drive.
4-2 Press the B [+ (YES)] button located next to “Exe-
cute?→.”
Insrt Target Disk:
Insert the destination (tar-
get) disk.
Do not turn off the power or
eject the floppy disk while
the screen displays “Execut-
ing.”
4-3 When the screen indicates “Insrt Target Disk”, eject
the source disk and insert the destination disk.
When the copy operation is complete, the Clavinova displays “Com-
pleted.”
A B
C D
NO YES
TIP
TERMINOLOGY
CAUTION
56 CLP-970
Saving Recorded Songs and Handling the Files...[FILE]
Formatting a floppy disk...[FormatDisk]
You can format a floppy disk so that it can be used with the Clavinova.
Procedure
See page 51 for basic operation information. The following is a detailed pro-
cedure for Step 4.
4-1 Make sure that the formatted floppy disk is inserted in
the disk drive.
Do not turn off the power or
eject the floppy disk while
the screen displays “Execut-
ing.”
4-2 Press the B [+ (YES)] button located next to “Exe-
cute?→.”
Follow the instructions on screen.
Changing the type of characters on screen...[Char-
acterCode]
You can change the type of characters that appear on screen.
The default setting is “International.” To input katakana, change this setting to “Japanese.”
Options: International, Japanese
Character list
[International]
[Japanese]
A B
C D
NO YES
CAUTION
A B
C D
NO YES
CLP-970 57
Playing Back Recorded Songs and
Commercially-available Music Data
See page 59 for information
on the types of song data
that can be played on the
Clavinova.
You can play back songs recorded using the Record function (page 41) as well
as commercially-available music data. You can also play the keyboard along
with the playback.
Playing back a song
To play back a song from a floppy disk, insert the disk into the disk drive.
Procedure
You can enjoy ensemble
performance by yourself.
Record the parts for a four-
handed song or a piano
duet, then play the recorded
part while playing the other
part on the keyboard.
1. Display the song select screen.
Press either the SONG SELECT [ ]/[ ] buttons.
Use the SongRepeat
parameter in the “SONG
SETTING” menu (page 76)
to select repeat playback of
all songs or repeat playback
of a single song.
2. Select the desired song.
2-1 Use the A [–]/[+] buttons to select the song type: “Pre-
setSong,” “MemorySong,” or “DiskSong.”
If the internal Storage memory contains one or more songs, the Clavi-
nova displays “MemorySong.” If a floppy disk that contains song data
is inserted in the drive, the Clavinova displays “DiskSong.”
2-2 Use the C [–]/[+] or SONG SELECT [ ]/[ ] buttons
to select a song.
TIP
DEMO SONG SELECT
TRANSPOSE
MASTER VOLUME
TEMPO VOICE EFFECT
SONG
CLP-970
MIN MAX
NEW SONG
SONG BALANCE
UPDOWN
BRILLIANCE
TRACK
1
TRACK
2
EXTRA
TRACKS
FILE METRONOME
CONTRAST
SONG
SETTING
START/ STOP SETTING
SPLIT
POINT
VOICE
SETTING
REVERB
CHORUS MIDI
SETTING
OTHER
SETTING
REC
PIANO
MAIN
LEFT
E. PIANO/
BASS
HARPSI-
CHORD
MALLET ORGAN STRINGS/
CHOIR
STOP
START/
PAUSE
SYNCHRO START
EXIT
PIANO/
E. PIANO
HARPSI/
MALLET
ORGAN/
STRINGS
BASS
A B
C D
NO YES
1 2-2 2-1
2-2
5
TEMPO [DOWN] [UP]
4
3
SONG BALANCE [ ] [ ]
TIP
A B
C D
NO YES
Song select screen
TIP
58 CLP-970
Playing Back Recorded Songs and Commercially-available Music Data
3. Start playback.
Press the [START/PAUSE] button.
Starting playback automatically as you start playing the keyboard (Syn-
chro Start)
You can start playback as soon as you start playing the keyboard. This is called
the “Synchro Start” function.
To enter Synchro Start standby mode, press and hold down the [STOP] but-
ton and press the [START/PAUSE] button. The [START/PAUSE] indicator
flashes.
Now play the keyboard. Playback starts simultaneously.
To cancel the Synchro Start function, press the [STOP] button while the
Clavinova is in Synchro Start standby mode.
Bar: measure
You can play the metronome
along with the song play-
back. When you stop play-
back, the metronome is also
stopped.
In the song select screen:
You can move back and forth (rewind and fast forward) through the bars by
using the B [–]/[+] buttons in the song select screen while the Clavinova is
playing or stopped.
You can play the keyboard while the Clavinova is playing back a song. You can
also play the notes in a voice different from the playback voice by selecting the
voice from the panel, and adjusting the volume balance between the playback
parts and your current performance using the SONG BALANCE [ ] [ ]
buttons. (See page 48.)
Press either of the SONG SELECT [ ]/[ ] buttons to return to the song
select screen.
Adjusting the tempo
You can use the TEMPO [DOWN]/[UP] buttons to adjust the playback
tempo as required before or during playback. The default tempo (the song’s
original tempo) is set when you press the [DOWN] and [UP] buttons simul-
taneously.
Press either of the SONG SELECT [ ]/[ ] buttons to return to the song
select screen.
4. Stop playback.
When playback is complete, the Clavinova automatically stops and
locates the top of the song. To stop playback in the middle of a song,
press the [STOP] button. You can also pause playback by pressing the
[START/PAUSE] button. Playback stops when you press the button.
TERMINOLOGY
TIP
TIP
• Press the SONG
SELECT [ ] or the C[–]
button while playback is
stopped in the middle of
the song to locate the
top of the song.
• Press the SONG
SELECT [ ] or the C[–]
button during playback
to restart playback from
the top of the song.
• Press the SONG
SELECT [ ] or the
C[+] button during play-
back to start playback
from the next song.
A B
C D
NO YES
The bar number in playback
CLP-970 59
Playing Back Recorded Songs and Commercially-available Music Data
5. Return to the main screen.
Press the [EXIT] button.
Eject the floppy disk from the disk drive if you have been playing a
disk song.
Turning track playback on and off
When the Clavinova plays
back commercially-avail-
able music data or record-
ings from other instruments,
all track indicators may light
up green regardless of
whether or not all tracks
contains data.
You can practice a part or
phrase using the FromToRe-
peat (page 75) and Phrase-
Mark parameters (page 76)
in the “SONG SETTING”
menu.
When you select a song on the Clavinova, the indicators for tracks that con-
tain data ([TRACK 1], [TRACK 2], [EXTRA TRACKS]) are lit in green. While
the Clavinova is playing or stopped, pressing these track buttons turn off the
indicators, and the data on those tracks will not be played. Pressing the track
buttons toggles track playback on and off. You can play the part that is turned
off.
Supported song data type
Data formats that can be played on the CLP-970
The Clavinova CLP-970 plays song data in the following formats:
Disk format:
A structured method for writ-
ing data to disk.
Floppy disk format
3.5-inch 2DD disks in the MS-DOS 720KB format
3.5-inch 2HD disks in the MS-DOS 1.44MB format
Sequence format:
A structured method for
recording performance data.
Sequence format
SMF (Standard MIDI File) formats 0 and 1
ESEQ
Performance data recorded on the CLP-970 is saved in the SMF for-
mat 0 in a floppy disk.
TIP
TIP
TERMINOLOGY
TERMINOLOGY
60 CLP-970
Playing Back Recorded Songs and Commercially-available Music Data
Voice arrangement format:
A structured method for
numbering the voices for
assignment.
Voice arrangement format
XG voice arrangement
GM system level 1 voice arrangement
DOC voice arrangement
Performance data recorded with preset voices on the CLP-970 can be
played on other XG-compatible instruments.
The CLP-970 provides XG voices for song playback, as well as preset
voices. See page 6 of the separate “Reference Booklet” for the XG voice
list.
Refer to “Data compatibility” on page 101 for more information on
formats.
Song data recorded on other instruments
When you play on the CLP-970 song data recorded on the Clavinova CVP-
109, 107, 105, 103, 98, 96, 94, 92, or CLP-870, you may notice a slight differ-
ence in volume balance, although the voices sound almost identical. You can
also play back song data from the Yamaha Disklavier player piano.
TERMINOLOGY
CLP-970 61
Connections
Connectors
CAUTION
Before connecting the Clavinova to other electronic components, turn off the power to all the components. Before
turning the power on or off to all components, set all volume levels to minimum (0). Otherwise, electrical shock or
damage to the components may occur.
Do not route the output from
the AUX OUT jacks to the
AUX IN jacks. That is, when
you connect an external
audio device to the AUX
OUT jacks, do not connect
the audio device to the
Clavinova’s AUX IN jacks. If
you make this connection,
the signal input at the AUX
IN jacks is output from the
AUX OUT. This creates an
audio loop, causing audio
oscillation and abnormal
playback, leading to mal-
function of both pieces of
equipment.
Use audio cables and
adapter plugs with no resis-
tance.
The Clavinova’s [MASTER
VOLUME] slider setting
does not affect the signal
output from the AUX OUT
jacks.
1 AUX OUT [R], [L/L+R] jacks
You can connect these jacks to a stereo system to amplify the Clavinova or to a
cassette tape recorder to record your performance. Refer to the diagram below
and use audio cables for connection.
Adjust the volume level on the stereo system or cassette tape recorder, not
using the Clavinova’s [MASTER VOLUME] slider.
CAUTION
When the Clavinova’s AUX OUT jacks are connected to an external audio sys-
tem, first turn on the power to the Clavinova, then to the external audio system.
Reverse this order when you turn the power off.
MIDI
HOST SELECT
PC-1 PC-2
Mac MIDI
TO HOST
AUX PEDAL
PEDAL
OUT INTHRU
L/L
+
RR
AUX IN
L/L
+
RR
AUX OUT
1 2 6
5 743
CAUTION
TIP
TIP
AUX OUT
AUX IN
L/L
+
RR
AUX OUT
RCA phono plug
Clavinova
phone plug
(standard)
alternatively
RCA phono
→phone adapter plug
RCA phono plug
audio cable
cassette tape recorder
stereo system
62 CLP-970
Connections
The Clavinova’s [MASTER
VOLUME] slider setting
affects the input signal from
the AUX IN jacks, but the
[REVERB], [CHORUS], and
[BRILLIANCE] (page 32) set-
tings do not.
If you connect the Clavi-
nova to a monaural device,
use only the AUX IN [L/L+R]
jack or AUX OUT [L/L+R]
jack.
2 AUX IN [R], [L/L+R] jacks
The stereo outputs from another instrument can be connected to these jacks,
allowing the sound of an external instrument to be reproduced via the Clavi-
nova’s speakers. Refer to the diagram below and use audio cables for connec-
tion.
CAUTION
When the Clavinova’s AUX IN jacks are connected to an external device, first
turn on the power to the external divice, then to the Clavinova. Reverse this order
when you turn the power off.
3 AUX PEDAL jack
Connect an optional foot controller FC7 or foot switch FC4 or FC5 here.
Using the FC7 enables you to add expression to your performance by control-
ling the volume level of the notes you play. Using the FC4 or FC5 enables you
to turn the assigned function on and off. Use the AuxPedal parameter in the
“VOICE SETTING” menu. You can also assign the [START/PAUSE] button
function to this foot switch. (See page 89.)
4 TO HOST jack
This jack allows direct connection to a personal computer. (Refer to “Con-
necting a personal computer” on page 63 for more information.)
5 HOST SELECT switch
This switch should be set according to the type of connected MIDI device or
personal computer. (Refer to “Connecting a personal computer” on page 63
for more information.)
TIP
TIP
AUX IN
Tone Generator
AUX OUT (OUTPUT)
L/L
+
RR
AUX IN
Clavinova
phone plug
(standard)
audio cable
Plug shape depends
on the divece.
CLP-970
63
Connections
6
MIDI [IN], [OUT], [THRU] connectors
Use MIDI cables to connect external MIDI devices to these connectors.
Make sure you set the HOST SELECT switch (described on the privious page)
to MIDI when you use these connectors.
7
PEDAL jack
Connect the pedal cord from the pedal box. (Refer to “Keyboard Stand
Assembly” on pages 106-108.)
Connecting a personal computer
You can enjoy computer music data on the Clavinova by connecting a computer to the TO HOST (or MIDI)
jack.
There are the three methods by which to connect the Clavinova to a personal computer:
1. Connecting the serial port on the computer to the Clavinova’s TO HOST jack (page 64)
2. Using a MIDI interface and the Clavinova’s MIDI connectors (page 66)
3. Using the USB port on the computer and the UX256, a USB interface (page 67)
For more information, refer to the following pages.
When connecting the Clavinova to a personal computer, first turn off the power to both the Clavinova and the computer
before connecting any cables and setting the HOST SELECT switch. After making connections and switch settings, turn
on the power to the computer first, then to the Clavinova.
If you do not use the TO HOST jack of the Clavinova, make sure you disconnect the cable from the jack. If the cable is left
connected, the Clavinova may not function properly.
When the HOST SELECT switch is set to “PC-1,” PC-2,” or “Mac,” you can use the TO HOST jack, but the MIDI connec-
tors are disabled since no data transfer occurs via the MIDI connectors. On the other hand, when the HOST SELECT
switch is set to “MIDI,” you can use the MIDI connectors, but not the TO HOST jack since no data is transferred via the TO
HOST jack.
“The Clavinova-Computer Connection” is a supplementary guidebook that describes, for beginners, what
you can do with your Clavinova and a personal computer and how to set up a Clavinova-Computer sys-
tem (the manual is not written for any specific models). The document is available as a PDF file (in
English) at the following Internet address:
Clavinova Web site:
http://www.yamaha.co.jp/english/product/cl/
Yamaha Manual Library
(Electronic Musical Instruments):
http://www2.yamaha.co.jp/manual/english/
(You need to register first. Check the Clavinova web page.)
TIP
TIP
TIP
64 CLP-970
Connections
1. Connecting the serial port on the computer to the Clavinova’s TO HOST jack
Connect the computer’s serial port (RS-232C or RS-422) to the Clavinova’s TO HOST jack.
In this connection, the Clavinova functions as a MIDI interface. Therefore, you do not need a special
MIDI interface.
Connection
Use a special serial cable (page 65) to connect the computer’s serial port (RS-232C or RS-422) to the Clavi-
nova’s TO HOST jack.
TO HOST
Windows Windows Macintosh
HOST SELECT
PC-1 PC-2
Mac MIDI
TO HOST
modem port
Clavinova
RS-232C (D-sub 9-pin) RS-232C (D-sub 25-pin)
Note for Windows 95/98 users (regarding MIDI driver)
To transfer data via the computer’s serial port and the Clavinova’s TO HOST jack, you need to install a
specified MIDI driver (Yamaha CBX driver for Windows 95/98). You can download this driver from the
following XG Library on the Yamaha Web site:
http://www.yamaha-xg.com
CLP-970 65
Connections
Type of serial cables and connection pin assignments
According to the type of computer you connect, use one of the following serial cables.
Clavinova HOST SELECT switch setting
Set the Clavinova HOST SELECT switch properly according to the type of connected computer.
• Macintosh: “Mac” (data transfer rate: 31,250bps, 1MHz clock)
• Windows: “PC-2” (data transfer rate: 38,400bps)
If your system does not work properly with the connections and settings listed above, your software may require different
settings. Check your software operation manual and set the HOST SELECT switch to the proper data transfer rate. (Data
transfer rate of “PC-1” is 31,250bps.)
8 (CTS)
7 (RTS)
2 (RxD)
5 (GND)
3 (TxD)
1
2
3
4
8
5
• Windows (with a serial port of D-sub 9-pin)
8-pin mini DIN plug → D-sub 9-pin plug
(Yamaha CCJ-PC2 or equivalent)
mini DIN
8-pin
D-sub
9-pin
mini DIN
8-pin
2 (HSK i)
1 (HSK O)
5 (RxD-)
4 (GND)
3 (TxD-)
8 (RxD+)
7 (GP-)
6 (TxD+)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
mini DIN
8-pin
• Macintosh
System peripheral plug → 8-pin plug
(Yamaha CCJ-MAC or equivalent)
mini DIN
8-pin
5 (CTS)
4 (RTS)
3 (RxD)
7 (GND)
2 (TxD)
1
2
3
4
8
5
D-sub
25-pin
• Windows (with a serial port of D-sub 25-pin)
8-pin mini DIN plug → D-sub 25-pin plug
(Yamaha CCJ-PC1NF or equivalent)
mini DIN 8-pin D-sub 25-pin
Pin numbers (view from front)
D-sub 9-pin
1
1234567891011
14 15 16 17
45321
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
12 13
34
67
8
5
2
9876
• Pin assignment
The following diagram shows the pin assignments
for each cable.
TIP
66 CLP-970
Connections
2. Using a MIDI interface and the Clavinova’s MIDI connectors
Connection
Use a MIDI interface device to connect a computer to the Clavinova using special MIDI cables.
Clavinova HOST SELECT switch setting
Set the Clavinova HOST SELECT switch to “MIDI.”
Windows Macintosh
MIDI
OUT
MIDI
OUT
MIDI
IN
MIDI
IN
MIDI
OUT
MIDI
IN
MIDI
HOST SELECT
PC-1 PC-2
Mac MIDI
OUT INTHRU
Clavinova
MIDI interface
MIDI interface
CLP-970 67
Connections
3. Using the USB port on the computer and the UX256, a USB interface
Connect the USB port of the computer to the UX256 using a USB cable, install the driver (that came
with the UX256) on the computer, and connect the UX256 to the Clavinova using a serial cable or
MIDI cables.
For more information, refer to the instruction manual for the UX256.
UX256 Yamaha USB-MIDI interface.
Connecting the UX256 to the Clavinova using a serial cable
Connecting the UX256 to the Clavinova using MIDI cables
UX256
HOST SELECT
PC-1
TO HOST
Mac
Clavinova
USB cable
computer
or
Standard Machintosh 8-pin system peripheral cable
POWER
MIDI
SETTING
OTHER
SETTING
EFFECT
BRILLIANCE
VOICE
SETTING
CHORUSREVERBSTRINGS/
CHOIR
ORGAN
BASS
MALLET
ORGAN/
STRINGS
VOICE
E. PIANO/
BASS
PIANO
MAIN
LEFT
PIANO/
E. PIANO
SPLIT
POINT
HARPSI-
CHORD
HARPSI/
MALLET
CONTRASTB
D
YES
EXIT
NO
A
C
TEMPO
METRONOME
UPDOWN
FILE
SONG
SETTING
SETTINGSTART/STOP
TRACK
1
SONG SELECTDEMO
TRANSPOSEMAX
MASTER VOLUME
MIN
CLP-970
SONG BALANCE
NEW SONG
TRACK
2
EXTRA
TRACKS
STOP
SONG
SYNCHRO START
START/
PAUSE
REC
USB cable
MIDI cables
Clavinova
UX256
MIDI
HOST SELECT
MIDI
OUT INTHRU
computer
POWER
MIDI
SETTING
OTHER
SETTING
EFFECT
BRILLIANCE
VOICE
SETTING
CHORUSREVERBSTRINGS/
CHOIR
ORGAN
BASS
MALLET
ORGAN/
STRINGS
VOICE
E. PIANO/
BASS
PIANO
MAIN
LEFT
PIANO/
E. PIANO
SPLIT
POINT
HARPSI-
CHORD
HARPSI/
MALLET
CONTRASTB
D
YES
EXIT
NO
A
C
TEMPO
METRONOME
UPDOWN
FILE
SONG
SETTING
SETTINGSTART/STOP
TRACK
1
SONG SELECTDEMO
TRANSPOSEMAX
MASTER VOLUME
MIN
CLP-970
SONG BALANCE
NEW SONG
TRACK
2
EXTRA
TRACKS
STOP
SONG
SYNCHRO START
START/
PAUSE
REC
68 CLP-970
CLP-970 69
Detailed Settings
CLP-970 69
70 CLP-970
Detailed Settings
You can set various parameters to make the best use of Clavinova functions, such as fine tuning the pitch,
selecting a voice for the metronome, repeating playback, etc. See page 72 for the normal (default) setting for
each parameter.
Parameter List
The following parameters are available.
Recording and playback [SONG SETTING]
Metronome METRONOME [SETTING]
Voices [VOICE SETTING]
In Dual mode, parameters with the “*” mark are set for Voice 1 and Voice 2 individually.
Settings Parameter name Reference page
Correcting note timing Quantize 74
Specifying whether playback starts immediately
along with the first voicing
QuickPlay 75
Auditioning the channels ChannelListen 75
Deleting data by each channel ChannelClear 75
Specifying the range and playing back repeatedly FromToRepeat 75
Playing back the phrase specified by the phrase
number
PhraseMark 76
Playing back a song repeatedly SongRepeat 76
Settings Parameter name Reference page
Metronome time signature TimeSignature 77
Metronome volume level MetronomeVolume 77
Metronome voice MetronomeSound 77
Settings Parameter name Reference page
Octave* Octave 78
Volume level* Volume 78
Position of right and left channels* Pan 79
Fine pitch adjustment (only in Dual mode) Detune 79
Reverb type ReverbType 79
Reverb depth* ReverbSend 79
Chorus type ChorusType 80
Chorus depth* ChorusSend 80
Chorus on/off ChorusOnOff 80
Variation effect type VariationType 80
Variation effect depth* VariationSend 81
Touch sensitivity* TouchSense 81
CLP-970 71
Detailed Settings
MIDI [MIDI SETTING]
[OTHER SETTING]
Right pedal function RPedal 81
Center pedal function MPedal 82
Left pedal function LPedal 82
Auxiliary pedal function AuxPedal 82
Settings Parameter name Reference page
MIDI transmit channel MidiOutChannel 84
MIDI receive channel (Port A) MidiInAChannel 84
MIDI receive channel (Port B) MidiInBChannel 85
Local control on/off LocalControl 85
Selecting performance from the keyboard or song
data for MIDI transmission
MidiOutSelect 85
Type of data received via MIDI ReceiveParameter 85
Type of data transmitted via MIDI TransmitParameter 86
Song data bulk dump SongBulkDump 86
Transmitting the initial settings InitialSetup 86
Voice data bulk dump VoiceBulkDump 86
Settings Parameter name Reference page
Selecting a touch response TouchResponse 87
Fine tuning of the pitch Tune 87
Selecting a tuning curve for a piano voice PianoTuningCurve 87
Selecting a scale Scale 88
Depth of string resonance StringResonanceDepth 88
Depth of sustain sampling for the damper pedal SustainSamplingDepth 88
Setting the speed of vibraphone’s vibrato effect VivraphoneRotorSpeed 89
Selecting a pedal function for vibraphone VibraphonePedalMode 89
Assigning the START/PAUSE function to a pedal PedalStart/Pause 89
Selecting a type of auxiliary pedal AuxPedalType 89
Setting the point at which the damper pedal starts
to affect the sound
HalfPedalPoint 90
Pitch bend range PitchBendRange 90
Replacing the preset voices with XG voices XGAlternative 90
Selecting the items saved at the time of shutdown MemoryBackUp 91
Restoring the normal (default) settings FactorySet 91
72 CLP-970
Detailed Settings
Making detailed settings
Procedure
1. Access a setting menu.
Press the desired setting button ([SONG SETTING], MET-
RONOME [SETTING], [VOICE SETTING], [MIDI SETTING],
or [OTHER SETTING]) to access the corresponding setting
menu.
Press the [EXIT] button any time to close the setting menu.
2. Select the desired parameter or part.
Press the setting button, A [–]/[+], and/or C [–]/[+] but-
tons repeatedly as required.
3. Set the parameter or part.
Some parameters or parts lead you to more options. Use
the B [– (NO)]/[+ (YES)], C [–]/[+], and D [–]/[+] buttons
to select or set the option.
To restore the normal parameter value, press the [–] and [+] buttons
simultaneously.
DEMO SONG SELECT
TRANSPOSE
MASTER VOLUME
TEMPO VOICE EFFECT
SONG
CLP-970
MIN MAX
NEW SONG
SONG BALANCE
UPDOWN
BRILLIANCE
TRACK
1
TRACK
2
EXTRA
TRACKS
FILE METRONOME
CONTRAST
SONG
SETTING
START/ STOP SETTING
SPLIT
POINT
VOICE
SETTING
REVERB
CHORUS MIDI
SETTING
OTHER
SETTING
REC
PIANO
MAIN
LEFT
E. PIANO/
BASS
HARPSI-
CHORD
MALLET ORGAN STRINGS/
CHOIR
STOP
START/
PAUSE
SYNCHRO START
EXIT
PIANO/
E. PIANO
HARPSI/
MALLET
ORGAN/
STRINGS
BASS
A B
C D
NO YES
[SONG SETTING]
[OTHER SETTING]
[MIDI SETTING]
[VOICE SETTING]
METRONOME [SETTING]
A [–] [+] B [–
(
NO
)
] [+
(
YES
)
]
C [–] [+] D [–] [+]
CLP-970 73
Detailed Settings
4. Write, execute, or save the data.
There are two ways to respond to the messages.
If “Execute?→” or “Start?→” appears:
Press the B [+(YES)] button to display confirmation ([Sure?→]). To
proceed, press the B [+(YES)] button again. The Clavinova displays
“Executing” and writes the data. When the operation is complete, it
displays “Completed” for three seconds, then returns to the previous
screen.
To cancel the operation, press the B [–(NO)] button instead of the B
[+(YES)] button.
If “Set?→” appears:
Press the B [+(YES)] button to execute the setting. The Clavinova dis-
plays “Executing” and saves the data. When the operation is complete,
it displays “Completed” for three seconds, then returns to the previ-
ous screen.
5. Close the setting menu.
Press the [EXIT] button.
A B
C D
NO YES
A B
C D
NO YES
74 CLP-970
Detailed settings for recording
and playback [SONG SETTING]
You can make detailed settings for the selected song. First, select the desired song from preset songs (“PresetSong”),
memory songs (“MemorySong”), or disk songs (“DiskSong”) (see page 57).
Procedure
Select the desired song and press the [SONG SETTING] button to access the “Song Setting” menu.
You can correct the timing of notes. For example, you
can adjust recorded notes to precise eighth or sixteenth
notes, or make the entire feel of a song more lively
(with a swing type of rhythm).
• Changes are made by song.
• You can also listen to the sound while changing the
setting. To change the data, you need to respond to
“Execute?
→.”
See the procedure on page 72.
Notes for which you can adjust the timing:
If you select “1/8” or “1/16” for correction, the Clavi-
nova displays “SwingRate=xx%”, which enables you to
make the entire feel of a song more lively and swinging.
Setting range:
0% - 100%
If you select “1/8” for correction:
Save the edited song data to memory or a disk.
(See page 50.)
DEMO SONG SELECT
TRANSPOSE
MASTER VOLUME
TEMPO VOICE EFFECT
SONG
CLP-970
MIN MAX
NEW SONG
SONG BALANCE
UPDOWN
BRILLIANCE
TRACK
1
TRACK
2
EXTRA
TRACKS
FILE METRONOME
CONTRAST
SONG
SETTING
START/ STOP SETTING
SPLIT
POINT
VOICE
SETTING
REVERB
CHORUS MIDI
SETTING
OTHER
SETTING
REC
PIANO
MAIN
LEFT
E. PIANO/
BASS
HARPSI-
CHORD
MALLET ORGAN STRINGS/
CHOIR
STOP
START/
PAUSE
SYNCHRO START
EXIT
PIANO/
E. PIANO
HARPSI/
MALLET
ORGAN/
STRINGS
BASS
A B
C D
NO YES
[SONG SETTING]
Correcting note timing [Quantize]
A B
C D
NO YES
Specifies the type of note.
Stores the changed value.
3
3
[OFF]
[1/4]
[1/8]
[1/16]
[1/12]
[1/24]
quarter note
eighth note
sixteenth note
eighth note triplets
sixteenth note triplets
3 3
Performance data
Swing rate = 50% : not swinging
Swing rate = 75% (51% or higher) :
The timing of even beat notes is slightly delayed.
Swing rate = 25% (49% or lower) :
The timing of even beat notes is slightly early.
Swing rate = 67% :
The timing of the even beat notes is moved to
the third beat of the triplets.
TIP
CLP-970 75
Detailed settings for recording and playback [SONG SETTING]
This parameter enables you to specify whether a song
that starts from the middle of a bar, or a song with a
silence prior to the first note, should be played from
the first note or from the top of the bar (rest or blank).
See the procedure on page 72.
Setting range:
[On] Playing from the first note
[Off] Playing from the top of the bar (including a rest
or blank)
You can select a single channel to listen to its contents.
Playback starts from the first note.
See the procedure on page 72.
Setting range:
Ch1 - Ch16
Usually, channels that do not contain any data are not dis-
played. However, for some songs, all channels (including the
channels that contain no data) may be displayed.
You can delete data from each of 16 channels.
See the procedure on page 72.
Setting range:
Ch1 - Ch16, ALL (all channels)
• Channels that do not contain any data are not displayed.
However, for some songs, all channels (including the
channels that contain no data) may be displayed.
• Save the edited song data to memory or disk.
(See page 50.)
You can specify a range (in steps of beats) in a song to
play back repeatedly.
• Playback repeats after it reaches just prior to the beat
specified as the end point.
• If you start playing back a song with “Repeat On”
selected, the count down starts, followed by the
repeated playback of the specified part until you
press the [STOP] button.
• If you select “Repeat Off,” normal playback starts.
See the procedure on page 72.
When you select another song, the specified range is auto-
matically cancelled and the Repeat function is turned off.
Specifying whether playback
starts immediately along with the
first voicing [QuickPlay]
Auditioning the channels [Chan-
nelListen]
A B
C D
NO YES
A B
C D
NO YES
Use these buttons to select the desired channel
for playback.
Playback continues as long
as you press and hold down this button.
TIP
Deleting data from each channel
[ChannelClear]
Specifying the range and playing
back repeatedly [FromToRepeat]
A B
C D
NO YES
Press this button to delete data.
Use these buttons to select the desired channel
for deletion.
TIP
A B
C D
NO YES
Use these buttons
to specify the end point
of the repeated range.
Use these buttons to select “Repeat On.”
Use these buttons
to specify the start point
of the repeated range.
NOTE
76 CLP-970
Detailed settings for recording and playback [SONG SETTING]
If you select a song from an ensemble collection disk,
such as the “Disk Orchestra Collection” or one of the
“XG for Piano” disks, you can specify phrase numbers
in the score to play back from the score from the mark
point, or to play back the phrase repeatedly.
• If you start playing back a song with “Repeat On”
selected, the count down starts, followed by the
repeated playback of the specified phrase until you
press the [STOP] button.
• If you select “Repeat Off,” normal playback starts
from the specified phrase.
See the procedure on page 72.
Setting range of the phrase number:
Off (not specified)
1 - the last phrase number of the song
If you select any song other than those from the “Disk
Orchestra Collection” or one of the “XG for Piano”
disks, you can select only “Off.”
You can repeatedly play back all songs or a single song
selected from the 50 preset songs or from the floppy
disks.
• When you start playback, the Clavinova plays the
song you selected using the front panel, then starts
repeat playback of the specified songs until you press
the [STOP] button.
See the procedure on page 72.
Setting range:
[DiskSongs] All songs in the floppy disk inserted
in the disk drive
[MemorySongs] All songs in the Clavinova’s memory
[Disk+Memory] All songs from “DiskSongs” and
“MemorySongs”
[PresetSongs] All 50 preset songs
[ALL] All songs from “DiskSongs,” “Mem-
orySongs,” and “PresetSongs”
[OneSong] One song selected from the front
panel
Playing back the phrase specified
by the phrase number [Phrase-
Mark]
A B
C D
NO YES
Use these buttons to specify the phrase number.
Use these buttons to select “Repeat On.”
Playing back a song repeatedly
[SongRepeat]
A B
C D
NO YES
Use these buttons to specify the repeated songs.
Use these buttons to select “On.”
CLP-970 77
Detailed settings for the metro-
nome METRONOME [SETTING]
You can set the time signature, volume level, and voice of the Clavinova metronome.
Procedure
Press the [METRONOME SETTING] button to access the Metro-
nome Setting menu.
See the procedure on page 72.
For example, to specify “3/4,” use the C [–]/[+] buttons
to select “3” and the D [–]/[+] buttons to select “4.”
Setting range for the numerator:
1 - 16
Setting options for the denominator:
2, 4, and 8
See the procedure on page 72.
Setting range:
0-127
See the procedure on page 72.
Setting range:
[BellOff] Click (standard metronome sound)
[EnglishVoice] Click and “1, 2, 3, 4” in English
[GermanVoice] Click and “1, 2, 3, 4” in German
[JapaneseVoice] Click and “1, 2, 3, 4” in Japanese
[FrenchVoice] Click and “1, 2, 3, 4” in French
[SpanishVoice] Click and “1, 2, 3, 4” in Spanish
[BellOn] Click and bell
To mute the beat count, select “BellOff.”
DEMO SONG SELECT
TRANSPOSE
MASTER VOLUME
TEMPO VOICE EFFECT
SONG
CLP-970
MIN MAX
NEW SONG
SONG BALANCE
UPDOWN
BRILLIANCE
TRACK
1
TRACK
2
EXTRA
TRACKS
FILE METRONOME
CONTRAST
SONG
SETTING
START/ STOP SETTING
SPLIT
POINT
VOICE
SETTING
REVERB
CHORUS MIDI
SETTING
OTHER
SETTING
REC
PIANO
MAIN
LEFT
E. PIANO/
BASS
HARPSI-
CHORD
MALLET ORGAN STRINGS/
CHOIR
STOP
START/
PAUSE
SYNCHRO START
EXIT
PIANO/
E. PIANO
HARPSI/
MALLET
ORGAN/
STRINGS
BASS
A B
C D
NO YES
METRONOME [SETTING]
Setting the metronome time sig-
nature [TimeSignature]
Setting the metronome volume
level [MetronomeVolume]
A B
C D
NO YES
Use these buttons
to set the denominator
of the time signature.
Use these buttons
to set the numerator
of the time signature.
A B
C D
NO YES
Selecting the metronome voice
[MetronomeSound]
A B
C D
NO YES
TIP
78 CLP-970
Detailed settings for the voices
[VOICE SETTING]
This menu enables you to make various detailed settings for the voices in Dual or Split mode and the effects. You can
make these settings for each voice (or each combination of voices) individually. You can listen to the notes you play
on the keyboard while changing the settings.
Procedure
1. Select a voice and press the [VOICE SETTING] button to access the
“Voice Setting” menu.
2. Press the A [–]/[+] buttons to select the part for which you wish to
change the voice.
The range of the displayed part varies depending on the selected voice.
[Main] MAIN voices (displayed with a single voice or in Split mode)
[Main
× Layer] MAIN Voice 1 and Voice 2 (displayed when the MAIN side is in Dual
mode)
[Left] LEFT voice (displayed in Split mode)
[Left
× Layer] LEFT Voice 1 and Voice 2 (displayed when the LEFT side is in Dual mode)
In Dual mode, parameters with the “*” mark are set for Voice 1 and Voice 2 individually.
You can shift the pitch up and down in octave steps.
See the procedure on page 72.
In Dual mode:
Setting range:
–2 (two octaves lower - 0 (no pitch shift) - +2 (two
octaves higher)
You can set the volume level for each voice part.
See the procedure on page 72.
DEMO SONG SELECT
TRANSPOSE
MASTER VOLUME
TEMPO VOICE EFFECT
SONG
CLP-970
MIN MAX
NEW SONG
SONG BALANCE
UPDOWN
BRILLIANCE
TRACK
1
TRACK
2
EXTRA
TRACKS
FILE METRONOME
CONTRAST
SONG
SETTING
START/ STOP SETTING
SPLIT
POINT
VOICE
SETTING
REVERB
CHORUS MIDI
SETTING
OTHER
SETTING
REC
PIANO
MAIN
LEFT
E. PIANO/
BASS
HARPSI-
CHORD
MALLET ORGAN STRINGS/
CHOIR
STOP
START/
PAUSE
SYNCHRO START
EXIT
PIANO/
E. PIANO
HARPSI/
MALLET
ORGAN/
STRINGS
BASS
A B
C D
NO YES
[VOICE SETTING]
TIP
Setting the octave [Octave]*
A B
C D
NO YES
A B
C D
NO YES
Voice for editing (Voice 1 or Voice 2)
Setting the volume level
[Volume]*
A B
C D
NO YES
CLP-970 79
Detailed settings for the voices [VOICE SETTING]
In Dual mode:
Setting range:
0 - 127
You can specify the position in the stereo image from
which you hear the sound.
See the procedure on page 72.
In Dual mode:
Setting range:
L64 (hard left) - C (center) - R63 (hard right)
You can slightly shift the pitch of two voices selected
for Dual mode.
See the procedure on page 72.
Setting range:
–20 - +20 (With positive values, the pitch of Voice 1 is
raised and the pitch of Voice 2 is lowered. With nega-
tive values, the pitch of Voice 1 is lowered and the pitch
of Voice 2 is raised.)
You cannot set this parameter for the voice parts “Left” and
“LeftXLayer.”
See the procedure on page 72.
Setting range:
Room Simulates reverberation in a room.
Hall Simulates reverberation in a concert hall.
Hall2 Reverberation is slightly longer than that of
“Hall1.”
Stage Reverberation suitable for a solo instrument
sound.
Plate Reverberation from the vibration of a metal
plate.
The reverb effect is not applied if the ReverbSend parameter
is set to “0.”
See the procedure on page 72.
Setting the position of right and
left channels [Pan]*
Fine tuning the pitch (only in
Dual mode) [Detune]
A B
C D
NO YES
Voice for editing (Voice 1 and Voice 2)
A B
C D
NO YES
A B
C D
NO YES
Voice for editing (Voice 1 or Voice 2)
A B
C D
NO YES
Selecting the reverb type
[ReverbType]
Setting the reverb depth
[ReverbSend]*
TIP
A B
C D
NO YES
TIP
A B
C D
NO YES
80 CLP-970
Detailed settings for the voices [VOICE SETTING]
In Dual mode:
Setting range:
0 - 127
You cannot set this parameter for the voice parts “Left” and
“Left
× Layer.”
See the procedure on page 72.
Setting range:
Chorus Adds a rich, spacious sound.
Celeste Adds swell and a spacious sound.
Flanger Adds swell effects of an ascending or
descending jet plane.
See the procedure on page 72.
In Dual mode:
Setting range:
0 - 127
You can set the [CHORUS] button on or off for each
voice. When you select a voice, the chorus on/off set-
ting for the voice automatically changes according to
this parameter.
Even if this parameter is turned on, the chorus effect is dis-
abled if the ChorusSend parameter is set to 0.
See the procedure on page 72.
Setting range:
On/Off
You can select other effects (than reverb and chorus).
See the procedure on page 72.
Selecting the chorus type [Chorus
Type]
Setting the chorus depth [Cho-
rusSend]*
A B
C D
NO YES
Voice for editing (Voice 1 or Voice 2)
TIP
A B
C D
NO YES
A B
C D
NO YES
Setting the chorus on/off
[ChorusOnOff]
Selecting the variation effect
type [VariationType]
A B
C D
NO YES
Voice for editing (Voice 1 or Voice 2)
TIP
A B
C D
NO YES
A B
C D
NO YES
CLP-970 81
Detailed settings for the voices [VOICE SETTING]
Setting range:
DelayLCR Delay applied at left, center, and right
positions.
DelayLR Delay applied at left and right posi-
tions.
Echo Echo-like delay
CrossDelay Left and right delays are crossed.
Symphonic Adds a rich and deep acoustic effect.
RotarySpeaker Adds the vibrato effect of a rotary
speaker.
Tremolo The volume level changes in rapid
cycles.
VibeRotor The vibrato effect of a vibraphone.
AutoPan The sound pans left to right and back
and forth.
Phaser The phase changes periodically,
swelling the sound.
AutoWah The center frequency of the wah filter
changes periodically.
SoundBoardRev Simulates the reverberation of a
piano soundboard.
Off No effect.
See the procedure on page 72.
In Dual mode:
Setting range:
0 - 127
This parameter enables determines the manner and
degree to which the volume level changes in response
to your touch on the keyboard (how hard you play).
Since the volume level of the harpsichords and pipe
organs do not change regardless of how you play the
keyboard, the normal setting for these voices is 127.
(See the setting range below.)
See the procedure on page 72.
In Dual mode:
Setting range:
0 (softest) - 64 (largest changes in the level) - 127
(loudest and fixed)
See the procedure on page 72.
Setting range:
SustainCont Damper function that sustains the
sound longer as you press the pedal
deeper.
Sustain On/Off switch type damper function.
PitchBend Changes the pitch continuously.
Off No function.
Normal setting:
SustainCount
Setting the variation effect depth
[VariationSend]*
A B
C D
NO YES
A B
C D
NO YES
Voice for editing (Voice 1 or Voice 2)
Setting the touch sensitivity
[TouchSense]*
Setting the right pedal function
[RPedal]
A B
C D
NO YES
A B
C D
NO YES
Voice for editing (Voice 1 or Voice 2)
A B
C D
NO YES
82 CLP-970
Detailed settings for the voices [VOICE SETTING]
See the procedure on page 72.
Setting range:
Sostenuto Sostenuto pedal function. (See page 31.)
RotarySpeed Changes the number of rotations of the
rotary speaker effect in the JazzOrgan voice.
(Pressing the pedal repeatedly toggles
between fast and slow rotation speeds.)
VibeRotor Turns vibrato of the Vibraphone voice
on and off. (Pressing the pedal repeat-
edly toggles between on and off.)
Off No function.
Normal Setting:
Sostenuto
See the procedure on page 72.
Setting range:
Soft Soft pedal function. (See page 31.)
RotarySpeed Changes the number of rotations of the
rotary speaker effect in the JazzOrgan voice.
(Pressing the pedal repeatedly toggles
between fast and slow rotation speeds.)
VibeRotor Turns the vibrato of the Vibraphone
voice on and off. (Pressing the pedal
repeatedly toggles between on and off.)
Off No function.
Normal Setting:
Soft (for all voices other than JazzOrgan and Vibra-
Phone)
Rotary Speed (JazzOrgan), Vibraphone (VibeRotor)
You can assign a function to the pedal connected to the
Clavinova’s AUX PEDAL jack.
See the procedure on page 72.
Setting range:
Expression Makes the sound softer or louder.
Sustain On/Off switch type damper function.
(See page 31.)
SustainCont Damper function that sustains the
sound longer as you press the pedal
deeper. (See page 31.)
PitchBend Changes the pitch continuously.
Sostenuto Sostenuto pedal function. (See page 31.)
Soft Soft pedal function. (See page 31.)
RotarySpeed Changes the number of rotations of the
rotary speaker effect in the JazzOrgan
voice. (Pressing the pedal repeatedly toggles
between fast and slow rotation speeds.)
VibeRotor Turns the vibrato of the Vibraphone
voice on and off. (Pressing the pedal
repeatedly toggles between on and off.)
Off No function.
Normal setting:
Expression
Optional pedals
• Yamaha FC7 foot controller
This foot controller is suitable for controlling Expression,
SustainCont, and PitchBend.
• Yamaha FC4 foot controller
Yamaha FC5 foot controller
These foot switches are suitable for controlling Sustain,
Sostenuto, Soft, RotarySpeed, and VibeRotor.
Setting the center pedal function
[MPedal]
Setting the left pedal function
[LPedal]
A B
C D
NO YES
A B
C D
NO YES
Setting the auxiliary pedal func-
tion [AuxPedal]
A B
C D
NO YES
TIP
CLP-970 83
MIDI [MIDI SETTING]
You can make detailed MIDI settings, such as setting up MIDI transmit/receive channels.
About MIDI
MIDI (Musical Instrument Digital Interface) is a standard format for data transmission/reception. It enables the
transfer of performance data and commands between MIDI devices and personal computers.
Using MIDI, you can control a connected MIDI device from the Clavinova, or control the Clavinova from a con-
nected MIDI device or computer.
MIDI connectors
MIDI [IN]: Receives MIDI data.
MIDI [OUT]: Transmits MIDI data.
MIDI [THRU]: Transmits data received at the MIDI [IN] connector as it is.
Prepare dedicated MIDI cables.
[TO HOST] connector
Use this connector to connect the Clavinova to a computer.
The type connecting cable varies depending on the computer. Refer to “Connecting a Per-
sonal Computer” on page 63 for more information.
MIDI
HOST SELECT
PC-1 PC-2
Mac MIDI
OUT INTHRU
TIP
HOST SELECT
PC-1 PC-2
Mac MIDI
TO HOST
TIP
MIDI performance data and
commands are transferred in
the form of numeric values.
Since MIDI data that can be
transmitted or received var-
ies depending on the type of
MIDI device, check the “MIDI
Implementation Chart” to find
out what MIDI data and com-
mands your devices can
transmit or receive. The Clavi-
nova’s MIDI Implementation
Chart is listed on pages 31
and 32 in the “Reference
Booklet” for the CLP-970.
When you are using the
MIDI connectors, set the
[HOST SELECT] switch to
“MIDI.” (See page 63.)
When you are using the [TO
HOST] connector, set the
[HOST SELECT] switch cor-
rectly, according to the type
of computer you are using.
(See page 63.)
You can also obtain detailed
information about MIDI from
various music magazines
and books.
TIP
TIP
84 CLP-970
MIDI [MIDI SETTING]
Procedure
Press the [MIDI SETTING] button to enter MIDI setting mode.
This parameter enables you to specify the channel on
which the Clavinova transmits MIDI data.
See the procedure on page 72.
Setting for:
Main, Left, Layer, Left Layer
Setting range:
Ch1 - Ch16, Off (Not transmitted.)
Normal setting:
Main — Ch1
Left — Ch2
Layer — Ch3
Left Layer— Ch4
This parameter enables you to specify for each channel
whether the Clavinova receives data at the MIDI [IN]
connector or the [TO HOST] port A (CBX driver’s
port A).
The received data is played back using the XG voices (page
6 in the “Reference Booklet” for the CLP-970). You can also
assign the Clavinova’s preset voices to part of the data. (See
“XG Alternative” on page 90.)
See the procedure on page 72.
Setting for:
Ch1 - Ch16
Setting range:
On/Off
Normal setting:
On for all channels
DEMO SONG SELECT
TRANSPOSE
MASTER VOLUME
TEMPO VOICE EFFECT
SONG
CLP-970
MIN MAX
NEW SONG
SONG BALANCE
UPDOWN
BRILLIANCE
TRACK
1
TRACK
2
EXTRA
TRACKS
FILE METRONOME
CONTRAST
SONG
SETTING
START/ STOP SETTING
SPLIT
POINT
VOICE
SETTING
REVERB
CHORUS MIDI
SETTING
OTHER
SETTING
REC
PIANO
MAIN
LEFT
E. PIANO/
BASS
HARPSI-
CHORD
MALLET ORGAN STRINGS/
CHOIR
STOP
START/
PAUSE
SYNCHRO START
EXIT
PIANO/
E. PIANO
HARPSI/
MALLET
ORGAN/
STRINGS
BASS
A B
C D
NO YES
[MIDI SETTING]
Setting the MIDI transmit chan-
nel [MidiOutChannel]
Setting the MIDI receive channel
(Port A) [MidiInAChannel]
A B
C D
NO YES
Select a voice part. Specify the channel.
TIP
A B
C D
NO YES
Select a channel. Select On or Off.
MIDI IN
TO HOST
Sound source A
Channels 1-16
Port A Port B
Sound source B
Channels 1-16
MIDI data
Used for song playback
Used for performance
and playback
CLP-970 85
MIDI [MIDI SETTING]
This parameter enables you to specify for each channel
whether the Clavinova receives data at the MIDI [IN]
connector or the [TO HOST] port B (CBX driver’s
port B).
The received data is played back using the preset voices
(page 103).
See the procedure on page 72.
Setting for:
Ch1 - Ch16
Setting range:
On/Off
Normal setting:
On for all channels
“Local Control On” is a state in which the Clavinova
produces the sound from its tone generator when you
play the keyboard. In “Local Control Off” state, the
keyboard and the tone generator are cut off from each
other. This means that even if you play the keyboard,
the Clavinova will not produce the sound. Instead, the
keyboard data can be transmitted via MIDI to a con-
nected MIDI device, which can produce the sound.
The “Local Control Off” setting is useful when you
wish to play an external sound source while playing the
keys on the Clavinova.
See the procedure on page 72.
Setting range:
On/Off
Normal setting:
On
You can select whether your performance data or song
playback data (including demo songs) is sent via
MIDI.
See the procedure on page 72.
Setting range:
Keyboard (performance data played on the keyboard)
Song (song playback data)
Normal setting:
Keyboard
This parameter enables you to specify which MIDI
data the Clavinova can receive.
See the procedure on page 72.
Type of data:
Note, Control, Program, Pitch Bend, SysEx (System
Exclusive)
Setting range:
On/Off
Normal setting:
On for all types of data
Setting the MIDI receive channel
(Port B) [MidiInAChannel]
Setting Local control on/off
[LocalControl]
TIP
A B
C D
NO YES
Select a channel. Select On or Off.
A B
C D
NO YES
Selecting performance from the
keyboard or song data for MIDI
transmission [MidiOutSelect]
Selecting a type of data received
via MIDI [ReceiveParameter]
A B
C D
NO YES
A B
C D
NO YES
Select a type of data. Select On or Off.
86 CLP-970
MIDI [MIDI SETTING]
This parameter enables you to specify which MIDI
data the Clavinova can transmit.
See the procedure on page 72.
Type of data:
Note, Control, Program, Pitch Bend, SystemRealTime,
SysEx (System Exclusive)
Setting range:
On/Off
Normal setting:
On for all types of data
You can save current song data on the Clavinova as
MIDI bulk data by transferring it to a connected MIDI
data filer (such as an MDF3) or a sequencer. To play
back the saved song data, send the bulk data back from
the storage device to the Clavinova and follow the
usual playback procedure.
You can interrupt song data bulk dump transmission
by pressing the B [– (NO)] button.
See the procedure on page 72.
You can transmit the panel data, such as voice selec-
tion, to a connected sequencer. Before you record per-
formance data to a connected MDF3 or sequencer, it is
useful if you first send and record (at the beginning of
the performance data) the panel setup data for your
performance during playback.
See the procedure on page 72.
You can transmit the voice data specified in the “Voice
Setting” menu (page 78) as MIDI bulk data. You can
interrupt voice data bulk dump transmission by press-
ing the B [– (NO)] button.
See the procedure on page 72.
Selecting a type of data transmit-
ted via MIDI [TransmitParameter]
Executing song data bulk dump
[SongBulkDump]
A B
C D
NO YES
Select a type of data. Select On or Off.
A B
C D
NO YES
Transmitting the initial settings
on the panel [InitialSetup]
Executing voice data bulk dump
[VoiceBulkDump]
A B
C D
NO YES
A B
C D
NO YES
CLP-970 87
Other settings
You can make detailed settings for touch, tuning, scale, etc.
Procedure
Press the [OTHER SETTING] button to enter Other Setting mode.
You can specify a touch response (how the sound
responds to the way you play the keys).
See the procedure on page 72.
Setting range:
Light With a soft touch, the Clavinova produces a
loud sound. The volume level of tones tends
to be consistent.
Medium Standard touch response.
Heavy You must hit the key very hard to generate a
loud volume. This allows for versatile expres-
sion, from pianissimo to fortissimo tones.
Fixed No touch response. The volume level will be
the same regardless of how hard you play the
keys. Use the B [–]/[+] buttons to set the vol-
ume level.
Setting range of the “Fixed” volume level:
1 - 127
You can fine tune the pitch of the entire instrument.
This function is useful when you play the Clavinova
along with other instruments or CD music.
See the procedure on page 72.
Setting range:
A3=427.0Hz - 453.0Hz (0.1Hz steps)
You can select a tuning curve from “GrandPiano1” and
“GrandPiano2.” Select “Flat” if you feel the tuning
curve of the piano voice does not quite match that of
other instruments voices.
See the procedure on page 72.
Setting range:
Stretch Tuning curve particularly for pianos
Flat Tuning curve in which the frequency is
octave doubled over the entire keyboard
range
DEMO SONG SELECT
TRANSPOSE
MASTER VOLUME
TEMPO VOICE EFFECT
SONG
CLP-970
MIN MAX
NEW SONG
SONG BALANCE
UPDOWN
BRILLIANCE
TRACK
1
TRACK
2
EXTRA
TRACKS
FILE METRONOME
CONTRAST
SONG
SETTING
START/ STOP SETTING
SPLIT
POINT
VOICE
SETTING
REVERB
CHORUS MIDI
SETTING
OTHER
SETTING
REC
PIANO
MAIN
LEFT
E. PIANO/
BASS
HARPSI-
CHORD
MALLET ORGAN STRINGS/
CHOIR
STOP
START/
PAUSE
SYNCHRO START
EXIT
PIANO/
E. PIANO
HARPSI/
MALLET
ORGAN/
STRINGS
BASS
A B
C D
NO YES
[OTHER SETTING]
Selecting a touch response
[TouchResponse]
A B
C D
NO YES
Fine tuning the pitch [Tune]
Selecting a tuning curve for a
piano voice [PianoTuningCurve]
A B
C D
NO YES
A B
C D
NO YES
88 CLP-970
Other settings
You can select various scales.
Equal Temperament is the most common contempo-
rary piano tuning scale. However, history has known
numerous other scales, many of which serve as the
basis for certain genres of music. You can experience
the tunings of these genres.
See the procedure on page 72.
Setting range:
Equal One octave is divided into twelve equal inter-
vals. Currently most popular piano tuning
scale.
PureMajor/PureMinor
Based on natural overtones, three major chords
using these scales produce a beautiful, pure
sound. They are sometimes used for chorus
parts.
Pythagorean
This scale, designed by Pythagoras, a Greek
philosopher, is composed of only five pitches.
The 3rd produces swells, but the 4th and 5th
are beautiful and suitable for some leads.
MeanTone
This scale is an improvement of the
Pythagorean in that the swell of the 3rd has
been eliminated. It spread during the late 16th
century through the late 18th century. Handel
used this scale.
WerckMeister/KirnBerger
These scales combine Mean Tone and
Pythagorean in different ways. With these
scales, modulation changes the impression and
feel of the songs. They were often used in the
era of Bach and Beethoven. They are also often
used now to reproduce the music of that era on
harpsichords.
Normal setting:
Equal
If you select a scale other than Equal, you need to spec-
ify the root note using the B [–]/[+] buttons.
Setting range:
C, C
I
, D, E
b
, E, F, F
I
, G, A
b
, A, B
b
, B
This parameter is effective only on “GrandPiano1.”
See the procedure on page 72.
Setting range:
1 - 10, Off
This parameter is effective only on “GrandPiano1.”
See the procedure on page 72.
Setting range:
1 - 10, Off
Selecting a scale [Scale]
A B
C D
NO YES
Depth of string resonance
[StringResonanceDepth]
Depth of sustain sampling for the
damper pedal [SustainSam-
plingDepth]
A B
C D
NO YES
A B
C D
NO YES
A B
C D
NO YES
CLP-970 89
Other settings
This parameter enables you to set the speed of vibrato
when you select the Vibraphone voice and use a vibe
rotor pedal.
See the procedure on page 72.
Setting range:
1 - 10, Off
This parameter enables you to select whether the
sound is sustained while you press the keys on the key-
board (“PianoLike”) or the sound is sustained only
while you press and hold down the sustain pedal, like
playing a real vibraphone (“Normal”).
See the procedure on page 72.
Setting range:
PianoLike, Normal
Normal setting:
PianoLike
If you assign the START/PAUSE function to a pedal and turn
the function On, the pedal function assigned to the pedal in
the Voice Setting menu (pages 81 and 82) is disabled.
See the procedure on page 72.
Setting for:
Left, Middle, AUX
Setting range:
On/Off
Normal setting:
Off for all pedals
A pedal connected to the [AUX PEDAL] connector
may switch on and off differently. For example, some
pedals turn on the effects and others turn them off
when you press them.
Use this parameter to reverse this mechanism.
See the procedure on page 72.
Setting range:
Make, Break
Setting the speed of vibraphone’s
vibrato effect [VibraphoneRotor-
Speed]
Selecting a pedal function for
vibraphone
[VibraphonePedalMode]
A B
C D
NO YES
A B
C D
NO YES
Assigning the START/PAUSE func-
tion to a pedal [PedalStart/
Pause]
Selecting a type of auxiliary pedal
[AuxPedalType]
TIP
A B
C D
NO YES
Select a pedal to assign the function. Set to On or Off.
A B
C D
NO YES
90 CLP-970
Other settings
You can specify how far down you should press on the
right pedal until the damper effect (page 31) starts
working. This setting is effective when the right pedal
function (page 81) is set to either SustainCont or Sus-
tain.
See the procedure on page 72.
Setting range:
–2 (effective with the shallowest press) - 0 - +2 (effec-
tive with the deepest press)
This parameter enables you to set the range of continu-
ous pitch change made by the Pitch Bend function.
• This parameter is effective only on the keyboard
performance sound.
• You can set the range in semitone steps.
See the procedure on page 72.
Setting range:
–12 (Pitch is lowered by 12 semitones [one octave]
when you press the pedal.) - +12 (Pitch is raised by 12
semitones [one octave] when you press the pedal.)
Normal setting:
–2
The CLP-970 provides the XG tone generator for the
purpose of playing GM, XG, or DOC music data
(page 60). You can replace some XG voices with the
preset voices on the panel for playback. This parameter
enables you to select “Native” (using the preset voices)
or “XG” (using the XG voices).
See the procedure on page 72.
Setting for:
All preset voices on the panel
Setting range:
Native Using the preset voices
XG Using the XG voices
Normal setting:
GrandPiano1 Native (using the preset voices)
Other voices XG (using the XG voices)
Setting the point at which the
damper pedal starts to affect the
sound [HalfPedalPoint]
Pitch bend range
[PitchBendRange]
A B
C D
NO YES
A B
C D
NO YES
Replacing the XG voices with pre-
set voices [XGAlternative]
A B
C D
NO YES
Select the desired item. Select on or off.
CLP-970 91
Other settings
You can back up some settings, such as voice selection
and metronome setting, so that they will not be lost
after you turn off the power to the Clavinova.
• Memory songs (saved in the Clavinova’s memory),
the backup on/off setting (this parameter setting),
and the “CharacterCode” parameter setting
(page 56) are always backed up.
See the procedure on page 72.
Setting for:
Transpose, Brilliance, ReverbOnOff, SplitPoint, Main/
LeftVoice, MetronomeSetting, SongSetting, SongBal-
ance, MidiSetting, and OtherSetting
Setting range:
On/Off
Normal setting:
The Transpose, Main/LeftVoice, and MetronomeSet-
ting parameters are set to Off. Other parameters are set
to On.
You can reset the Clavinova to its normal (factory
default) settings.
• The CharacterCode parameter setting in the File
menu does not change.
• The MemoryBackUp parameter setting (On/Off)
(left column) is reset to the normal setting.
• You can specify whether the memory songs are
erased or kept.
See the procedure on page 72.
Selecting for “MemorySong”:
MemorySongExcluded Memory songs are kept.
MemorySongIncluded Memory songs are erased.
Press and hold down the white key on the right end
(C7) and press the [POWER] switch to turn on the
power to the Clavinova. In this case, the Memory songs
saved in the storage memory are not erased.
If you wish to erase Memory songs at this time, press
and hold down the right-most white key (C7) and
black key (B
b
6) and press the [POWER] switch to turn
on the power to the Clavinova.
Selecting items saved at shut-
down [MemoryBackUp]
A B
C D
NO YES
Select the desired item. Select on or off.
Restoring the normal (default)
settings [FactorySet]
Other method for restoring the
normal settings
A B
C D
NO YES
Reset the Clavinova.
Select a value for memory songs.
C7
B
6
[POWER]
92 CLP-970
Message List
The messages are listed in alphabetical order.
Message Meaning
This message is displayed following the message “BulkDataReceiving Song/
Voice.” Receiving bulk data is complete. After this message appears, you can
proceed to the next step.
Receiving bulk data has failed. Check the parameter settings and try again.
The Clavinova is receiving the song bulk data while this message is dis-
played. Wait until the message disappears, then proceed to the next step.
The Clavinova is receiving the voice setting bulk data while this message is
displayed. Wait until the message disappears, then proceed to the next step.
You have cancelled the “SongBulkDump” (page 86) or “VoiceBulkDump”
(page 86) transmission by pressing the B [–(NO)] button.
This message is displayed following the message “Executing.” The Clavi-
nova’s internal processing is complete. You may proceed to the next step.
Writing or reading data from the disk has failed. Try again. If you still see
this message, the disk may be damaged or the disk drive may have malfunc-
tion. If you see this message while using a brand new disk, it is more likely
that the disk drive is malfunctioning. Ask your Yamaha dealer for repair.
The floppy disk space is full and can no longer record data. Use a new disk
(page 53) or delete unnecessary files from the disk (page 53) to make room
for new data.
You attempted to eject a floppy disk from the disk drive while the drive was
writing or reading. The writing or reading operation is not complete yet. Try
it again.
CLP-970 93
Message List
Message Meaning
You tried to save a song by changing its title (using the “RenameSong” (page
54), “SaveToMemory” (page 52), or “SaveToDisk” (page 53) parameter), but
a song with the same name already exists in memory or on the floppy disk.
Three seconds after this message appears, the previous screen is restored.
Rename the song.
This message prompts you to execute a file-related operation. Press the B [+
(YES)] button to proceed, or press the [EXIT] button to cancel.
The Clavinova is processing the data internally. Wait until the message dis-
appears, then proceed to the next step.
The normal (factory default) settings (except for the memory song setting)
(“FactorySet” on page 91) have been restored. This message also appears if
you press and hold down the C7 key and turn on the power to the Clavinova
(page 91).
The normal (factory default) settings (including the memory song setting)
(“FactorySet” on page 91) have been restored. This message also appears if
you press and hold down the C7 and B
b
6 keys and turn on the power to the
Clavinova (page 91).
The Clavinova’s flash memory (storage memory) has expired. Consult your
Yamaha dealer. If this message appears, the Clavinova will not back up the
songs and settings in memory. Press the [EXIT] button to return to the pre-
vious screen.
In the CopyDisk operation (page 55), the copy source disk has not been
inserted to the disk drive. Insert the disk.
In the CopyDisk operation (page 55), the copy destination disk has not been
inserted into the disk drive. Insert the disk.
You turned off the power to the Clavinova while it was writing a song to
storage memory. This message appears next time you turn on the power.
The Clavinova checks if the contents of storage memory can be recovered.
This message appears following the message “LastPowerOffIllegalMemo-
rySongChecking,” indicating that the Clavinova recovered data in the stor-
age memory as much as possible.
94 CLP-970
Message List
Message Meaning
This message appears following the message “LastPowerOffIllegalMemo-
rySongChecking,” indicating that the Clavinova could not recover data in
the storage memory and that all memory songs were deleted.
There is not enough memory space left and you cannot save any more songs.
Save songs to a floppy disk (page 53) or delete some songs in the storage
memory, then save new data to memory.
A floppy disk has not been inserted into the disk drive for a disk-related
operation. Insert the disk and continue.
You tried to delete a song that does not exist in the storage memory or on
disk. You cannot delete the song.
This message prompts you to select whether you wish to overwrite the exist-
ing data with new data when you add recordings to a song. Press the B [+
(YES)] button to allow overwriting. Press the B [– (NO)] button to cancel.
You tried to start playing a song or perform another operation right after
you select the song. Wait until the message disappears.
1. You tried to write, copy, or delete data on a disk that has its “write pro-
tect” tab on, or a disk that is internally protected against writing. Set the
protect tab to off (unprotected) (page 14) and try again. If you still see
this message, the disk is internally protected (such as commercially avail-
able music data). You cannot write or copy to such a disk.
2. This message also appears when you try to copy data on an internally-
protected disk onto another disk using the CopyDisk function (page 55).
You cannot duplicate such a disk.
You tried to copy or delete data in internally-protected files (such as com-
mercially available music data). You cannot write to, copy, or delete such
files.
CLP-970 95
Message List
Message Meaning
1. After you load an internally-protected song into the Clavinova’s Current
memory or storage memory, you tried to save the song to a floppy disk.
You cannot save such a song to another disk. You cannot write or copy to
such a disk.
2. This message also appears if you try to transmit bulk data (page 86) of
an internally-protected song (such as commercially available music
data). You cannot transmit bulk data of such songs.
This message prompts you to select whether you wish to save the edited set-
tings. Press the B [+ (YES)] button to save the settings. Press the [EXIT] but-
ton to cancel.
You tried to perform another operation before saving the recorded song to
storage memory or a floppy disk. If you continue the operation, the
recorded song will be lost. To delete the new recording, press the B [– (NO)]
button. To keep the recording, press the B [+ (YES)] button. The Clavinova
displays the “SaveToMemory” (page 52) or “SaveToDisk” (page 53) parame-
ter screen. If necessary, select “SaveToMemory” or “SaveToDisk” accordingly
and save the recorded song, then proceed to another operation.
The Clavinova has found some defects in the selected (or playing) song.
Select the song and play it again. If you still see this message, the song data
may be damaged.
The Current memory space is full during recording. Recording stops auto-
matically. The data recorded up to that point remains. This message also
appears when you try to enter recording mode to make an additional
recording but the song data already fills the Current memory. In this case,
you cannot make an additional recording. Use the “ChannelClear” parame-
ter (page 75) to delete unnecessary tracks (if any) to make more room in
memory.
The size of the selected song is larger than the Current memory (page 97).
The CLP-970 cannot read the song. Select another song.
This message prompts you to start the operation. To start, press the B [+
(YES)] button. Press the [EXIT] button to cancel the operation.
96 CLP-970
Message List
Message Meaning
This message prompts you to confirm the execution. Press the B [+ (YES)]
button to continue. Press the B [– (NO)] button to cancel.
There is a malfunction with the TO HOST connector.
When you are using the CLP-970 with a connected computer:
The power to the computer is turned off, the cables are connected incor-
rectly, the [HOST SELECT] switch is set incorrectly, or the driver or MIDI
application on the computer works incorrectly. Turn off the power to the
CLP-970 and the computer, then check the cable connections and the
[HOST SELECT] switch setting. Then, turn on the power to the computer
and the CLP-970 in this order and check to see if the driver and MIDI appli-
cation on the computer work properly.
When you are using only the CLP-970:
This message appears if a cable is connected to the TO HOST connector on
the CLP-970. In this case, turn off the power to the CLP-970, remove the
cable from the TO HOST connector, then turn on the power to the CLP-970.
If the cable is left connected to the TO HOST connector, the CLP-970 may
not work correctly.
You tried to perform a file- or disk-related operation using an unformatted
disk. Eject the disk, format it using the “FormatDisk” parameter (page 56),
and try again.
You tried to perform a file- or disk-related operation using an unformatted
disk. To cancel the operation, press the B [– (NO)] button. To format the
disk and try again, press the B [+ (YES)] button to display the “FormatDisk”
parameter (page 56).
You tried to copy data to a different type of disk (e.x.: 2DD
→2HD,
2HD
→2DD) during the CopyDisk operation (page 55). Eject the disk and
insert an appropriate disk.
You used a period or space at the beginning of a song name or you tried to
change a song name that includes a character (or characters) not supported
by the CLP-970, and the CLP-970 could not process the name. The Clavi-
nova displays the previous screen in three seconds. Rename the song cor-
rectly.
CLP-970 97
Questions about Operations
and Functions
■ The buttons do not respond.
While you are using a function, some buttons not
used for the function are disabled. If the song is
playing, stop the playback. Otherwise, press the
[EXIT] button to return to the main screen. Then,
perform the desired operation.
■
The sound sustains and does not decay when I
press the sostenuto pedal.
With the voices in the ORGAN or STRINGS/
CHOIR group, the sound continues sustaining
while you are holding down the sostenuto pedal.
■
Higher or lower notes does not sound correctly
when the transpose or octave setting is made.
The setting range for the transposition and octave
setting is C2 - G8. (With the normal setting, the
Clavinova’s 88 keys covers the range of A1 - C7.) If
the lowest key is set to a note lower than C2, it will
produce a sound one octave higher. If the highest
key is set to a note higher than G8, it will produce a
sound one octave lower.
■
How can I return to the recording or song select
screen during song recording or playback?
Press one of the SONG SELECT [ ] and [ ]
buttons once.
■
The tempo does not change even though I
recorded with tempo changes.
Depending on the timing of tempo changes, the
changed tempo may not be recorded. In this case,
the recording will be played back at the original
tempo.
Make tempo changes when the recording track is
selected and a red track indicator is flashing. The
same trick applies to editing the tempo after record-
ing.
■
Performance in Dual or Split mode is not
recorded.
Track data is lost unexpectedly.
For Dual or Split mode recording, the recording
track for the second voice (that is, the voice for the
left-hand part) is automatically assigned (page 48).
Therefore, if the track already has data, the data will
be overwritten during recording. Also, switching to
Dual mode or Split mode in the middle of the song
is not recorded. Therefore, the notes you played
with the second voice (or the notes lower than the
Split point) are not recorded.
■
What type of data is recorded?
Data recorded in the tracks:
• Note data (notes you play)
• Voice selection
• Clavinova pedals and external pedals on/off
• Reverb depth “ReverbSend”
• Chorus depth “ChorusSend”
• Variation effect depth “VariationSend”
• Voice octave setting “Octave”
• Voice volume level “Volume”
• Stereo image of each voice “Pan”
• Fine tuning of two voice pitch (Dual mode)
“Detune”
• Volume level changes for each voice with
response to the way you play “TouchSense”
Data recorded globally in all tracks:
•Tempo
• Time signature
•Reverb type
• Chorus type
• Variation effect type
You can change all data except for note data after record-
ing.
You can change the time signature at the beginning of the
song, or at a position in the song to which you move, by
using the B [–]/[+] buttons while the song is stopped.
98 CLP-970
Questions about Operations and Functions
■ I cannot change the key signature in the song
after recording.
Press the [STOP] button to locate the top of the
song, use the B [–]/[+] buttons to locate the mea-
sure in which you wish to change the key signature,
then change it.
■
How much data can I record?
• Current memory (page 50): About 600KB
• Storage memory (page 50): About 750KB
• 2DD floppy disk (page 13): about 720KB
• 2HD floppy disk (page 13): about 1.4MB
■
The on/off setting of the pedal connected to the
AUX PEDAL jack is reversed.
Some types of pedals may turn on and off in oppo-
site fashion. Use the “AuxPedalType” parameter
(page 89) in the “OTHER SETTING” menu to
change the external pedal setting.
■
The song title is not correct.
The “CharacterCode” setting may be different than
that used when you named the song. Also, if the
song was recorded on another instrument, the title
might be displayed incorrectly. Use the “Character-
Code” parameter (page 56) in the FILE menu to
change the setting. However, if the song was
recorded on another instrument, changing the
“CharacterCode” parameter setting may not resolve
the problem.
■
What is the difference between “TouchSense”
and “TouchResponse” MIDI data?
“TouchSense” determines the manner and degree
to which the volume level changes in response to
your touch on the keyboard. It causes MIDI exclu-
sive data (that controls the tone generator) to be
output.
“TouchResponse” determines the touch sensitivity
as an instrument and causes MIDI note-on velocity
data to be output.
CLP-970 99
Appendix
CLP-970 99
100 CLP-970
Troubleshooting
Problem Cause Solution
The Clavinova does not turn on.
The Clavinova has not been
plugged in properly.
Securely insert the female plug into
the socket on the Clavinova, and
the male plug into a proper AC out-
let. (See page 19.)
A click or pop is heard when the
power is turned on or off.
Electrical current is being applied to
the instrument.
This is normal, and is no cause for
concern.
Noise is heard from the Clavinova’s
speakers.
The noise may be due to interfer-
ence caused by the use of a mobile
phone in close proximity to the
Clavinova.
Turn off the mobile phone, or use it
further away from the Clavinova.
The overall volume is low, or no
sound is heard.
The [MASTER VOLUME] is set too
low.
Raise the [MASTER VOLUME]
level. (See page 20.)
Headphones are connected.
Unplug the headphones. (See page
20.)
The Local Control function is turned
off.
Turn the Local Control function on.
(See page 85.)
The damper pedal has no effect, or
the sound continuously sustains
even when the damper pedal is not
pressed.
The pedal cord plug is not con-
nected.
Securely insert the pedal cord plug
into the proper jack. (See step 5 on
page 107.)
The pitch and/or tone of the piano
voices in certain ranges do not
sound right.
The Clavinova’s piano voices
attempt to precisely simulate actual
piano sounds. However, as a result
of sampling algorithms, overtones
in some ranges may sound exag-
gerated, producing a somewhat dif-
ferent pitch or tone.
This is normal.
Mechanical noise is heard during
performance.
The Clavinova’s keyboard mecha-
nism simulates the keyboard mech-
anism of a piano. Mechanical noise
is also heard on a piano.
This is normal.
CLP-970 101
Data Compatibility
This section covers basic information on data compatibility: whether or not other MIDI devices can playback the
data recorded by CLP-970, and whether or not the CLP-970 can playback commercially available song data or song
data created for other instruments or on a computer.
Depending on the MIDI device or data characteristics, you may be able to play back the data without any problem,
or you may have to perform some special operations before the data can be played back. If you run into problems
playing back data, please refer to the information below.
Basic Check Points
The data and the MIDI device must match in regards
to the items below.
• Disk Format
• Sequence format
• Voice allocation format
Disk format
Floppy disks are the main storage medium for data
used with various devices, including computers. Dif-
ferent devices have different systems of saving data,
therefore it is necessary to first configure the floppy
disk to the system of the device being used. This opera-
tion is called “formatting.”
• There are two types of floppy disks: MF2DD (dou-
ble sided, double density) and MF2HD (double
sided, high density), and each type has different for-
matting systems.
• CLP-970 can record and playback with both types of
floppy disks.
• When formatted by the CLP-970, a 2DD disk saves
up to 720 KB (kilobytes) and a 2HD disk saves up to
1.44 MB (megabytes). (The figures “720 KB” and
“1.44 MB” indicate the data memory capacity. They
are also used to indicate the format type of disk.)
• Playback is only possible when the MIDI device to
be used is compatible with the format of the disk.
Sequence Format
The system which records song data is called “sequence
format.”
• Playback is only possible when the sequence format
of the disk matches that of the MIDI device.
[Common Sequence Formats]
■
SMF (Standard MIDI File)
This is the most common sequence format.
• Standard MIDI Files are generally available as one
of two types: Format 0 or Format 1.
• Many MIDI devices are compatible with Format
0, and most commercially available software is
recorded as Format 0.
• The CLP-970 is compatible with both Format 0
and Format 1 (for Format 1, up to a maximum of
17 chunks).
• Performance data recorded on the CLP-970 is
saved in the SMF format 0 in a floppy disk.
■
ESEQ
This sequence format is compatible with many of
Yamaha’s MIDI devices, including the Clavinova
series instruments. This is a common format used
with various Yamaha software.
• The CLP-970 is compatible with ESEQ.
102 CLP-970
Data Compatibility
Voice Allocation Format
With MIDI, voices are assigned to specific numbers,
called “program numbers.” The numbering standard
(order of voice allocation) is referred to as the “voice
allocation format.”
• Voices may not play back as expected unless the
voice allocation format of the song data matches
that of the compatible MIDI device used for play-
back.
[Main Voice Allocation Formats]
■
GM System Level 1
This is one of the most common voice allocation
formats.
• Many MIDI devices are compatible with GM Sys-
tem Level 1, as is most commercially available
software.
• The CLP-970 is compatible with GM System
Level 1.
■
XG
XG is a major enhancement of the GM System Level
1 format, and was developed by Yamaha specifically
to provide more voices and variations, as well as
greater expressive control over voices and effects,
and to ensure compatibility of data well into the
future.
• The CLP-970 is compatible with XG.
• Performance data recorded with preset voices on
the CLP-970 can be played on other XG-compati-
ble instruments.
■
DOC (Disk Orchestra Collection)
This voice allocation format is compatible with
many of Yamaha’s MIDI devices, including the
Clavinova series instruments.
This is also common format used with various
Yamaha software.
The CLP-970 is compatible with DOC.
• Even if the devices and data used satisfy all the
conditions above, the data may still not be com-
pletely compatible, depending on the specifica-
tions of the devices and particular data recording
methods.
CLP-970 103
Preset Voice List
Voice name
Stereo
sampling
Touch
Sense
Dynamic
sampling
Key-off
samples
String
resonance
Voice description
GrandPiano1 ● ● ● ● ●
This voice has been sampled from a full con-
cert grand piano. It features five-stage dynamic
sampling, tone changes with damper pedal
operation, and a subtle voicing at the release
of the keys. It simulates the ultimate acoustic
piano sound. It also reproduces a string reso-
nance that is typical of acoustic pianos. This
voice is suitable not only for classical music but
for piano music of any genre.
GrandPiano2 ● ●
×××
A bright, expansive piano sound which is ideal
for rock and popular genres.
E.Piano1 ● ● ●
××
An electronic piano sound created by FM syn-
thesis. Extremely “musical” response with vary-
ing timbre according to keyboard dynamics.
E.Piano2
×
● ● ●
×
The sound of an electric piano using hammer-
struck metallic “tines.” Soft tone when played
lightly, and an aggressive tone when played hard.
SynthPiano
×
●
×××
This voice simulates the electric piano sound
produced by synthesizers in popular music. It
also goes well with the acoustic piano sound.
WoodBass ● ● ● ●
×
This voice simulates the sound of an upright
bass played with the fingers, and is suitable for
jazz and Latin music. Stereo sampling has
improved the acoustic feel.
ElectricBass
×
● ●
××
Electric bass for a wide range of music styles,
jazz, rock, popular, and more.
Bass&Cymbal ● ● ●
××
WoodBass sound and stereo-sampled cymbal
sound are layered. This voice is very effective
for a jazz walking bass.
Harpsichord8' ●
××
●
×
The harpsichord is often used for Baroque
music. The volume level is always consistent
regardless of how you play. The instrument
generates a peculiar voice when you release
the keys. “8’” means that it produces the same
octave sound as the keys.
Harpsichord8'+4' ●
××
●
×
This voice combines the 8’ and 4’ harpsichord
sounds. “4’” means that it produces a sound
one octave higher than the actual keys.
ElectricClavichord
×
●
×
●
×
This is the voice of a keyboard that produces
sound by striking the strings with magnetic
pickups. This funky sound is popular in black
contemporary music. Because of its unique
structure, the instrument produces a peculiar
sound when you release the keys.
Vibraphone ● ● ●
××
This voice simulates a vibraphone played with a soft mallet.
The harder you play, the more metallic it sounds. Use the
“VibraphonePedalMode” parameter in the “OTHER SET-
TING” menu to select whether the sound sustains while
you hold down the keys, or the sound sustains only when
you press the pedal. An actual vibraphone has a rotor
inside the resonance tube, which rotates via the motor to
create the vibrato effect. Pressing the left pedal applies this
effect; pressing the pedal again turns the effect off.
104 CLP-970
Preset Voice List
Voice name
Stereo
sampling
Touch
Sense
Dynamic
sampling
Key-off
samples
String
resonance
Voice description
Marimba ● ● ●
××
This voice simulates a concert-type marimba
sound. Stereo sampling helps reproduce a real
acoustic spread.
Celesta ● ● ●
××
A celesta is a percussive instrument. When
you play the keyboard, the hammer hits a
metallic board to produce the sound. This
instrument is famous for the impressive sound
in “Dance of the Suger-Plum Fairy” of The Nut-
cracker Suite by Tchaikovsky.
PipeOrganPrincipal ●
××××
This voice features the combination of pipes
(8'+4'+2') of a principal (brass instrument)
organ. It is suitable for Baroque church music.
PipeOrganFlute1 ●
××××
This voice features the combination of pipes
(8'+4') of a flute (woodwind instrument) organ.
Its soft sound is suitable for the accompani-
ment of hymns.
PipeOrganFlute2 ●
××××
This voice features the combination of pipes
(8'+4'+1 1/3') of a flute organ. It sounds more
brilliant than PipeOrganFlute1 and is suitable
for solo performance.
PipeOrganTutti ●
××××
This voice features a full coupler of a pipe
organ, famous for the sound used in Toccatta
and Fugue by Bach.
JazzOrgan
×××××
The sound of a “tonewheel” type electric organ.
Often heard in jazz and rock idioms.
Strings ● ●
×××
This voice features a string ensemble that
accurately simulates all string instruments,
including contrabass, cello, viola, and violin.
SynthStrings ● ●
×××
Sampled strings, processed for spread and
warmth. This voice is suitable for a pad in
ensemble music.
SlowStrings ● ●
×××
This voice features a string ensemble sound
with a slow attack. It is suitable for a duet with
piano or electric piano.
Choir ● ●
×××
A big, spacious choir voice. Perfect for creating
rich harmonies in slow pieces.
SlowChoir ● ●
×××
This voice features a chorus sound with a slow
attack. It is suitable for a duet with piano or
electric piano.
Scat ● ● ●
××
You can enjoy jazz “scatting” with this voice.
Depending on how hard and what note range
you play, different sounds will be produced.
CLP-970 105
Voice Combination Examples
(Dual and Split)
Dual
Split
Dual + Split
MAIN + MAIN
GrandPiano1 + E.Piano1
GrandPiano1 + E.Piano2
This combination is often used in popular music.
MAIN + MAIN GrandPiano1 + SynthPiano This produces a fantasy, spacious piano sound.
MAIN + MAIN GrandPiano2 + GrandPiano2
This combination sounds as if you are playing
two notes that are two octaves apart. It is suit-
able for the accompaniment of Salsa music.
MAIN + MAIN E.Piano1 + SlowChoir This is suitable for romantic ballads.
MAIN + MAIN E.Piano2 + ElectricClavichord
This is suitable for funk, rhythm & blues, and soul
music.
MAIN + MAIN Harpsichord8' + Strings
This combination is very suitable for Baroque
music.
MAIN + MAIN Celesta + SynthStirngs
This combination adds strings and bell sound. A
delay effect is automatically applied.
MAIN / LEFT
GrandPiano1 / WoodBass
or Bass&Cymbal
This is recommended for light Jazz music. The
damper pedal is effective on the voice assigned
to the right-hand range.
MAIN / LEFT Celesta / Choir
This is suitable for a peaceful, somewhat cute
song.
MAIN / LEFT Choir / GrandPiano1
Play these voices elegantly along with piano
arpeggio. Playing the Choir voice in chords
would be more effective.
MAIN / LEFT Scat / WoodBass
This combination features a cool (stylish) jazz
chorus. The Scat voice is touch sensitive, adding
a variety of expressions.
MAIN / LEFT E.Piano2 / Scat
Playing the Scat voice for a bass part may create
an interesting sound.
MAIN + MAIN / LEFT
GrandPiano1 + SynthString /
GrandPiano1
This combination creates the thick sound of a
layered piano and strings.
MAIN + MAIN / LEFT
GrandPiano2 + E.Piano1 /
ElectricBass
This sound is suitable for fusion. Deeper reverb
and chorus (pages 79 and 80) will improve the
groove. The damper pedal is effective on the
voice assigned to the right-hand range.
MAIN + MAIN / LEFT + LEFT
Harpsichord8' + 4' + Strings /
Harpsichord8' + Strings
This combination makes a very brilliant sound.
106
CLP-970
CLP-970/970M/970C:
Keyboard Stand Assembly
CAUTION
• Be careful not to confuse parts, and be sure to install all parts in the correct direction. Please assemble in accor-
dance with the sequence given below.
• Assembly should be carried out by at least two persons.
• Be sure to use the correct screw size, as indicated below. Use of incorrect screws can cause damage.
• Be sure to tighten up all screws upon completing assembly of each unit.
• To disassemble, reverse the assembly sequence given below.
The parts shown in the “Assembly Parts” illustra-
tion will be used. Follow the assembly instructions
and select the parts as needed.
1.
Attach the side panels to the pedal box.
Place the plastic bag that contained the side
panels on the floor when assembling the stand
to prevent scratches to the floor or stand.
2.
Attach the rear panel.
Have a Phillips-head (+) screwdriver ready.
6 x 25 mm
round-head screws x4
4 x 12 mm
round-head screws x2
Cord holders x 2
6 x 16 mm
flat-head screws x4
4 x 20 mm
tapping screws x4
Assembly Parts
1
2
3
4
pedal box
rear panel
side
panel
(left)
side
panel
(right)
Bundled pedal cord inside
AC power cord
main unit
side panel
(right)
side panel
(left)
(1) Untie and straighten out the
bundled cord attached to the
bottom of the pedal box.
Don’t discard the vinyl tie,
you’ll need it later in step 6.
(2) Use the four long
round-head
screws 1 to
attach the pedal
box. First attach
one side panel,
then attach the
other side panel.
Make sure the
indented surface on
the side panel and the
rear surface on the
pedal box will match
correctly, without
creating a step.
L
R
(1) With the rear
panel on the
feet’s
protruding
edge, align the
panel with the
groove and
secure the top
of the panel.
(3) Secure the
bottom of the
rear panel to the
pedal box using
four tapping
screws 4.
(2) Secure the top of the
rear panel to the side
panel brackets using
two thin round-head
screws 3.
CLP-970 107
CLP-970/970M/970C: Keyboard Stand Assembly
3. Mount the main unit.
4. Fix the main unit.
5. Connect the pedal cord.
6. Secure the pedal cord.
7. Set the voltage selector and connect
the power cord.
CAUTION
• Fingers can become pinched between the main
unit and the rear or side panels, be extra careful
so as not to drop the main unit.
• Do not hold the keyboard in any position other
than the position shown in the above illustration.
Be sure to place your hands at least
10 centimeters from either end of the
main unit when positioning it.
at least
10 cm
(2) Use short flat-head screws 2 to
secure the main unit from the
front.
* Use the rear hole on the front
brackets to attach the screws.
(1) Center the main unit to produce equal clearance
on the left and right sides.
(1) Pass the pedal cord plug
from the rear as shown,
and insert the plug into the
PEDAL jack.
(2) Use a vinyl tie to
take up any slack in
the pedal cord.
(1) Attach the cord
holders to the rear
panel as shown, then
clip the cord into the
holders.
Voltage Selector
Before connecting the
AC power cord, check
the setting of the
voltage selector which
is provided in some
areas. To set the
selector for 110V, 127V,
220V or 240V main
voltages, use a “minus”
screwdriver to rotate the selector dial so that the correct
voltage for your region appears next to the pointer on the
panel. The voltage selector is set at 240V when the unit is
initially shipped.
After the proper voltage has been selected, connect the AC
power cord to the AC INLET and an AC wall outlet. A plug
adaptor may be also provided in some areas to match the
pin configuration of the AC wall outlets in your area.
CAUTION
• An improper voltage setting can cause serious damage
to the Clavinova or result in improper operation.
108
CLP-970
CLP-970/970M/970C: Keyboard Stand Assembly
8.
Set the adjuster.
After completing the assembly, please check the
following.
• Are there any parts left over?
• Review the assembly procedure and correct any
errors.
• Is the Clavinova clear of doors and other movable
fixtures?
• Move the Clavinova to an appropriate location.
• Does the Clavinova make a rattling noise when
you shake it?
• Tighten all screws.
• Does the pedal box rattle or give way when you
step on the pedals?
• Turn the adjuster so that it is set firmly against the
floor.
• Are the pedal and power cords inserted securely
into the sockets?
• Check the connection.
• If the main unit creaks or is otherwise unsteady
when you play on the keyboard, refer to the assem-
bly diagrams and retighten all screws.
Rotate the adjuster until it comes in
firm contact with the floor surface.
Speaker box
Key cover
When moving the instrument after assembly,
always hold the bottom of the main unit.
Do not hold the keyboard cover or speaker box.
Improper handling can result in damage to the
instrument or personal injury.
CLP-970 109
Index
You can search the desired section using not only the terminology in this manual but also commonly-used words.
The * mark indicates that the corresponding page includes the terminology explanation in the right column.
Numerics
50 greats for the Clavinova 15
50 Piano Preset Songs 26
Practicing a one-hand part 28
A
Adding reverberation to the sound
→ REVERB 33
Adding variation to the sound
→ Effect function 32
Assembly 106
Assigning the START/PAUSE
function to a pedal 89
AUX IN jacks 62
AUX OUT jacks 61
AUX PEDAL jacks 62
Auxiliary pedal function 82
B
BackUp 91
Bench 15
BRILLIANCE 32
C
Center pedal 31
Center pedal function 82
Character Code 56
Characters 56
CHORUS 33
combining two voices
→ Dual mode 35
computer 63
Connection
Audio 61
MIDI 66
Other Components 61
Serial 64
Speaker 62
USB 67
Connectors
MIDI IN/OUT/THRU 63, 66
CONTRAST 20
D
Damper (right) pedal 31
Data Compatibility 101
Data type 59
Default (Normal) setting* 32
Demonstration tunes 24
Detailed Settings 70
Metronome 77
MIDI 83
Other settings 87
recording and playback 74
voices 78
Disk
Copy 55
Format 56
Disk song 50
Display contrast 20
DOWN (TEMPO)
50 Piano Preset Songs 27
metronome 40
Dual
Detailed settings 78
Recording 49
Dual mode
→ combining two voices 35
E
Effect function 32
EXIT 23
EXTRA TRACKS
→ the third or more tracks 46
F
FactorySet 91
Fast forward 27, 58
FILE 50
Floppy Disk 13, 14
Formatting a floppy disk 56
H
Headphones 20
HOST SELECT switch 62
J
Jacks
AUX IN 62
AUX OUT 61
AUX PEDAL 62
PEDAL 63
PHONES 20
TO HOST 62, 64
L
LCD → Screen 23
Contrast 20
Left pedal 31
Left pedal function 82
LEFT voice group buttons 37
List
Demonstration tunes 24
Detailed Settings 70
Message 92
Preset Voice 103
M
MAIN voice group buttons 30
Maintenance 14
MASTER VOLUME 20
Memory 50
Memory song 50
MemoryBackUp 91
Message List 92
Metronome 40
Detailed settings 77
METRONOME SETTING 77
MIDI 83
Detailed settings 83
MIDI cables 66
MIDI connectors 63, 66
MIDI driver 64
MIDI SETTING 83
Music Data 57
Music stand 18
N
New Song 41
Normal setting* 32
110 CLP-970
Index
O
Other settings 87
P
Pedal Function
Auxiliary 82
Center 82
Left 82
Right 81
PEDAL jack 63
Pedals 31
Personal computer 63
PHONES jacks 20
Playback
50 Piano Preset Songs 26
Demo Songs 24
Recorded Songs and Music Data 58
Playing back repeatedly (song) 76
Playing back repeatedly
(specifying the range) 75
playing two voices → Split mode 37
POWER 19
Practicing a one-hand part
(50 preset songs) 28
PRECAUTIONS 3
Preset song memory 50
Preset Voice List 103
R
Recording
Tape Recorder 61
Recording in Dual 49
Recording in Split 49
Recording Your Performance 41
Re-recording 43
REVERB 33
Rewind 27, 58
Right pedal 31
Right pedal function 81
S
Scale 88
Screen 23
Select
50 piano preset songs 26
Demo Songs 24
Recorded Songs and Music Data 57
Selecting a touch response 87
SETTING
metronome 77
Volume 20
SMF (Standard MIDI File) 101
Soft (left) pedal 31
Song
Data Type 59
Delete 53
Detailed settings 74
Playing back repeatedly 76
Rename 54
Store 50
Store (Floopy disk) 53
Store (Storage memory) 53
SONG BALANCE 48
SONG SELECT
50 Piano Preset Songs 26
Recorded Songs and Music Data 57
Recording 41
SONG SETTING 74
Sostenuto (center) pedal 31
Sound
brilliance 32
expression 32
reverberation 33
spread and spaciousness 33
Soundboard reverb 33
Split
Detailed settings 78
Recording 49
Split mode → playing two voices 37
Split point 38
Splitting the keyboard range and
playing two different voices 37
START/PAUSE
50 Piano Preset Songs 26
Recorded Songs and Music Data 58
Recording 42
START/STOP
metronome 40
STOP
50 Piano Preset Songs 27
Recorded Songs and Music Data 58
Recording 42
Storage memory 50
StringResonance 88
SustainSampling 88
Synchro Start
50 preset songs 28
Recorded Songs and Music Data 58
T
TEMPO
50 Piano Preset Songs 27
metronome 40
Recorded Songs and Music Data 58
the third or more tracks
→ EXTRA TRACKS 46
TO HOST jack 62, 64
TouchResponse 87
Track playback on and off 59
TRACK1/TRACK2
50 Piano Preset Songs 28
Recording 41, 45
TRANSPOSE 34
Transposition 34
Troubleshooting 100
Tune 87
Type of characters 56
Type of data (recorded) 97
U
UP (TEMPO)
50 Piano Preset Songs 27
metronome 40
V
VOICE SETTING 78
Voices 30
Detailed settings 78
Volume
Balance (SONG BLANCE) 48
Setting 20
X
XG 102
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
INFORMATION RELATING TO PERSONAL INJURY, ELECTRICAL SHOCK,
AND FIRE HAZARD POSSIBILITIES HAS BEEN INCLUDED IN THIS LIST.
WARNING- When using any electrical or electronic product,
basic precautions should always be followed. These precautions
include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Read all Safety Instructions, Installation Instructions, Spe-
cial Message Section items, and any Assembly Instructions
found in this manual BEFORE making any connections, includ-
ing connection to the main supply.
2. Main Power Supply Verification: Yamaha products are
manufactured specifically for the supply voltage in the area
where they are to be sold. If you should move, or if any doubt
exists about the supply voltage in your area, please contact your
dealer for supply voltage verification and (if applicable) instruc-
tions. The required supply voltage is printed on the name plate.
For name plate location, please refer to the graphic found in the
Special Message Section of this manual.
3. This product may be equipped with a polarized plug (one
blade wider than the other). If you are unable to insert the plug
into the outlet, turn the plug over and try again. If the problem
persists, contact an electrician to have the obsolete outlet
replaced. Do NOT defeat the safety purpose of the plug.
4. Some electronic products utilize external power supplies
or adapters. Do NOT connect this type of product to any power
supply or adapter other than one described in the owners manual,
on the name plate, or specifically recommended by Yamaha.
5. WARNING: Do not place this product or any other
objects on the power cord or place it in a position where anyone
could walk on, trip over, or roll anything over power or connect-
ing cords of any kind. The use of an extension cord is not recom-
mended! If you must use an extension cord, the minimum wire
size for a 25’ cord (or less) is 18 AWG. NOTE: The smaller the
AWG number, the larger the current handling capacity. For
longer extension cords, consult a local electrician.
6. Ventilation: Electronic products, unless specifically
designed for enclosed installations, should be placed in locations
that do not interfere with proper ventilation. If instructions for
enclosed installations are not provided, it must be assumed that
unobstructed ventilation is required.
7. Temperature considerations: Electronic products should
be installed in locations that do not significantly contribute to
their operating temperature. Placement of this product close to
heat sources such as; radiators, heat registers and other devices
that produce heat should be avoided.
8. This product was NOT designed for use in wet/damp loca-
tions and should not be used near water or exposed to rain.
Examples of wet/damp locations are; near a swimming pool, spa,
tub, sink, or wet basement.
9. This product should be used only with the components
supplied or; a cart, rack, or stand that is recommended by the
manufacturer. If a cart, rack, or stand is used, please observe all
safety markings and instructions that accompany the accessory
product.
10. The power supply cord (plug) should be disconnected
from the outlet when electronic products are to be left unused for
extended periods of time. Cords should also be disconnected
when there is a high probability of lightning and/or electrical
storm activity.
11. Care should be taken that objects do not fall and liquids are
not spilled into the enclosure through any openings that may exist.
12. Electrical/electronic products should be serviced by a
qualified service person when:
a. The power supply cord has been damaged; or
b. Objects have fallen, been inserted, or liquids have been
spilled into the enclosure through openings; or
c. The product has been exposed to rain: or
d. The product dose not operate, exhibits a marked change
in performance; or
e. The product has been dropped, or the enclosure of the
product has been damaged.
13. Do not attempt to service this product beyond that
described in the user-maintenance instructions. All other servic-
ing should be referred to qualified service personnel.
14. This product, either alone or in combination with an
amplifier and headphones or speaker/s, may be capable of pro-
ducing sound levels that could cause permanent hearing loss. DO
NOT operate for a long period of time at a high volume level or
at a level that is uncomfortable. If you experience any hearing
loss or ringing in the ears, you should consult an audiologist.
IMPORTANT: The louder the sound, the shorter the time period
before damage occurs.
15. Some Yamaha products may have benches and/or accessory
mounting fixtures that are either supplied as a part of the product
or as optional accessories. Some of these items are designed to be
dealer assembled or installed. Please make sure that benches are
stable and any optional fixtures (where applicable) are well
secured BEFORE using. Benches supplied by Yamaha are
designed for seating only. No other uses are recommended.
PLEASE KEEP THIS MANUAL
92-469-2
* This applies only to products distributed by YAMAHA CORPORATION OF AMERICA. (class B)
(2 wires)
• This applies only to products distributed by Yamaha-Kemble Music
(U.K.) Ltd.
(polarity)
• This applies only to products distributed by Yamaha Canada Music
Ltd.
• Ceci ne s’applique qu’aux produits distribués par Yamaha Canada
Musique Ltée.
FCC INFORMATION (U.S.A.)
1. IMPORTANT NOTICE: DO NOT MODIFY THIS UNIT!
This product, when installed as indicated in the instruc-
tions contained in this manual, meets FCC require-
ments. Modifications not expressly approved by
Yamaha may void your authority, granted by the FCC, to
use the product.
2. IMPORTANT: When connecting this product to acces-
sories and/or another product use only high quality
shielded cables. Cable/s supplied with this product
MUST be used. Follow all installation instructions. Fail-
ure to follow instructions could void your FCC authori-
zation to use this product in the USA.
3. NOTE: This product has been tested and found to com-
ply with the requirements listed in FCC Regulations,
Part 15 for Class “B” digital devices. Compliance with
these requirements provides a reasonable level of
assurance that your use of this product in a residential
environment will not result in harmful interference with
other electronic devices. This equipment generates/
uses radio frequencies and, if not installed and used
according to the instructions found in the users manual,
may cause interference harmful to the operation of
other electronic devices. Compliance with FCC regula-
tions does not guarantee that interference will not occur
in all installations. If this product is found to be the
source of interference, which can be determined by
turning the unit “OFF” and “ON”, please try to eliminate
the problem by using one of the following measures:
Relocate either this product or the device that is being
affected by the interference.
Utilize power outlets that are on different branch (circuit
breaker or fuse) circuits or install AC line filter/s.
In the case of radio or TV interference, relocate/reorient
the antenna. If the antenna lead-in is 300 ohm ribbon
lead, change the lead-in to co-axial type cable.
If these corrective measures do not produce satisfac-
tory results, please contact the local retailer authorized
to distribute this type of product. If you can not locate
the appropriate retailer, please contact Yamaha Corpo-
ration of America, Electronic Service Division, 6600
Orangethorpe Ave, Buena Park, CA90620
The above statements apply ONLY to those products
distributed by Yamaha Corporation of America or its
subsidiaries.
IMPORTANT NOTICE FOR THE UNITED KINGDOM
Connecting the Plug and Cord
IMPORTANT. The wires in this mains lead are coloured in
accordance with the following code:
BLUE : NEUTRAL
BROWN : LIVE
As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this appa-
ratus may not correspond with the coloured makings iden-
tifying the terminals in your plug proceed as follows:
The wire which is coloured BLUE must be connected to
the terminal which is marked with the letter N or coloured
BLACK.
The wire which is coloured BROWN must be connected to
the terminal which is marked with the letter L or coloured
RED.
Making sure that neither core is connected to the earth ter-
minal of the three pin plug.
CAUTION: TO PREVENT ELECTRIC SHOCK, MATCH
WIDE BLADE OF PLUG TO WIDE SLOT, FULLY INSERT.
ATTENTION: POUR ÉVITER LES CHOCS ÉLEC-
TRIQUES, INTRODUIRE LA LAME LA PLUS LARGE DE
LA FICHE DANS LA BORNE CORRESPONDANTE DE LA
PRISE ET POUSSER JUSQU’AU FOND.
SPECIAL MESSAGE SECTION
PRODUCT SAFETY MARKINGS: Yamaha electronic
products may have either labels similar to the graphics
shown below or molded/stamped facsimiles of these
graphics on the enclosure. The explanation of these
graphics appears on this page. Please observe all cautions
indicated on this page and those indicated in the safety
instruction section.
See bottom of Keyboard enclosure for graphic symbol markings
The exclamation point within the
equilateral triangle is intended to alert
the user to the presence of important
operating and maintenance (servic-
ing) instructions in the literature
accompanying the product.
The lightning flash with arrowhead
symbol, within the equilateral trian-
gle, is intended to alert the user to the
presence of uninsulated “dangerous
voltage” within the product’s enclo-
sure that may be of sufficient magni-
tude to constitute a risk of electrical
shock.
IMPORTANT NOTICE: All Yamaha electronic products
are tested and approved by an independent safety testing
laboratory in order that you may be sure that when it is
properly installed and used in its normal and customary
manner, all foreseeable risks have been eliminated. DO
NOT modify this unit or commission others to do so
unless specifically authorized by Yamaha. Product perfor-
mance and/or safety standards may be diminished.
Claims filed under the expressed warranty may be denied
if the unit is/has been modified. Implied warranties may
also be affected.
SPECIFICATIONS SUBJECT TO CHANGE: The
information contained in this manual is believed to be
correct at the time of printing. However, Yamaha reserves
the right to change or modify any of the specifications
without notice or obligation to update existing units.
ENVIRONMENTAL ISSUES: Yamaha strives to pro-
duce products that are both user safe and environmentally
friendly. We sincerely believe that our products and the
production methods used to produce them, meet these
goals. In keeping with both the letter and the spirit of the
law, we want you to be aware of the following:
Battery Notice: This product MAY contain a small non-
rechargable battery which (if applicable) is soldered in
place. The average life span of this type of battery is
approximately five years. When replacement becomes
necessary, contact a qualified service representative to
perform the replacement.
Warning: Do not attempt to recharge, disassemble, or
incinerate this type of battery. Keep all batteries away
from children. Dispose of used batteries promptly and as
regulated by applicable laws. Note: In some areas, the
servicer is required by law to return the defective parts.
However, you do have the option of having the servicer
dispose of these parts for you.
Disposal Notice: Should this product become damaged
beyond repair, or for some reason its useful life is consid-
ered to be at an end, please observe all local, state, and
federal regulations that relate to the disposal of products
that contain lead, batteries, plastics, etc.
NOTICE: Service charges incurred due to lack of knowl-
edge relating to how a function or effect works (when the
unit is operating as designed) are not covered by the man-
ufacturer’s warranty, and are therefore the owners respon-
sibility. Please study this manual carefully and consult
your dealer before requesting service.
NAME PLATE LOCATION: The graphic below indi-
cates the location of the name plate. The model number,
serial number, power requirements, etc., are located on
this plate. You should record the model number, serial
number, and the date of purchase in the spaces provided
below and retain this manual as a permanent record of
your purchase.
CAUTION
RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK
DO NOT OPEN
CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK.
DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK).
NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE.
REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.
CLP-970/970M/970C
Model
Serial No.
Purchase Date
92-469 1
For details of products, please contact your nearest Yamaha or the
authorized distributor listed below.
Pour plus de détails sur les produits, veuillez-vous adresser à Yamaha ou
au distributeur le plus proche de vous figurant dans la liste suivante.
Die Einzelheiten zu Produkten sind bei Ihrer unten aufgeführten
Niederlassung und bei Yamaha Vertragshändlern in den jeweiligen
Bestimmungsländern erhältlich.
Para detalles sobre productos, contacte su tienda Yamaha más cercana
o el distribuidor autorizado que se lista debajo.
CANADA
Yamaha Canada Music Ltd.
135 Milner Avenue, Scarborough, Ontario,
M1S 3R1, Canada
Tel: 416-298-1311
U.S.A.
Yamaha Corporation of America,
Keyboard Division
6600 Orangethorpe Ave., Buena Park, Calif. 90620,
U.S.A.
Tel: 714-522-9011
MEXICO
Yamaha de Mexico S.A. De C.V.,
Departamento de ventas
Javier Rojo Gomez No.1149, Col. Gpe Del
Moral, Deleg. Iztapalapa, 09300 Mexico, D.F.
Tel: 686-00-33
BRAZIL
Yamaha Musical do Brasil LTDA.
Av. Rebouças 2636, São Paulo, Brasil
Tel: 011-853-1377
ARGENTINA
Yamaha Music Argentina S.A.
Viamonte 1145 Piso2-B 1053,
Buenos Aires, Argentina
Tel: 1-4371-7021
PANAMA AND OTHER LATIN
AMERICAN COUNTRIES/
CARIBBEAN COUNTRIES
Yamaha de Panama S.A.
Torre Banco General, Piso 7, Urbanización Marbella,
Calle 47 y Aquilino de la Guardia,
Ciudad de Panamá, Panamá
Tel: 507-269-5311
THE UNITED KINGDOM
Yamaha-Kemble Music (U.K.) Ltd.
Sherbourne Drive, Tilbrook, Milton Keynes,
MK7 8BL, England
Tel: 01908-366700
IRELAND
Danfay Ltd.
61D, Sallynoggin Road, Dun Laoghaire, Co. Dublin
Tel: 01-2859177
GERMANY/SWITZERLAND
Yamaha Europa GmbH.
Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen,
F.R. of Germany
Tel: 04101-3030
AUSTRIA
Yamaha Music Austria
Schleiergasse 20, A-1100 Wien Austria
Tel: 01-60203900
THE NETHERLANDS
Yamaha Music Nederland
Kanaalweg 18G, 3526KL, Utrecht, The Netherlands
Tel: 030-2828411
BELGIUM
Yamaha Music Belgium
Keiberg Imperiastraat 8, 1930 Zaventem, Belgium
Tel: 02-7258220
FRANCE
Yamaha Musique France,
Division Claviers
BP 70-77312 Marne-la-Vallée Cedex 2, France
Tel: 01-64-61-4000
ITALY
Yamaha Musica Italia S.P.A.,
Home Keyboard Division
Viale Italia 88, 20020 Lainate (Milano), Italy
Tel: 02-935-771
SPAIN/PORTUGAL
Yamaha-Hazen Electronica Musical, S.A.
Ctra. de la Coruna km. 17, 200, 28230
Las Rozas (Madrid) Spain
Tel: 91-201-0700
GREECE
Philippe Nakas S.A.
Navarinou Street 13, P.Code 10680, Athens, Greece
Tel: 01-364-7111
SWEDEN
Yamaha Scandinavia AB
J. A. Wettergrens Gata 1
Box 30053
S-400 43 Göteborg, Sweden
Tel: 031 89 34 00
DENMARK
YS Copenhagen Liaison Office
Generatorvej 8B
DK-2730 Herlev, Denmark
Tel: 44 92 49 00
FINLAND
F-Musiikki Oy
Kluuvikatu 6, P.O. Box 260,
SF-00101 Helsinki, Finland
Tel: 09 618511
NORWAY
Norsk filial av Yamaha Scandinavia AB
Grini Næringspark 1
N-1345 Østerås, Norway
Tel: 67 16 77 70
ICELAND
Skifan HF
Skeifan 17 P.O. Box 8120
IS-128 Reykjavik, Iceland
Tel: 525 5000
OTHER EUROPEAN COUNTRIES
Yamaha Europa GmbH.
Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen,
F.R. of Germany
Tel: 04101-3030
Yamaha Corporation,
Asia-Pacific Music Marketing Group
Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650
Tel: 053-460-2312
TURKEY/CYPRUS
Yamaha Europa GmbH.
Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen,
F.R. of Germany
Tel: 04101-3030
OTHER COUNTRIES
Yamaha Music Gulf FZE
LB21-128 Jebel Ali Freezone
P.O.Box 17328, Dubai, U.A.E.
Tel: 971-4-881-5868
HONG KONG
Tom Lee Music Co., Ltd.
11/F., Silvercord Tower 1, 30 Canton Road,
Tsimshatsui, Kowloon, Hong Kong
Tel: 2737-7688
INDONESIA
PT. Yamaha Music Indonesia (Distributor)
PT. Nusantik
Gedung Yamaha Music Center, Jalan Jend. Gatot
Subroto Kav. 4, Jakarta 12930, Indonesia
Tel: 21-520-2577
KOREA
Cosmos Corporation
1461-9, Seocho Dong, Seocho Gu, Seoul, Korea
Tel: 02-3486-0011
MALAYSIA
Yamaha Music Malaysia, Sdn., Bhd.
Lot 8, Jalan Perbandaran, 47301 Kelana Jaya,
Petaling Jaya, Selangor, Malaysia
Tel: 3-703-0900
PHILIPPINES
Yupangco Music Corporation
339 Gil J. Puyat Avenue, P.O. Box 885 MCPO,
Makati, Metro Manila, Philippines
Tel: 819-7551
SINGAPORE
Yamaha Music Asia Pte., Ltd.
11 Ubi Road #06-00, Meiban Industrial Building,
Singapore
Tel: 65-747-4374
TAIWAN
Yamaha KHS Music Co., Ltd.
10F, 150, Tun-Hwa Northroad,
Taipei, Taiwan, R.O.C.
Tel: 02-2713-8999
THAILAND
Siam Music Yamaha Co., Ltd.
121/60-61 RS Tower 17th Floor,
Ratchadaphisek RD., Dindaeng,
Bangkok 10320, Thailand
Tel: 02-641-2951
THE PEOPLE’S REPUBLIC OF CHINA
AND OTHER ASIAN COUNTRIES
Yamaha Corporation,
Asia-Pacific Music Marketing Group
Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650
Tel: 053-460-2317
AUSTRALIA
Yamaha Music Australia Pty. Ltd.
Level 1, 99 Queensbridge Street, Southbank, Victoria
3006, Australia
Tel: 3-9693-5111
NEW ZEALAND
Music Houses of N.Z. Ltd.
146/148 Captain Springs Road, Te Papapa,
Auckland, New Zealand
Tel: 9-634-0099
COUNTRIES AND TRUST
TERRITORIES IN PACIFIC OCEAN
Yamaha Corporation,
Asia-Pacific Music Marketing Group
Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650
Tel: 053-460-2312
NORTH AMERICA
CENTRAL & SOUTH AMERICA
EUROPE
AFRICA
MIDDLE EAST
ASIA
OCEANIA
HEAD OFFICE Yamaha Corporation, Pro Audio & Digital Musical Instrument Division
Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650
Tel: 053-460-3273
[CL] 21
CLP-970
CLP-970C
Owner’s manual
CLP-970M
IMPORTANT
Check your power supply
Make sure that your local AC mains voltage
matches the voltage specified on the name
plate on the bottom panel. In some areas a
voltage selector may be provided on the the bottom
panel of the main keyboard unit near the power
cord. Make sure that the voltage selector is set
for the voltage in your area. The voltage
selector is set at 240V when the unit is initially
shipped. To change the setting use a “minus”
screwdriver to rotate the selector dial so that
the correct voltage appears next to the pointer
on the panel.
CLP-970/CLP-970M/CLP-970C
Owner’s manual
R
M.D.G., PA • DMI Division, Yamaha Corporation
© 2000 Yamaha Corporation
V?????? ???AP?????.?-??B0 Printed in Indonesia
Yamaha Manual Library (English versions only)
http://www2.yamaha.co.jp/manual/english/
Clavinova Web Site (English only)
http://www.yamaha.co.jp/english/product/cl/
Transcripción de documentos
IMPORTANT Check your power supply Make sure that your local AC mains voltage matches the voltage specified on the name plate on the bottom panel. In some areas a voltage selector may be provided on the bottom panel of the main keyboard unit near the power cord. Make sure that the voltage selector is set for the voltage in your area. The voltage selector is set at 240V when the unit is initially shipped. To change the setting use a “minus” screwdriver to rotate the selector dial so that the correct voltage appears next to the pointer on the panel. CLP-970 CLP-970M CLP-970C Owner’s manual SPECIAL MESSAGE SECTION PRODUCT SAFETY MARKINGS: Yamaha electronic products may have either labels similar to the graphics shown below or molded/stamped facsimiles of these graphics on the enclosure. The explanation of these graphics appears on this page. Please observe all cautions indicated on this page and those indicated in the safety instruction section. CAUTION RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT OPEN CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK. DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL. See bottom of Keyboard enclosure for graphic symbol markings The exclamation point within the equilateral triangle is intended to alert the user to the presence of important operating and maintenance (servicing) instructions in the literature accompanying the product. The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol, within the equilateral triangle, is intended to alert the user to the presence of uninsulated “dangerous voltage” within the product’s enclosure that may be of sufficient magnitude to constitute a risk of electrical shock. IMPORTANT NOTICE: All Yamaha electronic products are tested and approved by an independent safety testing laboratory in order that you may be sure that when it is properly installed and used in its normal and customary manner, all foreseeable risks have been eliminated. DO NOT modify this unit or commission others to do so unless specifically authorized by Yamaha. Product performance and/or safety standards may be diminished. Claims filed under the expressed warranty may be denied if the unit is/has been modified. Implied warranties may also be affected. SPECIFICATIONS SUBJECT TO CHANGE: The information contained in this manual is believed to be correct at the time of printing. However, Yamaha reserves the right to change or modify any of the specifications without notice or obligation to update existing units. ENVIRONMENTAL ISSUES: Yamaha strives to pro- duce products that are both user safe and environmentally friendly. We sincerely believe that our products and the production methods used to produce them, meet these goals. In keeping with both the letter and the spirit of the law, we want you to be aware of the following: 92-469 1 Battery Notice: This product MAY contain a small non- rechargable battery which (if applicable) is soldered in place. The average life span of this type of battery is approximately five years. When replacement becomes necessary, contact a qualified service representative to perform the replacement. Warning: Do not attempt to recharge, disassemble, or incinerate this type of battery. Keep all batteries away from children. Dispose of used batteries promptly and as regulated by applicable laws. Note: In some areas, the servicer is required by law to return the defective parts. However, you do have the option of having the servicer dispose of these parts for you. Disposal Notice: Should this product become damaged beyond repair, or for some reason its useful life is considered to be at an end, please observe all local, state, and federal regulations that relate to the disposal of products that contain lead, batteries, plastics, etc. NOTICE: Service charges incurred due to lack of knowl- edge relating to how a function or effect works (when the unit is operating as designed) are not covered by the manufacturer’s warranty, and are therefore the owners responsibility. Please study this manual carefully and consult your dealer before requesting service. NAME PLATE LOCATION: The graphic below indicates the location of the name plate. The model number, serial number, power requirements, etc., are located on this plate. You should record the model number, serial number, and the date of purchase in the spaces provided below and retain this manual as a permanent record of your purchase. CLP-970/970M/970C Model Serial No. Purchase Date PRECAUTIONS PLEASE READ CAREFULLY BEFORE PROCEEDING * Please keep these precautions in a safe place for future reference. WARNING Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of serious injury or even death from electrical shock, short-circuiting, damages, fire or other hazards. These precautions include, but are not limited to, the following: • Do not open the instrument or attempt to disassemble the internal parts or modify them in any way. The instrument contains no user-serviceable parts. If it should appear to be malfunctioning, discontinue use immediately and have it inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel. • Do not expose the instrument to rain, use it near water or in damp or wet conditions, or place containers on it containing liquids which might spill into any openings. • If the power cord or plug becomes frayed or damaged, or if there is a sudden loss of sound during use of the instrument, or if any unusual smells or smoke should appear to be caused by it, immediately turn off the power switch, disconnect the electric plug from the outlet, and have the instrument inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel. • Only use the voltage specified as correct for the instrument. The required voltage is printed on the name plate of the instrument. • Before cleaning the instrument, always remove the electric plug from the outlet. Never insert or remove an electric plug with wet hands. • Check the electric plug periodically and remove any dirt or dust which may have accumulated on it. (1) B-6 CLP-970 3 PRECAUTIONS CAUTION Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of physical injury to you or others, or damage to the instrument or other property. These precautions include, but are not limited to, the following: • Do not place the power cord near heat sources such as heaters or radiators, and do not excessively bend or otherwise damage the cord, place heavy objects on it, or place it in a position where anyone could walk on, trip over, or roll anything over it. • When removing the electric plug from the instrument or an outlet, always hold the plug itself and not the cord. Pulling by the cord can damage it. • Do not connect the instrument to an electrical outlet using a multiple-connector. Doing so can result in lower sound quality, or possibly cause overheating in the outlet. • Remove the electric plug from the outlet when the instrument is not to be used for extended periods of time, or during electrical storms. • Before connecting the instrument to other electronic components, turn off the power for all components. Before turning the power on or off for all components, set all volume levels to minimum. Also, be sure to set the volumes of all components at their minimum levels and gradually raise the volume controls while playing the instrument to set the desired listening level. • Do not expose the instrument to excessive dust or vibrations, or extreme cold or heat (such as in direct sunlight, near a heater, or in a car during the day) to prevent the possibility of panel disfiguration or damage to the internal components. • Do not use the instrument near other electrical products such as televisions, radios, or speakers, since this might cause interference which can affect proper operation of the other products. • Do not place the instrument in an unstable position where it might accidentally fall over. • Before moving the instrument, remove all connected cables. • When cleaning the instrument, use a soft, dry or slightly damp cloth. Do not use paint thinners, solvents, cleaning fluids, or chemical-impregnated wiping cloths. Also, do not place vinyl, plastic or rubber objects on the instrument, since this might discolor the panel or keyboard. • Do not rest your weight on, or place heavy objects on the instrument, and do not use excessive force on the buttons, switches or connectors. • Take care that the key cover does not pinch your fingers, and do not insert a finger or hand in the key cover gap. • Never insert or drop paper or metallic or other objects between the slits of the key cover and the keyboard. If this happens, immediately turn off the power and remove the electric plug from the outlet and have the instrument inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel. • Do not place the instrument against a wall (allow at least 3 cm/one-inch from the wall), since this can cause inadequate air circulation, and possibly result in the instrument overheating. • Read carefully the attached documentation explaining the assembly process. Failure to assemble the instrument in the proper sequence might result in damage to the instrument or even injury. • Do not operate the instrument for a long period of time at a high or uncomfortable volume level, since this can cause permanent hearing loss. If you experience any hearing loss or ringing in the ears, consult a physician. (1) B-6 4 CLP-970 CLP-970.E.book Page 5 Monday, December 11, 2000 5:01 PM PRECAUTIONS ■ USING THE BENCH (If included) • Do not play carelessly with or stand on the bench. Using it as a tool or step-ladder or for any other purpose might result in accident or injury. • Only one person should sit on the bench at a time, in order to prevent the possibility of accident or injury. • If the bench screws become loose due to extensive long-term use, tighten them periodically using the included tool. ■ SAVING USER DATA • Always save data to a floppy disk or an external device such as the Yamaha MIDI Data Filer MDF3 frequently, in order to help prevent the loss of important data due to a malfunction or user operating error. Yamaha cannot be held responsible for damage caused by improper use or modifications to the instrument, or data that is lost or destroyed. Always turn the power off when the instrument is not in use. (1) B-6 CLP-970 5 CLP-970.E.book Page 6 Monday, December 11, 2000 5:01 PM Thank you for choosing the Yamaha Clavinova CLP-970/970M/970C. In order to make the most of your Clavinova’s performance potential and features, please read this Owner’s Manual thoroughly, and keep it in a safe place for later reference. About this Owner’s Manual and Reference Booklet This manual consists of four main sections: “Introduction,” “Basic Operation,” “Detailed Settings,” and “Appendix.” Also, a separate “Reference Booklet” is provided. Introduction: Please read this section first. In the “Application Index” section on page 11 and “Features” on page 16, you can learn how to use the Clavinova and its functions in particular situations. Basic Operation: This main section explains how to use the basic functions. Refer to this section while you play the Clavinova. If you have questions or come across the words you do not know, refer to the section entitled “Questions about Operations and Functions” on page 97, or the “Index” on page 109. Detailed Settings: This section explains how to make detailed settings for the Clavinova’s various functions. Refer to this section as necessary. Appendix: This section introduces troubleshooting, a description of preset voices, and other reference material. Reference Booklet: XG Voice List, MIDI Data Format, etc. * The models CLP-970M and CLP-970C will be referred to as the CLP-970 in this Owner’s Manual. • The illustrations and LCD screens as shown in this Owner’s Manual are for instructional purposes only, and may appear somewhat different from those on your instrument. • Unauthorized copying of copyrighted software for purposes other than the purchaser’s personal use is prohibited. ■ Trademarks • Apple and Macintosh are trademarks of Apple Computer, Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries. • IBM-PC/AT is a trademark of International Business Machines Corporation. • Windows is the registered trademark of Microsoft® Corporation. All other trademarks are the property of their respective holders. “The Clavinova-Computer Connection” is a supplementary guidebook that describes, for beginners, what you can do with your Clavinova and a personal computer and how to set up a Clavinova-Computer system (the manual is not written for any specific models). The document is available as a PDF file (in English) at the following Internet address: Clavinova Web site: http://www.yamaha.co.jp/english/product/cl/ Yamaha Manual Library (Electronic Musical Instruments) http://www2.yamaha.co.jp/manual/english/ 6 CLP-970 Table of contents Introduction.......................................................... 2 PRECAUTIONS ........................................................................................................................................ 3 About this Owner’s Manual and Reference Booklet..................................................................................................... 6 Table of contents ................................................................................................................................... 7 Application Index Use this index to find reference pages that may be helpful for your application and situation. ................................. 11 Handling the Floppy Disk Drive(FDD) and Floppy Disk ...................................................................... 13 Maintenance ........................................................................................................................................ 14 Included Accessories ............................................................................................................................ 15 Features ................................................................................................................................................ 16 Before Using the Clavinova.................................................................................................................. 18 Key cover ....................................................................................................................................................................... 18 Music stand ................................................................................................................................................................... 18 Turning the power on................................................................................................................................................... 19 Adjusting the display contrast ...................................................................................................................................... 20 Setting the volume ........................................................................................................................................................ 20 Using headphones......................................................................................................................................................... 20 Basic Operation .................................................. 21 Part Names ........................................................................................................................................... 22 Listening to the Demonstration Tunes................................................................................................ 24 Listening to 50 Piano Preset Songs ..................................................................................................... 26 Playing the 50 piano preset songs ................................................................................................................................ 26 Practicing a one-hand part using 50 preset songs ....................................................................................................... 28 Selecting and Playing Voices ............................................................................................................... 30 Selecting Voices............................................................................................................................................................. 30 Using the pedals ............................................................................................................................................................ 31 Adding variation to the sound [BRILLIANCE]/[REVERB]/[CHORUS].................................................................. 32 Transposition ... [TRANSPOSE].................................................................................................................................. 34 Combining two voices (Dual mode)............................................................................................................................ 35 Splitting the keyboard range and playing two different voices (Split mode) ............................................................ 37 Using the metronome ................................................................................................................................................... 40 Recording Your Performance............................................................................................................... 41 Recording a New Song.................................................................................................................................................. 41 Recording to [TRACK 1]........................................................................................................................................ 41 Re-recording TRACK 1........................................................................................................................................... 43 Re-recording TRACK 1 partially............................................................................................................................ 44 Recording to [TRACK2]......................................................................................................................................... 45 Recording to the third or more tracks [EXTRA TRACKS] .................................................................................. 46 Other recording techniques.......................................................................................................................................... 46 Adding data to or recording over an existing song ............................................................................................... 46 CLP-970 7 Table of contents Changing a voice or tempo after recording ........................................................................................................... 47 Adjusting the volume balance between playback and your performance [SONG BALANCE] ......................... 48 Recording in Dual or Split mode ........................................................................................................................... 49 Saving Recorded Songs and Handling the Files...[FILE] ...................................................................... 50 Clavinova memory.................................................................................................................................................. 50 Basic file operation.................................................................................................................................................. 51 Saving recorded or other songs to Clavinova Storage memory...[SaveToMemory]................................................. 52 Saving recorded or other songs to floppy disk...[SaveToDisk] .................................................................................. 53 Deleting songs in Clavinova Storage memory or a floppy disk...[DeleteSong]......................................................... 53 Renaming a song...[RenameSong] ............................................................................................................................... 54 Copying data from one floppy disk to another...[CopyDisk] .................................................................................... 55 Formatting a floppy disk...[FormatDisk] .................................................................................................................... 56 Changing the type of characters on screen...[CharacterCode]................................................................................... 56 Playing Back Recorded Songs and Commercially-available Music Data............................................. 57 Playing back a song ....................................................................................................................................................... 57 Turning track playback on and off............................................................................................................................... 59 Supported song data type ............................................................................................................................................. 59 Connections ......................................................................................................................................... 61 Connectors .................................................................................................................................................................... 61 Connecting a personal computer ................................................................................................................................. 63 Detailed Settings ................................................ 69 Detailed Settings.................................................................................................................................. 70 Parameter List ............................................................................................................................................................... 70 Making detailed settings ............................................................................................................................................... 72 Detailed settings for recording and playback [SONG SETTING] ........................................................ 74 Correcting note timing [Quantize].............................................................................................................................. 74 Specifying whether playback starts immediately along with the first voicing [QuickPlay] ...................................... 75 Auditioning the channels [ChannelListen] ................................................................................................................. 75 Deleting data from each channel [ChannelClear]....................................................................................................... 75 Specifying the range and playing back repeatedly [FromToRepeat] ......................................................................... 75 Playing back the phrase specified by the phrase number [PhraseMark] ................................................................... 76 Playing back a song repeatedly [SongRepeat] ............................................................................................................. 76 Detailed settings for the metronome METRONOME [SETTING] ........................................................ 77 Setting the metronome time signature [TimeSignature]............................................................................................ 77 Setting the metronome volume level [MetronomeVolume]...................................................................................... 77 Selecting the metronome voice [MetronomeSound] ................................................................................................. 77 Detailed settings for the voices [VOICE SETTING] .............................................................................. 78 Setting the octave [Octave]*......................................................................................................................................... 78 Setting the volume level [Volume]*............................................................................................................................. 78 Setting the position of right and left channels [Pan]* ................................................................................................ 79 Fine tuning the pitch (only in Dual mode) [Detune] ................................................................................................. 79 Selecting the reverb type [ReverbType] ....................................................................................................................... 79 Setting the reverb depth [ReverbSend]* ...................................................................................................................... 79 8 CLP-970 Table of contents Selecting the chorus type [Chorus Type]..................................................................................................................... 80 Setting the chorus depth [ChorusSend]*..................................................................................................................... 80 Setting the chorus on/off [ChorusOnOff]................................................................................................................... 80 Selecting the variation effect type [VariationType] .................................................................................................... 80 Setting the variation effect depth [VariationSend]* ................................................................................................... 81 Setting the touch sensitivity [TouchSense]*................................................................................................................ 81 Setting the right pedal function [RPedal].................................................................................................................... 81 Setting the center pedal function [MPedal] ................................................................................................................ 82 Setting the left pedal function [LPedal] ....................................................................................................................... 82 Setting the auxiliary pedal function [AuxPedal] ......................................................................................................... 82 MIDI [MIDI SETTING]........................................................................................................................... 83 About MIDI................................................................................................................................................................... 83 Setting the MIDI transmit channel [MidiOutChannel] ............................................................................................. 84 Setting the MIDI receive channel (Port A) [MidiInAChannel] ................................................................................. 84 Setting the MIDI receive channel (Port B) [MidiInAChannel] ................................................................................. 85 Setting Local control on/off [LocalControl]................................................................................................................ 85 Selecting performance from the keyboard or song data for MIDI transmission [MidiOutSelect].......................... 85 Selecting a type of data received via MIDI [ReceiveParameter]................................................................................. 85 Selecting a type of data transmitted via MIDI [TransmitParameter] ........................................................................ 86 Executing song data bulk dump [SongBulkDump].................................................................................................... 86 Transmitting the initial settings on the panel [InitialSetup] ...................................................................................... 86 Executing voice data bulk dump [VoiceBulkDump].................................................................................................. 86 Other settings ...................................................................................................................................... 87 Selecting a touch response [TouchResponse] ............................................................................................................. 87 Fine tuning the pitch [Tune]........................................................................................................................................ 87 Selecting a tuning curve for a piano voice [PianoTuningCurve] ............................................................................... 87 Selecting a scale [Scale] ................................................................................................................................................. 88 Depth of string resonance [StringResonanceDepth] .................................................................................................. 88 Depth of sustain sampling for the damper pedal [SustainSamplingDepth].............................................................. 88 Setting the speed of vibraphone’s vibrato effect [VibraphoneRotorSpeed] .............................................................. 89 Selecting a pedal function for vibraphone [VibraphonePedalMode] ........................................................................ 89 Assigning the START/PAUSE function to a pedal [PedalStart/Pause]...................................................................... 89 Selecting a type of auxiliary pedal [AuxPedalType].................................................................................................... 89 Setting the point at which the damper pedal starts to affect the sound [HalfPedalPoint] ....................................... 90 Pitch bend range [PitchBendRange]............................................................................................................................ 90 Replacing the XG voices with preset voices [XGAlternative]..................................................................................... 90 Selecting items saved at shutdown [MemoryBackUp] ............................................................................................... 91 Restoring the normal (default) settings [FactorySet] ................................................................................................. 91 Other method for restoring the normal settings ......................................................................................................... 91 Message List ......................................................................................................................................... 92 Questions about Operations and Functions ........................................................................................ 97 CLP-970 9 Table of contents Appendix ............................................................ 99 Troubleshooting................................................................................................................................. 100 Data Compatibility ............................................................................................................................. 101 Preset Voice List ................................................................................................................................. 103 Voice Combination Examples (Dual and Split) ................................................................................. 105 CLP-970/970M/970C: Keyboard Stand Assembly ............................................................................. 106 Index................................................................................................................................................... 109 10 CLP-970 Application Index Use this index to find reference pages that may be helpful for your application and situation. Listening Listening to demo songs...............................................“Listening to the Demonstration Tunes” on page 24 “Playing the 50 piano preset songs” on page 26 Listening to demo songs with different voices ............“Listening to the Demonstration Tunes” on page 24 Listening to songs from “50 greats for the Clavinova” .......“Playing the 50 piano preset songs” on page 26 Listening to my recorded performance ............................................ “Recording to [TRACK 1]” on page 41 “Playing back a song” on page 57 Listening to songs in a floppy disk............................................................. “Playing back a song” on page 57 Playing Using three pedals.............................................................................................“Using the pedals” on page 31 Playing an accompaniment that matches pitch ................... “Transposition ... [TRANSPOSE]” on page 34 Changing tonal color Viewing the list of voices ................................................................................ “Preset Voice List” on page 103 Simulating a concert hall........................................................................................... “[REVERB]” on page 33 Combining two voices ..................................................... “Combining two voices (Dual mode)” on page 35 Playing different sounds with left and right hands ........................... “Splitting the keyboard range and playing two different voices (Split mode)” on page 37 Making a voice brighter and sharper, or softer and smoother ........................“[BRILLIANCE]” on page 32 Adding spread to the sound .................................................................................... “[CHORUS]” on page 33 Practicing Muting the right- or left-hand part ........... “Practicing a one-hand part using 50 preset songs” on page 28 Practicing with an accurate and steady tempo.......................................“Using the metronome” on page 40 Practicing using your recorded song .......................................... “Recording Your Performance” on page 41 “Turning track playback on and off ” on page 59 Recording Recording your performance ...................................................... “Recording Your Performance” on page 41 Saving recorded songs to floppy disks or memory ...........................................................“Saving Recorded Songs and Handling the Files...[FILE]” on page 50 CLP-970 11 Application Index Use this index to find reference pages that may be helpful for your application and situation. Settings Making detailed settings for recording and playback ............................................“Detailed settings for recording and playback [SONG SETTING]” on page 74 Making detailed settings for the metronome ......................................... “Detailed settings for the metronome METRONOME [SETTING]” on page 77 Making detailed settings for the voices ................................................................. “Detailed settings for the voices [VOICE SETTING]” on page 78 Making detailed settings for MIDI .................................................... “MIDI [MIDI SETTING]” on page 83 Making detailed settings for the Clavinova .........................................................“Other settings” on page 87 Connecting the Clavinova to other devices What is MIDI?..................................................................................... “MIDI [MIDI SETTING]” on page 83 Recording your performance ..................................................... “AUX OUT [R], [L/L+R] jacks” on page 61 Raising the volume ..................................................................... “AUX OUT [R], [L/L+R] jacks” on page 61 Outputting other instruments’ sound from the Clavinova .......... “AUX IN [R], [L/L+R] jacks” on page 62 Connecting a computer........................................................ “Connecting a personal computer” on page 63 Assembling Assembling and disassembling the Clavinova ................................................................... “CLP-970/970M/970C: Keyboard Stand Assembly” on page 106 Quick solution What the Clavinova offers............................................................................. “Application Index” on page 11 “Features” on page 16 Returning to the main screen..............................................................................“[EXIT] button” on page 23 Resetting the Clavinova to the default setting ................................................................“Restoring the normal (default) settings [FactorySet]” on page 91 Meaning of the messages........................................................................................ “Message List” on page 92 If you have questions about operations and functions .............................................................................. “Questions about Operations and Functions” on page 97 Troubleshooting............................................................................................. “Troubleshooting” on page 100 12 CLP-970 Handling the Floppy Disk Drive(FDD) and Floppy Disk Precautions Be sure to handle floppy disks and treat the disk drive with care. Follow the important precautions below. Compatible Disk Type 3.5" 2DD and 2HD type floppy disks can be used. Inserting/Ejecting Floppy Disks To insert a floppy disk into the disk drive: Hold the disk so that the label of the disk is facing upward and the sliding shutter is facing forward, towards the disk slot. Carefully insert the disk into the slot, slowly pushing it all the way in until it clicks into place and the eject button pops out. If the eject button is pressed too quickly, or if it is not pressed in as far as it will go, the disk may not eject properly. The eject button may become stuck in a half-pressed position with the disk extending from the drive slot by only a few millimeters. If this happens, do not attempt to pull out the partially ejected disk, since using force in this situation can damage the disk drive mechanism or the floppy disk. To remove a partially ejected disk, try pressing the eject button once again, or push the disk back into the slot and then repeat the eject procedure. Be sure to remove the floppy disk from the disk drive before turning off the power. A floppy disk left in the drive for extended periods can easily pick up dust and dirt that can cause data read and write errors. Cleaning the Disk Drive Read/Write Head To eject a floppy disk: Before ejecting the disk, be sure to confirm that the floppy disk drive is stopped. If the disk drive is operating (during the [SaveToDisk] (P53), [DeleteSong] (P53), [RenameSong] (P54), [CopyDisk] (P55), or [FormatDisk] (P56) operation), the Clavinova displays [Executing]. Never attempt to remove the disk or turn the power off when the disk drive is operating. Doing so can damage the disk and possibly the disk drive. Press the eject button slowly as far as it will go; the disk will automatically pop out. When the disk is fully ejected, carefully remove it by hand. • Clean the read/write head regularly. This instrument employs a precision magnetic read/write head which, after an extended period of use, will pick up a layer of magnetic particles from the disks used that will eventually cause read and write errors. • To maintain the disk drive in optimum working order Yamaha recommends that you use a commercially-available dry-type head cleaning disk to clean the head about once a month. Ask your Yamaha dealer about the availability of proper head-cleaning disks. • Never insert anything but floppy disks into the disk drive. Other objects may cause damage to the disk drive or floppy disks. Eject button CLP-970 13 Handling the Floppy Disk Drive(FDD) and Floppy Disk About the Floppy Disks • To protect your data (Write-protect Tab): • To handle floppy disks with care: • To prevent accidental erasure of important data, slide the disk’s write-protect tab to the “protect” position (tab open). • Do not place heavy objects on a disk or bend or apply pressure to the disk in any way. Always keep floppy disks in their protective cases when they are not in use. • Do not expose the disk to direct sunlight, extremely high or low temperatures, or excessive humidity, dust or liquids. • Do not open the sliding shutter and touch the exposed surface of the floppy disk inside. • Do not expose the disk to magnetic fields, such as those produced by televisions, speakers, motors, etc., since magnetic fields can partially or completely erase data on the disk, rendering it unreadable. • Never use a floppy disk with a deformed shutter or housing. • Do not attach anything other than the provided labels to a floppy disk. Also make sure that labels are attached in the proper location. write-protect tab open (protect position) • Data backup • For maximum data security Yamaha recommends that you keep two copies of important data on separate floppy disks. This gives you a backup if one disk is lost or damaged. To make a backup disk use the Copy Disk function on page 55. Maintenance Clean the instrument using a dry, soft cloth or slightly damp, soft cloth (wring well). Do not use benzine, thinner, detergent, or chemical cloth for cleaning. Do not place vinyl, plastic, or rubber products on the instrument. Otherwise, the panel or keys may be discolored or degraded. Before using the Clavinova, be sure to read “Precautions” on pages 3-5. Tuning Unlike an acoustic piano, the Clavinova does not need to be tuned. It always stays perfectly in tune. Transporting If you move to another location, you can transport the Clavinova along with other stuff. You can move the unit as it is (assembled) or you can disassemble the unit down to the condition when you first open the package. Transport the keyboard horizontally. Do not lean it to the wall and the like. 14 CLP-970 Included Accessories “50 greats for the Clavinova” Score Collection Owner’s Manual Recording disk Save your recorded performance to this disk. (page 53) Bench (included or optional depending on locale) Reference Booklet CLP-970 15 Features The Yamaha Clavinova CLP-970 digital piano offers unmatched sonic realism and natural grand-piano type playability as well as Yamaha’s original “AWM Dynamic Stereo Sampling” tone generation technology for rich, musical voices, and a special “Graded Hammer” keyboard that provides graded key weight and response throughout the keyboard range. The CLP-970 GrandPiano1 voice features totally new samples painstakingly recorded from a full concert grand piano. The CLP-970 GrandPiano1 voice features five velocity-switched samples (Dynamic Sampling), a “Soundboard Reverb” (page 33) effect that accurately simulates the resonance of a piano soundboard, “String Resonance” (page 88) that recreates resonance of piano strings, special “Sustain Sampling” (page 88)that samples the unique resonance of an acoustic grand piano’s soundboard and strings when the damper pedal is pressed, and “Keyoff Samples” that add the subtle sound produced when the keys are released. The CLP-970 comes much closer to the sound of a true acoustic piano. The music stand can be removed to allow placement of a laptop-type personal computer or other equipment on top of the instrument. (page 18) DEMO CLP-970 SONG SELECT TRACK 1 TRACK 2 EXTRA TRACKS FILE STOP START/ PAUSE REC SONG SETTING METRONOME START/STOP SETTING A B CONTRAST PIANO E. PIANO/ BASS HARPSICHORD PIANO/ E. PIANO HARPSI/ MALLET MALLET ORGAN ORGAN/ STRINGS BASS STRINGS/ CHOIR REVERB CHORUS MIDI SETTING BRILLIANCE OTHER SETTING MAIN MIN MAX TRANSPOSE NEW SONG SONG BALANCE NO DOWN YES SPLIT POINT UP EXIT SYNCHRO START MASTER VOLUME C VOICE SETTING LEFT D TEMPO SONG EFFECT VOICE POWER Connect the pedal cord here to use the Clavinova’s pedals. (page 63) PHONES Connect an optional pedal here and assign one of the various functions to the pedal. (page 62) MIDI THRU Mac PC-1 R L / L+R AUX OUT A set of standard stereo headphones can be plugged in here for private practice. (page 20) R L /L+R AUX IN 16 CLP-970 IN AUX PEDAL TO HOST These jacks allow you to connect an external tone generator to reproduce the sound via the Clavinova’s internal sound system and speakers. (page 62) Connect recording equipment (such as a cassette tape recorder) here to record your performance. (page 61) OUT MIDI PC-2 HOST SELECT PEDAL Connect a MIDI device here to use various MIDI functions. (page 63, 66) (About MIDI—page 83) This jack and selector switch allow direct connection to a personal computer for sequencing and other music applications. (page 62-67) Features The display allows accurate control and operation. (page 23) The Clavinova includes 50 preset songs. This section enables you to listen to these songs, practice using a convenient practice function, play back Clavinova music data (sold in music stores), and record and play back your performance. (page 26, 41, 57) MAIN voice gruop buttons Select voices from 25 internal sounds including Grand Piano 1. (page 30) You can also combine two voices at a time. (page 35) [FILE] Save recorded songs and manage song files. (page 50) [METRONOME] Use the metronome functions. (page 40) [DEMO] Demonstration playback is available for each voice. (page 24) DEMO CLP-970 SONG SELECT TRACK 1 TRACK 2 EXTRA TRACKS FILE STOP START/ PAUSE REC SONG SETTING [MIDI SETTING] Make detailed MIDI settings, such as MIDI receive/transmit channels. (page 83) METRONOME START/STOP SETTING [CONTRAST] Adjust the brightness of the display using this control. (page 20) B A [REVERB]/ [CHORUS] Add reverb (reverberation) and spread (chorus) to the sound. (page 33) CONTRAST PIANO E. PIANO/ BASS HARPSICHORD MALLET ORGAN PIANO/ E. PIANO HARPSI/ MALLET ORGAN/ STRINGS BASS STRINGS/ CHOIR REVERB CHORUS MIDI SETTING BRILLIANCE OTHER SETTING MAIN MIN MAX TRANSPOSE NEW SONG SONG BALANCE NO DOWN YES SPLIT POINT UP EXIT VOICE SETTING LEFT SYNCHRO START MASTER VOLUME [MASTER VOLUME] Adjust the volume level using this slider. (page 20) SONG TEMPO C [SONG SETTING] Make detailed settings for song recording and playback. (page 74) TRANSPOSE [ ] [ ] You can shift the pitch of the entire keyboard up or down so that the pitch will match that of another instrument or singer, while you play the same keys. (page 34) TEMPO [DOWN] [UP] You can change the song tempo (speed). (page 27, 40, 42, 58) D VOICE EFFECT [EXIT] The screen returns to its main display when you press this button. (page 23) [VOICE SETTING] You can make detailed settings for tone and effects. (page 78) LEFT voice group buttons/ [SPLIT POINT] You can play different voices on the left- and right-hand sections of the keyboard. (page 37) BRILLIANCE [ ][ ] Adjust the brightness of the tone using these buttons. (page 32) [OTHER SETTING] Fine-tune the touch response and pitch, etc. (page 87) CLP-970 17 Before Using the Clavinova Key cover To open the key cover: Lift the cover slightly, then push and slide it open. To close the key cover: Slide the cover toward you and gently lower the cover over the keys. Be careful to avoid catching your fingers when opening or closing the cover. CAUTION Hold the cover with both hands when opening or closing it. Do not release it until it is fully opened or closed. Be careful to avoid catching fingers (yours or others, especially children’s between the cover and the unit. Do not place objects such as a piece of metal or paper on top of the key cover. Small objects placed on the key cover may fall inside the unit when the cover is opened and may be nearly impossible to remove. This could cause electric shock, short circuit, fire or other serious damage to the instrument. Music stand To install the music stand: Hold the upper and bottom sides of the music stand with both hands and insert the peg on the speaker box into the holes on the rear of the stand. • The music stand can be removed to allow placement of a laptop personal computer or other equipment on top of the instrument. To remove the music stand: Lift the music stand slightly, then pull it toward you to remove it. 18 CLP-970 Before Using the Clavinova Turning the power on 1. Connect the power cable. First insert the plug of the power cable into the AC connector on the Clavinova, then plug the other end of the cable into the proper AC outlet on the wall. In some areas a plug adaptor may be provided to match the pin configuration of the AC wall outlets in your area. 1 The power connector is located on the bottom of the keyboard, set back deeply. 2 (The shape of plug differs depending on locale.) WARNING! Make sure your CLP-970 is rated for the AC voltage supplied in the area in which it is to be used (voltage rating appears on the name plate on the bottom panel). In some areas, a voltage selector may be provided on the bottom panel of the main keyboard unit near the power cord. Make sure that the voltage selector is set for the voltage in your area. Connecting the unit to the wrong AC supply can cause serious damage to the internal circuitry and may even pose a shock hazard! Use only the AC power cord supplied with the CLP-970. If the supplied cord is lost or damaged and needs to be replaced, contact your Yamaha dealer. The use of an inappropriate replacement can pose a fire and shock hazard! The type of AC power cord provided with the CLP-970 may be different depending on the country in which it is purchased. (In some areas a plug adaptor may be provided to match the pin configuration of the AC wall outlets in your area.) Do NOT modify the plug provided with the CLP-970. If the plug will not fit the outlet, have a proper outlet installed by a qualified electrician. 2. Turn on the power to the Clavinova. Press the [POWER] switch located on the right of the keyboard to turn the power on. • The screen located in the center of the front panel and the power indicator located below the left end of the keyboard lights up. TIP Power indicator If you close the key cover without turning the power off, the power indicator remains lit, indicating that the power is still on. [POWER] switch Power indicator A B NO C YES D When you turn on the power to the Clavinova, a voice name appears on the screen. Press the [POWER] switch again to turn off the power to the Clavinova. • The screen and the power indicator turn off. CLP-970 19 Before Using the Clavinova Adjusting the display contrast You can adjust the contrast of the display by turning the [CONTRAST] knob located to the right of the LCD. Use this knob. A CONTRAST B NO YES TERMINOLOGY CONTRAST: difference between brightness and darkness EXIT C D Setting the volume While playing the keyboard, adjust the volume level by moving the [MASTER VOLUME] slider on the left of the front panel to the left or right. MIN MAX Do not use the Clavinova at a high volume level for a long period of time, or your hearing may be damaged. MASTER VOLUME The level decreases. The level increases. TERMINOLOGY MASTER VOLUME: The volume level of the entire keyboard sound TIP You can also adjust the [PHONES] output level and the AUX IN input level using the [MASTER VOLUME] slider. Using headphones Connect a pair of headphones to one of the [PHONES] jacks. When the headphones are plugged into either of the [PHONES] jacks, the internal speaker system is automatically shut off. Two [PHONES] jacks are provided. Two sets of standard stereo headphones can be plugged in. (If you are using only one pair of headphones, you can plug them into either of these jacks.) PHONES bottom surface standard stereo phone plug 20 CLP-970 TIP Optional headphones HPE-160 Yamaha headphones. Basic Operation 21 CLP-970 CLP-970 21 Part Names D H F A B CONTRAST PIANO E. PIANO/ BASS HARPSICHORD MALLET ORGAN PIANO/ E. PIANO HARPSI/ MALLET ORGAN/ STRINGS BASS L M O REVERB CHORUS MIDI SETTING VOICE SETTING BRILLIANCE OTHER SETTING K N STRINGS/ CHOIR MAIN NO YES SPLIT POINT EXIT C LEFT D G E CLP-970 MIN 7 3 5 DEMO SONG SELECT MAX TRANSPOSE NEW SONG SONG BALANCE 4 6 VOICE I J EFFECT P B 8 TRACK 1 TRACK 2 EXTRA TRACKS FILE STOP START/ PAUSE REC SONG SETTING METRONOME START/STOP SETTING DOWN UP SYNCHRO START MASTER VOLUME 2 DEMO CLP-970 0 SONG 9 SONG SELECT TRACK 1 TRACK 2 EXTRA TRACKS FILE STOP START/ PAUSE REC SONG SETTING METRONOME START/STOP SETTING A A B TEMPO C CONTRAST PIANO E. PIANO/ BASS HARPSICHORD PIANO/ E. PIANO HARPSI/ MALLET MALLET ORGAN ORGAN/ STRINGS BASS STRINGS/ CHOIR REVERB CHORUS MIDI SETTING BRILLIANCE OTHER SETTING MAIN MIN MAX TRANSPOSE NEW SONG SONG BALANCE NO DOWN YES SPLIT POINT UP EXIT VOICE SETTING ] LEFT SYNCHRO START MASTER VOLUME SONG TEMPO C D VOICE EFFECT POWER 1 A-1 B-1 C0 D0 E0 F0 G0 A0 B0 C1 D1 E1 F1 G1 A1 B1 C2 D2 E2 F2 G2 A2 B2 C3 D3 E3 F3 G3 A3 B3 C4 D4 E4 F4 G4 A4 B4 C5 D5 E5 F5 G5 A5 B5 C6 D6 E6 F6 G6 A6 B6 C7 PHONES Center “C” Q R S T Top panel 1 [POWER]..............................................P19 2 [MASTER VOLUME].............................P20 3 [DEMO] ...............................................P24 4 TRANSPOSE [ ] [ ] ..........................P34 5 SONG SELECT [ ] [ ]..........P26, 41, 57 6 SONG BALANCE [ ] [ ]....................P48 7 [TRACK1] [TRACK2] / section .................................................P30 I [SPLIT POINT] .....................................P38 J Voice group buttons for the LEFT [EXTRA TRACKS] ............... P28, 41–46, 59 section .................................................P37 8 [FILE] ...................................................P50 9 SONG [STOP] / K [VOICE SETTING] ................................P78 L [REVERB]..............................................P33 M [CHORUS] ............................................P33 N BRILLIANCE [ ] [ ] ...........................P32 O [MIDI SETTING]...................................P83 P [OTHER SETTING] ...............................P87 Q [PHONES] ............................................P20 R Soft pedal ............................................P31 S Sostenuto pedal ..................................P31 T Damper pedal .....................................P31 [START/PAUSE] .......................P26, 42, 58 0 [REC]....................................................P42 A [SONG SETTING] ................................P74 B METRONOME [START/STOP] / [SETTING]......................................P40, 77 C TEMPO [DOWN] [UP] .......P27, 40, 42, 58 D LCD buttons A [–] [+] / B [– (NO)] [+ (YES)] / C [–] [+] / D [–] [+]...............................P23 22 E LCD screen ..........................................P23 F [CONTRAST] knob...............................P20 G [EXIT]...................................................P23 H Voice group buttons for the MAIN CLP-970 Part Names Connectors U AUX OUT [R] [L/L+R]..........................P61 V AUX IN [R] [L/L+R] .............................P62 W [AUX PEDAL] ......................................P62 X [TO HOST] ..........................................P62 Y HOST SELECT ..................................... P62 Z MIDI [IN] [OUT] [THRU] .................... P63 [ [PEDAL] .............................................. P63 MIDI THRU Mac PC-1 R L / L+R AUX OUT U R L / L+R OUT IN MIDI PC-2 AUX PEDAL AUX IN W TO HOST HOST SELECT X Y V PEDAL Z [ \ Floppy disk drive................................. P13 ] Panel logos GM System Level 1 “GM System Level 1” is an addition to the MIDI standard which guarantees that any data conforming to the standard will play accurately on any GM-compatible tone generator or synthesizer from any manufacturer. bottom surface \ XG Format XG is a new Yamaha MIDI specification which significantly expands and improves on the “GM System Level 1” standard with greater voice handling capacity, expressive control, and effect capability while retaining full compatibility with GM. D LCD buttons E LCD Use the LCD button A, B, C, or D to select the contents displayed on the LCD. Check the screen located in the center of the top panel after every operation. A voice name appears on the screen when you turn on the power to the unit. A B NO C YES D G[EXIT] button When you press this button, the unit returns to the default screen (the screen that indicates a voice name(s) and is displayed when the power is turned on). CLP-970 23 Listening to the Demonstration Tunes The Clavinova provides demonstration tunes that effectively demonstrate each of the MAIN voice groups. Refer to the table below for voice names and corresponding demo songs. Demonstration tunes Voice group Tunes PIANO E.PIANO/BASS HARPSICHORD MALLET ORGAN STRINGS/CHOIR Composer Chanson de l’adieu Original Le Coucou Original Organ Concerto Op.4 No.2 Original F.F. Chopin – L.C. Daguin – G.F. Händel – 23 14 DEMO CLP-970 SONG SELECT TRACK 1 TRACK 2 EXTRA TRACKS FILE METRONOME START/ STOP SETTING A B PIANO CONTRAST E. PIANO/ BASS HARPSICHORD PIANO/ E. PIANO HARPSI/ MALLET MALLET ORGAN ORGAN/ STRINGS BASS MAIN voice group buttons STRINGS/ CHOIR REVERB CHORUS MIDI SETTING BRILLIANCE OTHER SETTING MAIN NO NEW SONG MIN TRANSPOSE MAX SONG BALANCE STOP START/ PAUSE REC SONG SETTING DOWN YES SPLIT POINT UP EXIT SYNCHRO START MASTER VOLUME SONG TEMPO C 3 VOICE SETTING LEFT D VOICE EFFECT 4 Procedure 1. Engage the demo mode. Press the [DEMO] button to engage the demo mode. The MAIN voice group (upper row) button indicators light up in sequence. A B NO C 2. YES D Select a tune and start playback. Press the voice group button (upper row) of the desired demonstration tune. The corresponding voice button indicator lights up and playback starts. Until you stop playback, the selected tune will be played repeatedly using different voices (in the following order: PIANO → E. PIANO/BASS → HARPSICHORD → MALLET → ORGAN → STRINGS/CHOIR). 24 CLP-970 TERMINOLOGY Mode: A mode is a status under which you can execute a certain function. In demo mode, you can play back demonstration tunes. NOTE To adjust the volume level of the demo songs, use the [MASTER VOLUME] slider. Listening to the Demonstration Tunes 3. 4. Stop the playback. Press the button of the voice group being played or the [STOP] button. Exit from demo mode. Press the [DEMO] or [EXIT] button to exit from demo mode. CLP-970 25 Listening to 50 Piano Preset Songs The Clavinova provides performance data of 50 piano songs. You can just listen to these songs (page 26) or use them for practice (page 28). You can also refer to the included “50 greats for the Clavinova” that contains the scores for 50 piano preset songs. Playing the 50 piano preset songs 1 DEMO CLP-970 METRONOME [START/STOP] SONG SELECT TRACK 1 TRACK 2 EXTRA TRACKS FILE METRONOME START/ STOP SETTING A B PIANO CONTRAST E. PIANO/ BASS HARPSICHORD PIANO/ E. PIANO HARPSI/ MALLET MALLET ORGAN ORGAN/ STRINGS BASS STRINGS/ CHOIR REVERB CHORUS MIDI SETTING BRILLIANCE OTHER SETTING MAIN NO NEW SONG MIN TRANSPOSE MAX SONG BALANCE STOP START/ PAUSE REC SONG SETTING DOWN YES SPLIT POINT UP EXIT SYNCHRO START MASTER VOLUME SONG 3 2 TEMPO C D VOICE SETTING LEFT VOICE EFFECT 4 TEMPO [DOWN] [UP] Procedure 1. Select a song. Press one of the [SONG SELECT] buttons repeatedly to select the desired piano song from P-001 to P-050. Song select screen A B NO C TERMINOLOGY Song: On the Clavinova, performance data is called a “Song.” This includes demonstration tunes and piano preset tunes. YES D The song number appears on the display. 2. Play a preset song. Press the [START/PAUSE] button to start playback. the number of measures A B NO C YES D TIP • You can also use the C [–]/[+] buttons to select a song after pressing the [SONG SELECT] button. • [P-000: NewSong] is a blank song provided for you to record your performance. (See page 41.) • Use the SongRepeat parameter in the “SONG SETTING” menu to select repeat playback of all songs or repeat playback of a single song. (See page 76.) TIP You can play the keyboard along with the preset song playback. You can change the voice playing on the keyboard. 26 CLP-970 CLP-970.E.book Page 27 Monday, December 11, 2000 5:01 PM Listening to 50 Piano Preset Songs Adjusting the tempo You can use the TEMPO [DOWN]/[UP] buttons to adjust the playback tempo as required. The default tempo (the song’s original tempo) is set when you press the [DOWN] and [UP] buttons simultaneously. Press either of the SONG SELECT [ ]/[ ] buttons to return to the song select screen. A B NO C 3. YES TIP You can also use the D[–]/[+] buttons to change the tempo. NOTE Resetting the tempo Whenever you select a new preset song, the tempo is automatically reset to the song’s original value. D Stop the song playback. When playback is complete, it automatically stops and the Clavinova locates the top of the song. To stop playback in the middle of a song, press the [STOP] button. You can also pause playback by pressing the [START/PAUSE] button. Playback stops when you press the button. Fast forward and rewind You can perform the following operations in the song select screen: • Use the B [–]/[+] buttons to move back and forth (rewind and fast forward) through the song while the song is played or stopped. • Press the SONG SELECT [ ] or the C [–] button during playback to restart playback from the top of the song. • Press the SONG SELECT [ ] or the C [+] button during playback to start playback from the next song. • Press the SONG SELECT [ ] or the C [–] button while playback is stopped in the middle of the song to locate the top of the song. 4. Return to the default screen. Press the [EXIT] button. TERMINOLOGY Default screen: The default screen is a voice select screen (page 30) that appears when you turn on the power to the Clavinova. CLP-970 27 Listening to 50 Piano Preset Songs Practicing a one-hand part using 50 preset songs The 50 preset songs have separate left- and right-hand parts on individual tracks. You can turn the left- and right-hand parts on or off as required so you can practice the corresponding part (the part that is turned off) on the keyboard. The right-hand part is played by [TRACK 1] and the left-hand part is played by [TRACK 2]. 1 DEMO CLP-970 SONG SELECT TRACK 1 TRACK 2 EXTRA TRACKS FILE STOP START/ PAUSE REC SONG SETTING METRONOME START/ STOP SETTING A B PIANO CONTRAST E. PIANO/ BASS HARPSICHORD MALLET ORGAN PIANO/ E. PIANO HARPSI/ MALLET ORGAN/ STRINGS BASS STRINGS/ CHOIR REVERB CHORUS MIDI SETTING BRILLIANCE OTHER SETTING MAIN NO NEW SONG MIN MAX TRANSPOSE SONG BALANCE DOWN YES SPLIT POINT UP EXIT SYNCHRO START MASTER VOLUME SONG TEMPO C VOICE SETTING LEFT D VOICE EFFECT 3 2 procedure 1. Turn off the playback part you wish to practice. After you select a song to practice, press the [TRACK1] or [TRACK2] button to turn off the corresponding part. TIP You can turn parts on or off, even during playback. When you first select a song, both [TRACK1] and [TRACK2] indicators light up, indicating that you can play back both parts. When you press one of the buttons to turn off playback, the corresponding button indicator turns off and the corresponding part playback is muted. Pressing the buttons repeatedly toggles between playback on and off. 2. Start playback and playing. Press the [START/PAUSE] button to start playback. Play the part you just turned off. Starting playback automatically as you start playing the keyboard (Synchro Start) You can start playback as soon as you start playing the keyboard. This is called the “Synchro Start” function. To enter Synchro Start standby mode, press and hold down the [STOP] button and press the [START/PAUSE] button. The [START/ PAUSE] indicator flashes. Now play the keyboard. Playback starts simultaneously. To cancel the Synchro Start function, press the [STOP] button while the Clavinova is in Synchro Start standby mode. 28 CLP-970 TERMINOLOGY Synchro: Synchronous;occurring at the same time Listening to 50 Piano Preset Songs 3. Stop playback. When playback is complete, it automatically stops and the Clavinova locates the top of the song. If you wish to stop playback in the middle of a song, press the [STOP] button. You can also pause playback by pressing the [START/PAUSE] button. Playback stops when you press the button. TIP Resetting the part playback Both parts are automatically turned ON whenever you select a new song. You can also assign a phrase in a song to repeatedly practice that part. Refer to the [FromToRepeat] option in the “SONG SETTING” menu on page 75. CLP-970 29 Selecting and Playing Voices Selecting Voices 1 2 DEMO CLP-970 SONG SELECT TRACK 1 TRACK 2 EXTRA TRACKS FILE STOP START/ PAUSE REC SONG SETTING METRONOME START/ STOP SETTING A B PIANO CONTRAST MAIN voice group buttons E. PIANO/ BASS HARPSICHORD MALLET ORGAN PIANO/ E. PIANO HARPSI/ MALLET ORGAN/ STRINGS BASS STRINGS/ CHOIR REVERB CHORUS MIDI SETTING BRILLIANCE OTHER SETTING MAIN NO NEW SONG MIN MAX TRANSPOSE SONG BALANCE DOWN YES SPLIT POINT UP EXIT SYNCHRO START MASTER VOLUME SONG TEMPO C D VOICE SETTING LEFT VOICE EFFECT Procedure 1. 2. Select a voice group. Press one of the MAIN voice group buttons (upper row). TIP To learn characteristics of the voices, listen to demo songs for each voice group (page 24). Refer to “Preset Voice List” on page 103 for more information on characteristics of each preset voice. Select a voice. Use the A [–]/[+] buttons to select a voice. TERMINOLOGY Voice On the Clavinova, a voice means “tone” or “tonal color.” Voice group PIANO E.PIANO/ BASS HARPSICHORD 30 CLP-970 Voice name GrandPiano1 GrandPiano2 E.Piano1 E.Piano2 SynthPiano WoodBass ElectricBass Bass&Cymbal Harpsichord8' Harpsichord8'+4' ElectricClavichord Voice group MALLET ORGAN STRINGS/ CHOIR Voice name Vibraphone Marimba Celesta PipeOrganPrincipal PipeOrganFlute1 PipeOrganFlute2 PipeOrganTutti JazzOrgan Strings SynthStrings SlowStrings Choir SlowChoir Scat TIP You can control the loudness of a voice by how hard you play the keyboard, although different playing styles (touch sensitivities) have little or no effect with the sound of certain musical instruments. Refer to “Preset Voice List” on page 103. Selecting and Playing Voices Using the pedals The Clavinova has three foot pedals: damper pedal (right), sostenuto pedal (center), and soft pedal (left) that produce a range of expressive effects similar to those produced by the pedals on an acoustic piano. Damper (right) pedal When you press the damper pedal, the notes you play have a longer sustain. When you select Grand Piano 1, pressing the damper pedal activates the instrument’s special “Sustain Samples” to accurately recreate the unique resonance of an acoustic grand piano’s soundboard and strings. h q q. q. . When you press the damper pedal here, the notes you play before you release the pedal have a longer sustain. Sostenuto (center) pedal If you play a note or chord on the keyboard and press the sostenuto pedal while holding the note(s), the notes will sustain as long as the pedal is held. All subsequent notes will not sustain. h q q. q. . TIP If the damper pedal doesn’t work, or notes are sustained even when the pedal is not pressed, make sure that the pedal cord is properly plugged into the PEDAL jack on the unit (see step 5 on page 107). Also, make sure that the RPedal parameter in the “VOICE SETTING” menu is set to ON (see page 81). TIP You can adjust the depth of the resonance produced by the “Sustain Samples” using the Sustain Sampling Depth parameter in the “OTHER SETTING” menu. (See page 88.) When you press the sostenuto pedal here while holding the note(s), the notes will sustain as long as you hold the pedal. Soft pedal (left) The soft pedal reduces the volume and slightly changes the timbre of notes played while the pedal is pressed. (The soft pedal will not affect notes that are already playing when it is pressed. Press the pedal immediately before you play the target notes.) With the Vibraphone and Jazz Organ voices, this pedal turns vibrato on and off or toggles the speed of vibrato. (See page 82.) TIP You can assign a function to each pedal via the “R Pedal”, “M Pedal”, and “L Pedal” parameters in the “VOICE SETTING” menu. (See page 81, 82.) TIP The center and left pedals can also be assigned to song start/stop operation (START/PAUSE function) via the “PedalStart/Pause” parameter in the “OTHER SETTING” menu (on page 89). CLP-970 31 Selecting and Playing Voices Adding variation to the sound [BRILLIANCE]/[REVERB]/[CHORUS] The Effect function enables you to add expression to the sound. The Clavinova effects include Brilliance, Reverb, and Chorus. [REVERB] [CHORUS] DEMO CLP-970 SONG SELECT TRACK 1 TRACK 2 EXTRA TRACKS FILE METRONOME START/ STOP SETTING A B PIANO CONTRAST E. PIANO/ BASS HARPSICHORD PIANO/ E. PIANO HARPSI/ MALLET MALLET ORGAN ORGAN/ STRINGS BASS STRINGS/ CHOIR REVERB CHORUS MIDI SETTING BRILLIANCE OTHER SETTING MAIN NO NEW SONG MIN TRANSPOSE MAX SONG BALANCE STOP START/ PAUSE REC SONG SETTING DOWN YES SPLIT POINT UP EXIT SYNCHRO START MASTER VOLUME SONG TEMPO C VOICE SETTING LEFT D VOICE EFFECT BRILLIANCE [ ] [ ] [BRILLIANCE] You can use this control to adjust the brilliance of the tone and change the tonality to suit your preference. Procedure Press one of the BRILLIANCE [ ]/ [ ] buttons to select the desired tonality. A B NO C YES D Dark.................... Dark tone Mellow ................ Soft and mellow tone Normal ............... Standard tone Bright ................. Bright tone Metallic............... Sharp metallic tone Press the [EXIT] button to return to the main screen. TIP You can also use the D [–]/ [+] buttons after you press one of the [BRILLIANCE] buttons to select the desired option. TIP Normal setting = Normal TERMINOLOGY Normal setting: The “Normal setting” refers to the default setting (factory setting) obtained when you first turn on the power to the Clavinova. NOTE If you select [Bright] or [Metallic] as the type of brilliance, the volume level will increase slightly. Under this condition, if you raise the [MASTER VOLUME] slider setting, the sound may become distorted. In this case, lower the volume accordingly. 32 CLP-970 Selecting and Playing Voices [REVERB] This control adds reverberation to the sound by simulating the natural reverberation of a concert hall. Procedure Pressing the [REVERB] button repeatedly toggles the reverb on and off. Even if the reverb effect is turned off, a “soundboard reverb” effect will be applied when the GrandPiano1 or GrandPiano2 voice is selected. TIP You can select a reverb type via the Reverb Type parameter in the “VOICE SETTING” menu, and adjust the reverb depth for the selected voice via the Reverb Send parameter. (See page 79.) TIP Normal setting = ON [CHORUS] This control adds spread and spaciousness to the sound. Procedure Pressing the [CHORUS] button repeatedly toggles the chorus on and off. You can turn the chorus effect on and off by pressing the [CHORUS] ON/OFF buttons on the panel and by setting the Chorus On Off parameter in the VOICE SETTING menu (see page 80). The [CHORUS] ON/OFF button setting on the panel is temporary. That is, if you select another voice, the chorus setting for the previous voice is cancelled. The Chorus On Off parameter setting is saved for each voice. That is, if you select a given voice, the chorus setting is automatically turned on or off according to the saved chorus setting. TIP You can select a chorus type via the Chorus Type parameter in the “VOICE SETTING” menu, and adjust the chorus depth for the selected voice via the Reverb Send parameter. You can also turn chorus on or off via the Chorus On Off parameter. (See page 80.) TIP Normal Setting The normal chorus on/off setting is different for each voice. CLP-970 33 Selecting and Playing Voices Transposition ... [TRANSPOSE] The Clavinova’s Transpose function makes it possible to shift the pitch of the entire keyboard up or down in semitone intervals to facilitate playing in difficult key signatures, and to let you easily match the pitch of the keyboard to the range of a singer or other instruments. For example, if you set the transposition amount to “5,” playing key C produces pitch F. In this way, you can play the song as if it were in C major, and the Clavinova will transpose it to the key of F. You can also change the key signature of playback songs, in addition to your own performance. DEMO CLP-970 SONG SELECT TRACK 1 TRACK 2 EXTRA TRACKS FILE METRONOME START/ STOP SETTING A B PIANO CONTRAST E. PIANO/ BASS HARPSICHORD MALLET ORGAN PIANO/ E. PIANO HARPSI/ MALLET ORGAN/ STRINGS BASS STRINGS/ CHOIR REVERB CHORUS MIDI SETTING BRILLIANCE OTHER SETTING MAIN NO NEW SONG MIN TRANSPOSE MAX SONG BALANCE STOP START/ PAUSE REC SONG SETTING DOWN YES SPLIT POINT UP EXIT SYNCHRO START MASTER VOLUME SONG TEMPO 13 C D 2 VOICE SETTING LEFT VOICE EFFECT 34 Procedure 1. Display the Transpose screen. Press one of the TRANSPOSE [ ] and [ ] buttons. A B NO C 2. YES TERMINOLOGY Transpose: Changing the key signature of a song. On the Clavinova, transposing shifts the pitch of the entire keyboard. D Select a type of transposition from Manual or Song. Use the C [–] and [+] buttons to select Manual or Song. Manual ............... Your manual performance Song .................... Playback song 3. Set the transposition amount. Use the D [–] and [+] or TRANSPOSE [ ] and [ ] buttons to set the transposition amount. To set the amount of transposition to “0,” press the D [–] and [+] buttons or the TRANSPOSE [ ] and [ ] buttons simultaneously. 4. 34 CLP-970 Return to the main screen. Press the [EXIT] button. TIP The transposition range is from “–12 semitones” (down one octave) through “0” (normal pitch) to “12 semitones” (up one octave). Selecting and Playing Voices Combining two voices (Dual mode) You can play two voices simultaneously across the entire range of the keyboard. In this way, you can simulate a melody duet or combine two similar voices to create a thicker sound. Refer to “Voice Combination Examples (Dual and Split)” on page 105 for examples of effective voice combinations. The numbers on the upper row indicate the steps in Dual mode using voices from different groups. DEMO CLP-970 SONG SELECT TRACK 1 TRACK 2 EXTRA TRACKS FILE STOP START/ PAUSE REC SONG SETTING 2 METRONOME START/ STOP SETTING MAIN voice 2 A B 1 3 group buttons PIANO CONTRAST E. PIANO/ BASS HARPSICHORD MALLET ORGAN PIANO/ E. PIANO HARPSI/ MALLET ORGAN/ STRINGS BASS STRINGS/ CHOIR REVERB CHORUS MIDI SETTING BRILLIANCE OTHER SETTING MAIN NO NEW SONG MIN TRANSPOSE MAX SONG BALANCE DOWN YES SPLIT POINT UP EXIT SYNCHRO START MASTER VOLUME SONG TEMPO The numbers on the bottom row indicate the steps in Dual mode using voices from the same group. C LEFT D 2 VOICE SETTING 3 VOICE 14 EFFECT MAIN voice group buttons Dual mode using voices in different voice groups Procedure 1. Enter Dual mode. Press two MAIN voice group buttons (upper row) simultaneously. A B NO C D 1st voice 2. YES 2nd voice Select a voice. Use the A [–]/[+] buttons and B [–]/[+] buttons to select a voice. The voices listed in the upper row in “Preset Voice List” on page 103 are called 1st voices, and those listed in the bottom row are called 2nd voices. 3. Exit Dual mode and return to normal play mode. Press any MAIN voice group button. CLP-970 35 Selecting and Playing Voices Dual mode using voices in the same voice group Procedure 1. 2. 3. Select a voice group. In normal play mode, press the desired MAIN voice group button. Select a voice. Use the A [–]/[+] buttons to select a voice. Select another voice. Use the B [–]/[+] buttons to select another voice in the same voice group. To use the identical voices, press the B [–]/[+] buttons once. To use different voices within the same voice group, press the B [–]/[+] buttons repeatedly. A B NO C 4. 36 CLP-970 YES D Exit Dual mode and return to normal play mode. Press any MAIN voice group button. Selecting and Playing Voices Splitting the keyboard range and playing two different voices (Split mode) Split mode enables you to play two different voices on the keyboard — one with the left hand and another with the right hand. For example, you can play a bass part using the Wood Bass or Electric Bass voice with the left hand, and a melody with the right hand. Refer to “Voice Combination Examples (Dual and Split)” on page 105 for examples of effective voice combinations. 2 DEMO CLP-970 SONG SELECT TRACK 1 TRACK 2 EXTRA TRACKS FILE METRONOME START/ STOP SETTING 2 A B PIANO CONTRAST MAIN voice group buttons E. PIANO/ BASS HARPSICHORD MALLET ORGAN PIANO/ E. PIANO HARPSI/ MALLET ORGAN/ STRINGS BASS STRINGS/ CHOIR REVERB CHORUS MIDI SETTING BRILLIANCE OTHER SETTING MAIN NO NEW SONG MIN TRANSPOSE MAX SONG BALANCE STOP START/ PAUSE REC SONG SETTING DOWN YES SPLIT POINT UP EXIT SYNCHRO START MASTER VOLUME SONG TEMPO C D 3 VOICE SETTING LEFT 4 VOICE 4 135 EFFECT LEFT voice group buttons Procedure 1. Enter Split mode. Press one of the LEFT voice group buttons (bottom row). A B NO C 2. 3. YES D Select a voice for the right hand. Use the MAIN voice group buttons (upper row) and the A [–]/[+] buttons. Select a voice for the left hand. Use the LEFT voice group buttons (bottom row) and the C [–]/[+] buttons. CLP-970 37 Selecting and Playing Voices Voice group MAIN PIANO LEFT PIANO/E.PIANO E.PIANO/BASS BASS HARPSICHORD HARPSICHORD/MALLET MALLET ORGAN ORGAN/STRINGS STRINGS/CHOIR 4. F2 CLP-970 GrandPiano1 GrandPiano2 E.Piano1 E.Piano2 SynthPiano WoodBass ElectricBass Bass&Cymbal Harpsichord8' Harpsichord8'+4' EcelctricClavichord Vibraphone Marimba Celesta PipeOrganPrincipal PipeOrganFlute1 PipeOrganFlute2 PipeOrganTutti JazzOrgan Strings SynthStrings SlowStrings Choir SlowChoir Scat Specify the split point (the border between the rightand left-hand range). I The normal setting of the split point is “F 2.” 38 Voice name Center “C” TIP A specified “split point” key is included in the left-hand range. Selecting and Playing Voices To change the split point setting: Press the [SPLIT POINT] button, then use the D [–]/[+] buttons to specify the split point. (Optional) Press and hold down the [SPLIT POINT] button and play the key you wish to assign as the split point. A B NO C YES D Press the [EXIT] button to return to the main screen. 5. Exit Split mode and return to normal play mode. Press the voice group button that you pressed for the lefthand range. In Split mode, you can use Dual mode (see page 35) for the MAIN and LEFT ranges respectively. A B NO C YES D CLP-970 39 Selecting and Playing Voices Using the metronome The Clavinova is built-in metronome (a device that keeps an accurate tempo) is a convenient feature for practice. 12 DEMO CLP-970 SONG SELECT TRACK 1 TRACK 2 EXTRA TRACKS FILE METRONOME START/ STOP SETTING A B PIANO CONTRAST E. PIANO/ BASS HARPSICHORD PIANO/ E. PIANO HARPSI/ MALLET MALLET ORGAN ORGAN/ STRINGS BASS STRINGS/ CHOIR REVERB CHORUS MIDI SETTING BRILLIANCE OTHER SETTING MAIN NO NEW SONG MIN MAX TRANSPOSE SONG BALANCE STOP START/ PAUSE REC SONG SETTING DOWN YES SPLIT POINT UP EXIT SYNCHRO START MASTER VOLUME SONG TEMPO C VOICE SETTING LEFT D VOICE EFFECT TEMPO [DOWN] [UP] Procedure 1. Start the metronome. Press the METRONOME [START/STOP] button. When the metronome is sounding, the beat indicator flashes at the current tempo. Adjusting the tempo TIP The default tempo is 120. (If a song has been selected, the song tempo is used.) Press the TEMPO [DOWN] or [UP] button. A B NO C YES D To adjust the tempo (number of beats per minute: 10–400), use the TEMPO [DOWN]/[UP] or the D [–]/[+] buttons. To reset the tempo to the normal (default) setting, press the [DOWN] and [UP] keys or the D [–] and [+] keys simultaneously. Press the [EXIT] button to return to the normal screen. 2. 40 CLP-970 Stop the metronome. Press the METRONOME [START/STOP] button. TIP You can set the time signature, metronome volume, and metronome tone using the METRONOME [SETTING] button. (See page 77.) Recording Your Performance TIP You can record your performance (audio data) to a cassette tape recorder or other recording devices via the AUX OUT connector. (see page 61.) This chapter explains how to record your performance using the Clavinova recording function. You can, for example, play back what you have played on the Clavinova keyboard for an effective practice aid. You can also record just the left-hand part, then practice the right-hand part while playing back the recorded left-hand part. Since you can record up to sixteen tracks separately, you could record the leftand right-hand parts separately, or record each part of a four-handed performance or ensemble song one by one to build a song. TERMINOLOGY Recording vs. Saving: The format of performance data recorded on a cassette tape differs from that of data recorded on the Clavinova. A cassette tape records audio signals. On the other hand, the Clavinova “saves” information regarding note timing, voices, and a tempo value, but not audio signals. When you play back recorded songs, the Clavinova produces sound based on the saved information. Therefore, recording on the Clavinova may be more accurately called “saving information.” However, this book often uses the word “recording” because it seems to make more sense. A message (information or confirmation dialog) sometimes appears on the screen to facilitate operation. Refer to the “Message List” on page 92 for an explanation of each message, appropriate actions to take, and troubleshooting information. Recording a New Song Recording to [TRACK 1] 2 3 DEMO CLP-970 SONG SELECT 1 TRACK 1 TRACK 2 EXTRA TRACKS FILE STOP START/ PAUSE REC SONG SETTING METRONOME START/ STOP SETTING A B PIANO CONTRAST E. PIANO/ BASS HARPSICHORD MALLET ORGAN PIANO/ E. PIANO HARPSI/ MALLET ORGAN/ STRINGS BASS STRINGS/ CHOIR REVERB CHORUS MIDI SETTING BRILLIANCE OTHER SETTING MAIN NO NEW SONG MIN TRANSPOSE MAX SONG BALANCE DOWN YES SPLIT POINT UP EXIT SYNCHRO START MASTER VOLUME SONG TEMPO C D VOICE SETTING LEFT VOICE EFFECT 5 35 46 Procedure 1. Select “NewSong” for recording. Press the SONG SELECT [ neously. ][ ] buttons simulta- New Song screen A B NO C NOTE If you select a song other than “P-000: NewSong” and record on a track that already has data, the existing data on the track will be lost. YES D CLP-970 41 Recording Your Performance 2. 3. Select a voice. Select a voice (or voices) for recording (see page 30). NOTE Set the tempo in Step 3. Set the other parameters, such as reverb and chorus. Adjust the [MASTER VOLUME] slider to set the volume level to suit your preference. You can also use the slider to adjust the level during playback. After you set the tempo or if the record standby screen does not appear, press one of the SONG SELECT [ ] [ ] buttons once to return to the New Song screen. NOTE See page 49 for more information on recording in Dual/ Split mode. Enter record mode and select a recording track. Press and hold down the [REC] button and press the [TRACK 1] button. The [TRACK 1] indicator flashes in red. (To cancel recording, press the [REC] or [STOP] button.) Record standby screen A B NO C YES D Set the tempo, if necessary. If this record standby screen does not appear, press one of the SONG SELECT [ ] [ ] buttons once. 4. Start and stop recording. Recording begins automatically as soon as you play a note on the keyboard. (Optional) Press the [START/PAUSE] button to start recording. The recording screen displays the current measure number. Record screen A B NO C YES TIP You can record data while using the metronome. The metronome is not recorded. TIP When you press the [START/PAUSE] button during recording, recording is paused. To resume recording, press the [START/ PAUSE] button again or play a note on the keyboard. D Measure number in recording To stop recording, press the [STOP] button. The Clavinova locates the top of the song. The [TRACK 1] indicator lights up in green. (Record mode is automatically cancelled.) 42 CLP-970 TIP When you press the [REC] button, recording pauses. Recording Your Performance 5. Play back the recorded performance. Press the [START/PAUSE] button to play back the recorded performance. When playback is complete, it automatically stops and the Clavinova locates the top of the song. To stop playback in the middle of a song, press the [STOP] button. You can also pause playback by pressing the [START/PAUSE] button. Playback stops when you press the button. NOTE To erase recorded data from a track, use the Channel Clear parameter in the “SONG SETTING” menu. (See page 75.) When you turn off the power to the Clavinova, the recorded performance data will be lost. If you wish to keep the recording, save the data using the SaveToMemory parameter (page 52) or SaveToDisk parameter (page 53) in the File menu. Re-recording TRACK 1 This section explains how to record again in case your performance was not satisfactory. Procedure 1. Select a voice or voices for recording, if necessary. Repeat Step 2 on page 42 if you wish to change the previous settings. Follow the procedure from Step 3 on page 42 to re-record. The original performance data will be overwritten by new performance data. CLP-970 43 Recording Your Performance Re-recording TRACK 1 partially This section explains how to record part of a song again. Procedure 1. Pause the song at the beginning of the part you wish to re-record. Use the B [–]/[+] buttons while the playback screen is displayed to move through the measures or play back the recording and press the [START/PAUSE] button to locate a point slightly prior to the beginning of the part you wish to re-record. Playback screen A B NO C 2. 3. 3-1 YES D Select a voice or voices for recording, if necessary. Repeat Step 2 on page 42 if you wish to change the previous settings. Select the recording method and enter record mode. Press and hold down the [REC] button, and press the C [–]/[+] buttons repeatedly to specify how the recording should start and press the D [–]/[+] buttons repeatedly to specify how the recording should end. While you are holding down the [REC] button, the following recording method select screen appears. A B NO C YES D Starting methods: Norm (Normal) — The existing data will be erased after re-recording starts. Key On — Data that exists prior to the point where you start playing a note will not be erased. 44 CLP-970 NOTE If the playback screen is not displayed, press one of the SONG SELECT [ ][ ] buttons once. Recording Your Performance Ending methods: Replace – The data after the point you stop recording will also be erased. Punch Out — The data after the point you stop recording will remain. 3-2 Keep holding down the [REC] button and press the [TRACK 1] button. TIP If you cancel recording by pressing the [REC] button, recording stops when you press the button. If you cancel recording by pressing the [STOP] button, the Clavinova locates the top of the song. The [TRACK 1] indicator flashes in red. (To stop recording, press the [REC] button again or press the [STOP] button.) Follow the procedure beginning with Step 4 on page 42. Recording to [TRACK2] This section explains how to record another part on the second track. 1 2 DEMO CLP-970 SONG SELECT TRACK 1 TRACK 2 EXTRA TRACKS FILE STOP START/ PAUSE REC SONG SETTING METRONOME START/ STOP SETTING A B PIANO CONTRAST E. PIANO/ BASS HARPSICHORD MALLET ORGAN PIANO/ E. PIANO HARPSI/ MALLET ORGAN/ STRINGS BASS STRINGS/ CHOIR REVERB CHORUS MIDI SETTING BRILLIANCE OTHER SETTING MAIN NO NEW SONG MIN MAX TRANSPOSE SONG BALANCE DOWN YES SPLIT POINT UP EXIT SYNCHRO START MASTER VOLUME SONG TEMPO C VOICE SETTING LEFT D VOICE EFFECT 2 Procedure 1. 2. Select a voice. Select a voice (or voices) for recording. Repeat Step 2 on page 42. Enter record mode and select a recording track. Press and hold down the [REC] button and press the [TRACK 2] button. The [TRACK 2] indicator flashes in red. (To cancel recording, press the [REC] or [STOP] button.) TIP Pressing the [TRACK 1] button repeatedly toggles between playback on (the indicator lights up in green) and off (the indicator turns off). Make the recording by following the procedure beginning with Step 4 on page 42. You can record a new part while listening to playback of the recorded [TRACK 1] data. CLP-970 45 Recording Your Performance Recording to the third or more tracks [EXTRA TRACKS] You can continue recording other parts into tracks 3–16 [EXTRA TRACKS] one by one. Procedure 1. Hold down the [REC] button in step 2 in the “Recording to [TRACK2]” on page 45 and use the B [–]/[+] buttons to select a recording track (3–16). select a recording track (3-16) A B NO C 2. YES D While holding down the [REC] key, press the [EXTRA TRACKS] button. Then, follow the procedure beginning with Step 4 on page 42. Other recording techniques Adding data to or recording over an existing song The previous section explains how to record your performance from the beginning by selecting a blank “P000: NewSong.” You can also add your performance to or overwrite existing songs (such as 50 preset songs [P-001—P-050], commercially-available music data [see page 60], or your old recorded performances [see page 50]). Procedure 1. Select a song for recording (P-001 – P-050). Select one of the preset songs (P-001–P-050) instead of “P-000: NewSong” as described in Step 1 of “Recording to [TRACK1]” on page 41. To select a song from commercial music data sold in stores or from already-recorded data, see Steps 1 and 2 on page 57. NOTE If you record on a track that already has data, the existing data on the track will be lost. To continue recording, follow the procedure described in “Recording a New Song” from page 41 to 46. 46 CLP-970 Recording Your Performance Changing a voice or tempo after recording You can change the voice and tempo after recording to change a song’s feel or to set a more suitable tempo. You can also change these elements in the middle of a song. Procedure 1. 2. 3. 4. Select a song you wish to change by using the SONG SELECT [ ] [ ] buttons. To change the voice or tempo in the middle of the song, specify the measure to change using the B [–]/ [+] buttons. Change the settings (voice, reverb, etc.). For example, if you wish to change the recorded E.Piano1 voice to E. Piano2, use the MAIN voice group buttons and the A [–]/[+] buttons to select E.Piano2. When the setting is complete, press one of the SONG SELECT [ ] [ ] buttons once to return to the song select screen. Press and hold down the [REC] button and select the track to change. The indicator for the selected track lights up in red. Change the tempo setting now, if necessary. At this point, do not play the keyboard or press the [START/PAUSE] button. Otherwise, recording will start, erasing the recorded data. 5. TIP Refer to “Questions about Operations and Functions” on page 97 for information on the settings that can be changed here. TIP Change the tempo in Step 4. CAUTION The edited settings (except for the tempo setting) will be saved in memory and you will not be able to restore the previous settings. Proceed with caution. Press the [STOP] or [REC] button to exit record mode. CLP-970 47 Recording Your Performance Adjusting the volume balance between playback and your performance [SONG BALANCE] While recording multiple parts into tracks one by one, you can adjust the volume balance between the playback of the recorded parts and your current performance. Procedure 1. Press one of the SONG BALANCE [ ] [ ] buttons. A B NO C 2. YES D Adjust the song balance using the SONG BALANCE [ ] [ ] or D [–]/[+] buttons. To lower the volume of the playback sound, press the SONG BALANCE [ ] or D [–] button. To lower the volume of the performance sound, press the SONG BALANCE [ ] or D [+] button. Setting range: 127:127 – 1:127 (Lowering the volume of the playback sound) 127:127 – 127:1 (Lowering the volume of the performance sound) Normal setting: 127:127 48 CLP-970 TIP Commercially-available song data contains a large amount of data. If you are using such songs, be sure to adjust the song balance. TIP The song balance setting is also used during playback. (See page 57.) Recording Your Performance Recording in Dual or Split mode When you record in Dual or Split mode, the Clavinova records each voice onto a separate track. The following table shows how tracks are assigned to each voice. CAUTION When you record multiple parts into tracks one by one, or when you record new data over an existing song (see page 46), the existing data will be erased. Proceed with caution. In the following example, Tracks 1, 2, and EXTRA TRACKn have been selected for recording. Tracks assigned for recording Tracks used for recording Dual Split Split+Dual TRACK1 TRACK2 EXTRA TRACKn TRACK1 TRACK2 EXTRA TRACKn TRACK1 TRACK2 EXTRA TRACKn ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ MAIN (1st voice) TRACK1 TRACK2 TRACKn LEFT (1st voice) – MAIN (2nd voice) TRACK3 LEFT (2nd voice) – TRACK4 TRACKn +2 TRACK1 TRACKn TRACK1 TRACKn TRACK2 TRACKn+1 TRACK2 TRACKn +1 – TRACK3 TRACKn +2 – TRACK4 TRACKn +3 Note: TRACKn = TRACK 3 – TRACK 16 If “n+1,” “n+2,” and “n+3” exceed 16, TRACKs 1, 2, and 3 are used. TIP Switching between Dual and Split mode in a song is not recorded. CLP-970 49 Saving Recorded Songs and Handling the Files...[FILE] File screens (accessed via the [FILE] button) enables you to handle song files (e.g., save, delete, and rename recorded songs), copy and format disks, and change the characters on the screen. The following parameters are provided for these operations: Settings Parameter name Reference page Saves recorded and other songs in Clavinova memory SaveToMemory 52 Saves recorded and other songs on floppy disks SaveToDisk 53 Deletes song data from Clavinova memory or floppy disk DeleteSong 53 Changes the title of songs RenameSongs 54 Copies data from floppy disk to floppy disk CopyDisk 55 Formats a floppy disk FormatDisk 56 Change the type of characters on the screen CharacterCode 56 Clavinova memory The Clavinova has the following three types of memory: • Current memory: This is a temporary memory area where you can temporarily place and edit the currently-selected song before playback or recording. • Preset song memory: This read-only memory area saves 50 piano preset songs. • Storage memory: This memory area enables you to save recorded songs or song data loaded from floppy disk. When you select a song in the song select screen, it is loaded from Preset song memory, Storage memory, or floppy disk, into Current memory. You will use Current memory to play back and record songs. When you turn off the power to the Clavinova, songs saved in Preset song memory and Storage memory are not erased. On the other hand, songs in Current memory are lost. If you wish to keep a song in Current memory, you must save it in Storage memory or on a floppy disk (see page 52, 53). In this manual, a song located in a song recorded in Current memory, is referred to as a “Current song,” a song in Storage memory is a “Memory song,” and a song on a floppy disk is a “Disk song.” Clavinova Preset song memory Storage memory Current memory A Floppy disk 50 CLP-970 TERMINOLOGY File A file contains a group of data. On the Clavinova, a song file includes song data and a song number. Memory Memory is a location inside the Clavinova in which you can save and edit data. Formatting (Initializing) Floppy disks are a convenient media that allow you to save various data for personal computers and other devices. There are many ways (formats) to save data on floppy disks, depending on the device. Therefore, you need to prepare a floppy disk by assigning a format before you can use it on a particular type of device. This operation is called “formatting.” Character code Type of characters Saving Recorded Songs and Handling the Files...[FILE] Basic file operation A message (information or confirmation dialog) sometimes appears on the screen to facilitate operation. Refer to the “Message List” on page 92 for an explanation of each message, appropriate actions to take, and troubleshooting information. [FILE] DEMO CLP-970 SONG SELECT TRACK 1 TRACK 2 EXTRA TRACKS FILE METRONOME START/ STOP SETTING A B PIANO CONTRAST E. PIANO/ BASS HARPSICHORD PIANO/ E. PIANO HARPSI/ MALLET MALLET ORGAN ORGAN/ STRINGS BASS STRINGS/ CHOIR REVERB CHORUS MIDI SETTING BRILLIANCE OTHER SETTING MAIN NO NEW SONG MIN TRANSPOSE MAX SONG BALANCE STOP START/ PAUSE REC SONG SETTING DOWN YES SPLIT POINT UP EXIT SYNCHRO START MASTER VOLUME SONG TEMPO C VOICE SETTING LEFT D VOICE EFFECT Procedure 1. Select a song, or have a floppy disk ready. 2. Access the File menu. Select a song you wish to save or rename. (Optional) Insert a floppy disk for copying or formatting into the disk drive. Press the [FILE] button. A B NO C YES D To close the File menu, press the [EXIT] button once or twice. 3. Select the desired parameter. 4. Set the parameter or execute the command. 5. Close the File menu. Press the [FILE] or A [–]/[+] buttons repeatedly to display the desired item from the following: “SaveToMemory”, “SaveToDisk,” “DeleteSong”, “RenameSong”, “CopyDisk”, “FormatDisk”, “CharacterCode”. Use the B [– (NO)]/[+ (YES)], C [–]/[+], D [–]/[+] buttons. For more information regarding this procedure, refer to the corresponding section below. Press the [EXIT] button. CLP-970 51 Saving Recorded Songs and Handling the Files...[FILE] Saving recorded or other songs to Clavinova Storage memory...[SaveToMemory] If you record a song, then turn off the power to the Clavinova, the song will be erased. To save the recorded song, you must save it into the Clavinova Storage memory or to a floppy disk. (To save a song to a floppy disk, refer to the next section [SaveToDisk].) You can also save the preset songs, disk songs, and additional or overwriting recordings (page 46) to Storage memory. A B NO C YES D Procedure See page 51 the basic operation information. The following is a detailed procedure of Step 4. 4-1 Name the song. To move the cursor (a small underline), use the C [–]/[+] buttons. To insert a space, press the C [–]/[+] buttons simultaneously. To select a character on the cursor, use the D [–]/[+] buttons. To delete a character, press the D [–]/[+] buttons simultaneously. You can use up to 58 characters for a song name. If the name is longer than the screen, use the C [–]/[+] buttons to move the cursor and scroll the name. 4-2 Execute the operation. Press the B [+ (YES)] button located next to “Execute?→” “Sure?→.” appears on the screen. Press the B [+ (YES)] button again to confirm the operation. (To cancel the operation, press the B [– (NO)] button.) The Clavinova displays “Executing” on the screen during the operation. When the operation is complete, “Completed” appears. The song is automatically numbered as “Mxx,” where “M” means “Memory” and “xx” is a number. TIP If Storage memory contains one or more songs, and you save a new song, the Clavinova automatically sorts the songs alphabetically and renumbers them. 52 CLP-970 TIP • You can change the type of characters on the screen using the CharacterCode parameter. • When you select a saved song later, the name with an extension “.MID” will appear. TERMINOLOGY “Execute?→”: Do you wish to execute the operation? “Sure?→”: Are you sure? “Executing”: The Clavinova is executing the operation. “Completed”: The operation is complete. CAUTION Do not turn off the power while the screen displays “Executing.” Saving Recorded Songs and Handling the Files...[FILE] Saving recorded or other songs to floppy disk...[SaveToDisk] You can save recorded songs, preset songs, Memory songs, and additional or overwriting recordings (page 46) songs onto a floppy disk. A B NO C YES D Procedure See page 51 for basic operation information. The following is a detailed procedure of Step 4. 4. Make sure that a formatted floppy disk (page 56) is inserted in the disk drive. Follow the steps for the [SaveToMemory] operation (see page 52) to name and save the song. The song is automatically numbered as “Dxx,” where “D” means “Disk” and “xx” is a number. TIP The song data is saved in the SMF format (format 0). Therefore, you can play the disk on instruments that support the SMF format. CAUTION Do not turn off the power or eject the floppy disk while the screen displays “Executing.” Deleting songs in Clavinova Storage memory or a floppy disk...[DeleteSong] You can delete Memory songs and Disk songs, but not Preset songs or Current songs. A B NO C YES D Procedure See page 51 for basic operation information. The following is a detailed procedure of Step 4. TIP To delete a Current song, select “ALL” for the ChannelClear parameter in the “SONG SETTING” menu (page 75). Alternatively, press the SONG SELECT [ ]/[ ] buttons simultaneously to display “Song Changed Save?”. This means “A song has been edited. Do you wish to save the change?” Press the B [– (NO)] button. The Current song is deleted and a blank “NewSong” is selected. CLP-970 53 Saving Recorded Songs and Handling the Files...[FILE] 4-1 Select a song to delete. TIP If you select a Memory song or Disk song, deleting the song does not erase song data from Current memory. However, if you return to the song select screen, song information other than the song name is replaced by “--------------”. Use the C [–]/[+] buttons to select a song. 4-2 Execute the operation. Press the B [+ (YES)] button located next to “Execute?→.” Follow the instructions on screen. TIP After you delete a song, the Clavinova automatically updates the song numbers. CAUTION Do not turn off the power or eject the floppy disk while the screen displays “Executing.” Renaming a song...[RenameSong] You can change a song’s title (except for the preset songs and [P-000: NewSong]. A B NO C YES D Procedure See page 51 for basic operation information. The following is a detailed procedure for Step 4. 4. Name the song as described in the [SaveToMemory] section (page 52). CAUTION Do not turn off the power or eject the floppy disk while the screen displays “Executing.” TIP After you rename a song, the Clavinova sorts songs alphabetically and renumbers them. 54 CLP-970 Saving Recorded Songs and Handling the Files...[FILE] Copying data from one floppy disk to another...[CopyDisk] You can copy the entire contents of one floppy disk to another floppy disk. A B NO C YES D Procedure See page 51 for basic operation information. The following is a detailed procedure for Step 4. 4-1 Make sure that a formatted floppy disk is inserted in the disk drive. 4-2 Press the B [+ (YES)] button located next to “Execute?→.” 4-3 When the screen indicates “Insrt Target Disk”, eject the source disk and insert the destination disk. When the copy operation is complete, the Clavinova displays “Completed.” TIP Use the same type of disk (2DD or 2HD) for the destination disk as the source disk. TERMINOLOGY Insrt Target Disk: Insert the destination (target) disk. CAUTION Do not turn off the power or eject the floppy disk while the screen displays “Executing.” CLP-970 55 Saving Recorded Songs and Handling the Files...[FILE] Formatting a floppy disk...[FormatDisk] You can format a floppy disk so that it can be used with the Clavinova. A B NO C YES D Procedure See page 51 for basic operation information. The following is a detailed procedure for Step 4. 4-1 Make sure that the formatted floppy disk is inserted in the disk drive. 4-2 Press the B [+ (YES)] button located next to “Execute?→.” Follow the instructions on screen. CAUTION Do not turn off the power or eject the floppy disk while the screen displays “Executing.” Changing the type of characters on screen...[CharacterCode] You can change the type of characters that appear on screen. The default setting is “International.” To input katakana, change this setting to “Japanese.” A B NO C Options: International, Japanese Character list [International] [Japanese] 56 CLP-970 YES D Playing Back Recorded Songs and Commercially-available Music Data TIP See page 59 for information on the types of song data that can be played on the Clavinova. You can play back songs recorded using the Record function (page 41) as well as commercially-available music data. You can also play the keyboard along with the playback. Playing back a song To play back a song from a floppy disk, insert the disk into the disk drive. 1 2-2 DEMO CLP-970 SONG SELECT 2-1 TRACK 1 TRACK 2 EXTRA TRACKS FILE STOP START/ PAUSE REC SONG SETTING METRONOME START/ STOP SETTING A B PIANO CONTRAST E. PIANO/ BASS HARPSICHORD MALLET ORGAN PIANO/ E. PIANO HARPSI/ MALLET ORGAN/ STRINGS BASS STRINGS/ CHOIR REVERB CHORUS MIDI SETTING BRILLIANCE OTHER SETTING MAIN NO NEW SONG MIN TRANSPOSE MAX SONG BALANCE DOWN YES SPLIT POINT UP EXIT SYNCHRO START MASTER VOLUME SONG TEMPO LEFT D 2-2 43 SONG BALANCE [ ] [ ] C VOICE SETTING VOICE EFFECT 5 TEMPO [DOWN] [UP] Procedure 1. Display the song select screen. Press either the SONG SELECT [ ]/[ ] buttons. Song select screen A B NO C 2. 2-1 YES D Select the desired song. Use the A [–]/[+] buttons to select the song type: “PresetSong,” “MemorySong,” or “DiskSong.” If the internal Storage memory contains one or more songs, the Clavinova displays “MemorySong.” If a floppy disk that contains song data is inserted in the drive, the Clavinova displays “DiskSong.” 2-2 Use the C [–]/[+] or SONG SELECT [ to select a song. TIP You can enjoy ensemble performance by yourself. Record the parts for a fourhanded song or a piano duet, then play the recorded part while playing the other part on the keyboard. ]/[ TIP Use the SongRepeat parameter in the “SONG SETTING” menu (page 76) to select repeat playback of all songs or repeat playback of a single song. ] buttons CLP-970 57 Playing Back Recorded Songs and Commercially-available Music Data 3. Start playback. Press the [START/PAUSE] button. Starting playback automatically as you start playing the keyboard (Synchro Start) You can start playback as soon as you start playing the keyboard. This is called the “Synchro Start” function. To enter Synchro Start standby mode, press and hold down the [STOP] button and press the [START/PAUSE] button. The [START/PAUSE] indicator flashes. Now play the keyboard. Playback starts simultaneously. To cancel the Synchro Start function, press the [STOP] button while the Clavinova is in Synchro Start standby mode. You can move back and forth (rewind and fast forward) through the bars by using the B [–]/[+] buttons in the song select screen while the Clavinova is playing or stopped. The bar number in playback A B NO C YES ]/[ ] buttons to return to the song Adjusting the tempo You can use the TEMPO [DOWN]/[UP] buttons to adjust the playback tempo as required before or during playback. The default tempo (the song’s original tempo) is set when you press the [DOWN] and [UP] buttons simultaneously. Press either of the SONG SELECT [ select screen. 4. 58 CLP-970 TIP You can play the metronome along with the song playback. When you stop playback, the metronome is also stopped. D You can play the keyboard while the Clavinova is playing back a song. You can also play the notes in a voice different from the playback voice by selecting the voice from the panel, and adjusting the volume balance between the playback parts and your current performance using the SONG BALANCE [ ] [ ] buttons. (See page 48.) Press either of the SONG SELECT [ select screen. TERMINOLOGY Bar: measure ]/[ ] buttons to return to the song Stop playback. When playback is complete, the Clavinova automatically stops and locates the top of the song. To stop playback in the middle of a song, press the [STOP] button. You can also pause playback by pressing the [START/PAUSE] button. Playback stops when you press the button. TIP In the song select screen: • Press the SONG SELECT [ ] or the C[–] button while playback is stopped in the middle of the song to locate the top of the song. • Press the SONG SELECT [ ] or the C[–] button during playback to restart playback from the top of the song. • Press the SONG SELECT [ ] or the C[+] button during playback to start playback from the next song. Playing Back Recorded Songs and Commercially-available Music Data 5. Return to the main screen. Press the [EXIT] button. Eject the floppy disk from the disk drive if you have been playing a disk song. Turning track playback on and off When you select a song on the Clavinova, the indicators for tracks that contain data ([TRACK 1], [TRACK 2], [EXTRA TRACKS]) are lit in green. While the Clavinova is playing or stopped, pressing these track buttons turn off the indicators, and the data on those tracks will not be played. Pressing the track buttons toggles track playback on and off. You can play the part that is turned off. TIP When the Clavinova plays back commercially-available music data or recordings from other instruments, all track indicators may light up green regardless of whether or not all tracks contains data. TIP You can practice a part or phrase using the FromToRepeat (page 75) and PhraseMark parameters (page 76) in the “SONG SETTING” menu. Supported song data type Data formats that can be played on the CLP-970 The Clavinova CLP-970 plays song data in the following formats: Floppy disk format 3.5-inch 2DD disks in the MS-DOS 720KB format 3.5-inch 2HD disks in the MS-DOS 1.44MB format TERMINOLOGY Disk format: A structured method for writing data to disk. Sequence format SMF (Standard MIDI File) formats 0 and 1 ESEQ Performance data recorded on the CLP-970 is saved in the SMF format 0 in a floppy disk. TERMINOLOGY Sequence format: A structured method for recording performance data. CLP-970 59 Playing Back Recorded Songs and Commercially-available Music Data Voice arrangement format XG voice arrangement GM system level 1 voice arrangement DOC voice arrangement Performance data recorded with preset voices on the CLP-970 can be played on other XG-compatible instruments. The CLP-970 provides XG voices for song playback, as well as preset voices. See page 6 of the separate “Reference Booklet” for the XG voice list. Refer to “Data compatibility” on page 101 for more information on formats. Song data recorded on other instruments When you play on the CLP-970 song data recorded on the Clavinova CVP109, 107, 105, 103, 98, 96, 94, 92, or CLP-870, you may notice a slight difference in volume balance, although the voices sound almost identical. You can also play back song data from the Yamaha Disklavier player piano. 60 CLP-970 TERMINOLOGY Voice arrangement format: A structured method for numbering the voices for assignment. Connections Connectors CAUTION Before connecting the Clavinova to other electronic components, turn off the power to all the components. Before turning the power on or off to all components, set all volume levels to minimum (0). Otherwise, electrical shock or damage to the components may occur. MIDI THRU Mac PC-1 R L / L+R R L / L+R AUX OUT 3 TO HOST HOST SELECT PEDAL 4 5 7 2 6 1 AUX OUT [R], [L/L+R] jacks You can connect these jacks to a stereo system to amplify the Clavinova or to a cassette tape recorder to record your performance. Refer to the diagram below and use audio cables for connection. Adjust the volume level on the stereo system or cassette tape recorder, not using the Clavinova’s [MASTER VOLUME] slider. CAUTION When the Clavinova’s AUX OUT jacks are connected to an external audio system, first turn on the power to the Clavinova, then to the external audio system. Reverse this order when you turn the power off. Clavinova R IN AUX PEDAL AUX IN 1 OUT MIDI PC-2 cassette tape recorder stereo system L / L+R CAUTION Do not route the output from the AUX OUT jacks to the AUX IN jacks. That is, when you connect an external audio device to the AUX OUT jacks, do not connect the audio device to the Clavinova’s AUX IN jacks. If you make this connection, the signal input at the AUX IN jacks is output from the AUX OUT. This creates an audio loop, causing audio oscillation and abnormal playback, leading to malfunction of both pieces of equipment. AUX OUT phone plug (standard) RCA phono →phone adapter plug AUX OUT alternatively RCA phono plug AUX IN TIP Use audio cables and adapter plugs with no resistance. RCA phono plug audio cable TIP The Clavinova’s [MASTER VOLUME] slider setting does not affect the signal output from the AUX OUT jacks. CLP-970 61 Connections 2 AUX IN [R], [L/L+R] jacks The stereo outputs from another instrument can be connected to these jacks, allowing the sound of an external instrument to be reproduced via the Clavinova’s speakers. Refer to the diagram below and use audio cables for connection. CAUTION When the Clavinova’s AUX IN jacks are connected to an external device, first turn on the power to the external divice, then to the Clavinova. Reverse this order when you turn the power off. Clavinova R Plug shape depends on the divece. L / L+R AUX IN AUX OUT (OUTPUT) AUX IN phone plug (standard) Tone Generator audio cable 3 AUX PEDAL jack Connect an optional foot controller FC7 or foot switch FC4 or FC5 here. Using the FC7 enables you to add expression to your performance by controlling the volume level of the notes you play. Using the FC4 or FC5 enables you to turn the assigned function on and off. Use the AuxPedal parameter in the “VOICE SETTING” menu. You can also assign the [START/PAUSE] button function to this foot switch. (See page 89.) 4 TO HOST jack This jack allows direct connection to a personal computer. (Refer to “Connecting a personal computer” on page 63 for more information.) 5 HOST SELECT switch This switch should be set according to the type of connected MIDI device or personal computer. (Refer to “Connecting a personal computer” on page 63 for more information.) 62 CLP-970 TIP The Clavinova’s [MASTER VOLUME] slider setting affects the input signal from the AUX IN jacks, but the [REVERB], [CHORUS], and [BRILLIANCE] (page 32) settings do not. TIP If you connect the Clavinova to a monaural device, use only the AUX IN [L/L+R] jack or AUX OUT [L/L+R] jack. CLP-970.E.book Page 63 Monday, December 11, 2000 5:02 PM Connections 6 MIDI [IN], [OUT], [THRU] connectors Use MIDI cables to connect external MIDI devices to these connectors. Make sure you set the HOST SELECT switch (described on the privious page) to MIDI when you use these connectors. 7 PEDAL jack Connect the pedal cord from the pedal box. (Refer to “Keyboard Stand Assembly” on pages 106-108.) Connecting a personal computer You can enjoy computer music data on the Clavinova by connecting a computer to the TO HOST (or MIDI) jack. “The Clavinova-Computer Connection” is a supplementary guidebook that describes, for beginners, what you can do with your Clavinova and a personal computer and how to set up a Clavinova-Computer system (the manual is not written for any specific models). The document is available as a PDF file (in English) at the following Internet address: Clavinova Web site: http://www.yamaha.co.jp/english/product/cl/ Yamaha Manual Library (Electronic Musical Instruments): http://www2.yamaha.co.jp/manual/english/ (You need to register first. Check the Clavinova web page.) There are the three methods by which to connect the Clavinova to a personal computer: 1. Connecting the serial port on the computer to the Clavinova’s TO HOST jack (page 64) 2. Using a MIDI interface and the Clavinova’s MIDI connectors (page 66) 3. Using the USB port on the computer and the UX256, a USB interface (page 67) For more information, refer to the following pages. TIP When connecting the Clavinova to a personal computer, first turn off the power to both the Clavinova and the computer before connecting any cables and setting the HOST SELECT switch. After making connections and switch settings, turn on the power to the computer first, then to the Clavinova. TIP If you do not use the TO HOST jack of the Clavinova, make sure you disconnect the cable from the jack. If the cable is left connected, the Clavinova may not function properly. TIP When the HOST SELECT switch is set to “PC-1,” PC-2,” or “Mac,” you can use the TO HOST jack, but the MIDI connectors are disabled since no data transfer occurs via the MIDI connectors. On the other hand, when the HOST SELECT switch is set to “MIDI,” you can use the MIDI connectors, but not the TO HOST jack since no data is transferred via the TO HOST jack. CLP-970 63 Connections 1. Connecting the serial port on the computer to the Clavinova’s TO HOST jack Connect the computer’s serial port (RS-232C or RS-422) to the Clavinova’s TO HOST jack. In this connection, the Clavinova functions as a MIDI interface. Therefore, you do not need a special MIDI interface. Connection Use a special serial cable (page 65) to connect the computer’s serial port (RS-232C or RS-422) to the Clavinova’s TO HOST jack. Clavinova Mac PC-1 TO HOST MIDI PC-2 HOST SELECT TO HOST RS-232C (D-sub 9-pin) RS-232C (D-sub 25-pin) modem port Windows Windows Macintosh Note for Windows 95/98 users (regarding MIDI driver) To transfer data via the computer’s serial port and the Clavinova’s TO HOST jack, you need to install a specified MIDI driver (Yamaha CBX driver for Windows 95/98). You can download this driver from the following XG Library on the Yamaha Web site: http://www.yamaha-xg.com 64 CLP-970 Connections Type of serial cables and connection pin assignments According to the type of computer you connect, use one of the following serial cables. • Windows (with a serial port of D-sub 9-pin) 8-pin mini DIN plug → D-sub 9-pin plug (Yamaha CCJ-PC2 or equivalent) mini DIN 1 2 8-pin 8 (CTS) 7 (RTS) 2 (RxD) 5 (GND) 3 4 8 5 D-sub 9-pin • Macintosh System peripheral plug → 8-pin plug (Yamaha CCJ-MAC or equivalent) mini DIN 1 2 8-pin 3 4 5 6 7 8 3 (TxD) • Windows (with a serial port of D-sub 25-pin) 8-pin mini DIN plug → D-sub 25-pin plug (Yamaha CCJ-PC1NF or equivalent) 2 (HSK i) mini DIN 1 (HSK O) 8-pin 5 (RxD-) 4 (GND) 3 (TxD-) 8 (RxD+) 7 (GP-) 6 (TxD+) • Pin assignment The following diagram shows the pin assignments for each cable. Pin numbers (view from front) mini DIN 8-pin 1 2 3 4 8 5 5 (CTS) 4 (RTS) 3 (RxD) 7 (GND) D-sub 25-pin mini DIN 8-pin D-sub 25-pin D-sub 9-pin 6 7 8 3 4 5 1 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 5 4 3 2 1 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 9 8 7 6 2 (TxD) Clavinova HOST SELECT switch setting Set the Clavinova HOST SELECT switch properly according to the type of connected computer. • Macintosh: “Mac” (data transfer rate: 31,250bps, 1MHz clock) • Windows: “PC-2” (data transfer rate: 38,400bps) TIP If your system does not work properly with the connections and settings listed above, your software may require different settings. Check your software operation manual and set the HOST SELECT switch to the proper data transfer rate. (Data transfer rate of “PC-1” is 31,250bps.) CLP-970 65 Connections 2. Using a MIDI interface and the Clavinova’s MIDI connectors Connection Use a MIDI interface device to connect a computer to the Clavinova using special MIDI cables. Clavinova MIDI THRU Mac PC-1 OUT IN MIDI PC-2 HOST SELECT MIDI OUT MIDI IN MIDI IN MIDI OUT MIDI OUT MIDI IN MIDI interface MIDI interface Windows Macintosh Clavinova HOST SELECT switch setting Set the Clavinova HOST SELECT switch to “MIDI.” 66 CLP-970 Connections 3. Using the USB port on the computer and the UX256, a USB interface Connect the USB port of the computer to the UX256 using a USB cable, install the driver (that came with the UX256) on the computer, and connect the UX256 to the Clavinova using a serial cable or MIDI cables. For more information, refer to the instruction manual for the UX256. UX256 Yamaha USB-MIDI interface. Connecting the UX256 to the Clavinova using a serial cable or PC-1 TO HOST USB cable Mac HOST SELECT Standard Machintosh 8-pin system peripheral cable computer Clavinova UX256 DEMO CLP-970 SONG SELECT TRACK 1 TRACK 2 EXTRA TRACKS FILE STOP START/ PAUSE REC SONG SETTING MAX TRANSPOSE NEW SONG SONG BALANCE B A METRONOME START/STOP SETTING − MIN ＋ − CONTRAST PIANO ＋ NO DOWN SPLIT POINT − ＋ E. PIANO/ BASS HARPSICHORD PIANO/ E. PIANO HARPSI/ MALLET MALLET ORGAN ORGAN/ STRINGS BASS STRINGS/ CHOIR REVERB CHORUS MIDI SETTING BRILLIANCE OTHER SETTING MAIN YES UP − ＋ EXIT VOICE SETTING LEFT SYNCHRO START MASTER VOLUME D C TEMPO SONG EFFECT VOICE POWER Connecting the UX256 to the Clavinova using MIDI cables MIDI THRU OUT IN MIDI USB cable HOST SELECT MIDI cables computer Clavinova UX256 DEMO CLP-970 SONG SELECT TRACK 1 TRACK 2 EXTRA TRACKS FILE STOP START/ PAUSE REC SONG SETTING MAX TRANSPOSE NEW SONG SONG BALANCE B A METRONOME START/STOP SETTING − MIN ＋ − CONTRAST ＋ NO DOWN PIANO SPLIT POINT − ＋ E. PIANO/ BASS HARPSICHORD PIANO/ E. PIANO HARPSI/ MALLET MALLET ORGAN ORGAN/ STRINGS BASS STRINGS/ CHOIR REVERB CHORUS MIDI SETTING BRILLIANCE OTHER SETTING MAIN YES UP − ＋ EXIT VOICE SETTING LEFT SYNCHRO START MASTER VOLUME SONG TEMPO C D VOICE EFFECT POWER CLP-970 67 68 CLP-970 Detailed Settings CLP-970 69 Detailed Settings You can set various parameters to make the best use of Clavinova functions, such as fine tuning the pitch, selecting a voice for the metronome, repeating playback, etc. See page 72 for the normal (default) setting for each parameter. Parameter List The following parameters are available. Recording and playback [SONG SETTING] Settings Correcting note timing Specifying whether playback starts immediately along with the first voicing Auditioning the channels Deleting data by each channel Specifying the range and playing back repeatedly Playing back the phrase specified by the phrase number Playing back a song repeatedly Parameter name Reference page Quantize 74 QuickPlay 75 ChannelListen ChannelClear FromToRepeat 75 75 75 PhraseMark 76 SongRepeat 76 Metronome METRONOME [SETTING] Settings Metronome time signature Metronome volume level Metronome voice Parameter name TimeSignature MetronomeVolume MetronomeSound Reference page 77 77 77 Voices [VOICE SETTING] In Dual mode, parameters with the “*” mark are set for Voice 1 and Voice 2 individually. Settings Octave* Volume level* Position of right and left channels* Fine pitch adjustment (only in Dual mode) Reverb type Reverb depth* Chorus type Chorus depth* Chorus on/off Variation effect type Variation effect depth* Touch sensitivity* 70 CLP-970 Parameter name Octave Volume Pan Detune ReverbType ReverbSend ChorusType ChorusSend ChorusOnOff VariationType VariationSend TouchSense Reference page 78 78 79 79 79 79 80 80 80 80 81 81 Detailed Settings Right pedal function Center pedal function Left pedal function Auxiliary pedal function RPedal MPedal LPedal AuxPedal 81 82 82 82 MIDI [MIDI SETTING] Settings MIDI transmit channel MIDI receive channel (Port A) MIDI receive channel (Port B) Local control on/off Selecting performance from the keyboard or song data for MIDI transmission Type of data received via MIDI Type of data transmitted via MIDI Song data bulk dump Transmitting the initial settings Voice data bulk dump Parameter name Reference page MidiOutChannel MidiInAChannel MidiInBChannel LocalControl 84 84 85 85 MidiOutSelect 85 ReceiveParameter TransmitParameter SongBulkDump InitialSetup VoiceBulkDump 85 86 86 86 86 [OTHER SETTING] Settings Selecting a touch response Fine tuning of the pitch Selecting a tuning curve for a piano voice Selecting a scale Depth of string resonance Depth of sustain sampling for the damper pedal Setting the speed of vibraphone’s vibrato effect Selecting a pedal function for vibraphone Assigning the START/PAUSE function to a pedal Selecting a type of auxiliary pedal Setting the point at which the damper pedal starts to affect the sound Pitch bend range Replacing the preset voices with XG voices Selecting the items saved at the time of shutdown Restoring the normal (default) settings Parameter name Reference page TouchResponse Tune PianoTuningCurve Scale StringResonanceDepth SustainSamplingDepth VivraphoneRotorSpeed VibraphonePedalMode PedalStart/Pause AuxPedalType 87 87 87 88 88 88 89 89 89 89 HalfPedalPoint 90 PitchBendRange XGAlternative MemoryBackUp FactorySet 90 90 91 91 CLP-970 71 Detailed Settings Making detailed settings METRONOME [SETTING] A [–] [+] DEMO CLP-970 SONG SELECT TRACK 1 TRACK 2 EXTRA TRACKS FILE STOP START/ PAUSE REC SONG SETTING METRONOME START/ STOP SETTING B [– (NO) ] [+ (YES) ] A B PIANO CONTRAST [MIDI SETTING] E. PIANO/ BASS HARPSICHORD MALLET ORGAN PIANO/ E. PIANO HARPSI/ MALLET ORGAN/ STRINGS BASS STRINGS/ CHOIR REVERB CHORUS MIDI SETTING BRILLIANCE OTHER SETTING MAIN NO NEW SONG MIN MAX TRANSPOSE SONG BALANCE DOWN YES SPLIT POINT UP EXIT SYNCHRO START MASTER VOLUME SONG TEMPO [SONG SETTING] C C [–] [+] VOICE SETTING LEFT D D [–] [+] VOICE EFFECT [VOICE SETTING] [OTHER SETTING] Procedure 1. Access a setting menu. Press the desired setting button ([SONG SETTING], METRONOME [SETTING], [VOICE SETTING], [MIDI SETTING], or [OTHER SETTING]) to access the corresponding setting menu. Press the [EXIT] button any time to close the setting menu. 2. 3. Select the desired parameter or part. Press the setting button, A [–]/[+], and/or C [–]/[+] buttons repeatedly as required. Set the parameter or part. Some parameters or parts lead you to more options. Use the B [– (NO)]/[+ (YES)], C [–]/[+], and D [–]/[+] buttons to select or set the option. To restore the normal parameter value, press the [–] and [+] buttons simultaneously. 72 CLP-970 Detailed Settings 4. Write, execute, or save the data. There are two ways to respond to the messages. If “Execute?→” or “Start?→” appears: Press the B [+(YES)] button to display confirmation ([Sure?→]). To proceed, press the B [+(YES)] button again. The Clavinova displays “Executing” and writes the data. When the operation is complete, it displays “Completed” for three seconds, then returns to the previous screen. To cancel the operation, press the B [–(NO)] button instead of the B [+(YES)] button. A B NO C YES D If “Set?→” appears: Press the B [+(YES)] button to execute the setting. The Clavinova displays “Executing” and saves the data. When the operation is complete, it displays “Completed” for three seconds, then returns to the previous screen. A B NO C 5. YES D Close the setting menu. Press the [EXIT] button. CLP-970 73 Detailed settings for recording and playback [SONG SETTING] You can make detailed settings for the selected song. First, select the desired song from preset songs (“PresetSong”), memory songs (“MemorySong”), or disk songs (“DiskSong”) (see page 57). Procedure Select the desired song and press the [SONG SETTING] button to access the “Song Setting” menu. DEMO CLP-970 SONG SELECT TRACK 1 TRACK 2 EXTRA TRACKS FILE METRONOME START/ STOP SETTING A B PIANO CONTRAST E. PIANO/ BASS HARPSICHORD MALLET ORGAN PIANO/ E. PIANO HARPSI/ MALLET ORGAN/ STRINGS BASS STRINGS/ CHOIR REVERB CHORUS MIDI SETTING BRILLIANCE OTHER SETTING MAIN NO NEW SONG MIN TRANSPOSE MAX SONG BALANCE STOP START/ PAUSE REC SONG SETTING DOWN YES SPLIT POINT UP EXIT SYNCHRO START MASTER VOLUME SONG C TEMPO VOICE SETTING LEFT D VOICE EFFECT [SONG SETTING] Correcting note timing [Quantize] You can correct the timing of notes. For example, you can adjust recorded notes to precise eighth or sixteenth notes, or make the entire feel of a song more lively (with a swing type of rhythm). • Changes are made by song. • You can also listen to the sound while changing the setting. To change the data, you need to respond to “Execute?→.” See the procedure on page 72. Stores the changed value. A If you select “1/8” for correction: Performance data Swing rate = 50% : not swinging Swing rate = 75% (51% or higher) : The timing of even beat notes is slightly delayed. Swing rate = 25% (49% or lower) : The timing of even beat notes is slightly early. B NO C YES D Swing rate = 67% : The timing of the even beat notes is moved to the third beat of the triplets. 3 Specifies the type of note. Notes for which you can adjust the timing: [OFF] [1/4] quarter note [1/8] eighth note [1/16] sixteenth note 3 [1/12] eighth note triplets 3 [1/24] sixteenth note triplets If you select “1/8” or “1/16” for correction, the Clavinova displays “SwingRate=xx%”, which enables you to make the entire feel of a song more lively and swinging. Setting range: 0% - 100% 74 CLP-970 TIP Save the edited song data to memory or a disk. (See page 50.) 3 Detailed settings for recording and playback [SONG SETTING] Specifying whether playback starts immediately along with the first voicing [QuickPlay] This parameter enables you to specify whether a song that starts from the middle of a bar, or a song with a silence prior to the first note, should be played from the first note or from the top of the bar (rest or blank). See the procedure on page 72. A B NO C You can delete data from each of 16 channels. See the procedure on page 72. Press this button to delete data. A B NO C YES D Use these buttons to select the desired channel for deletion. YES Setting range: D Ch1 - Ch16, ALL (all channels) Setting range: [On] Playing from the first note [Off] Playing from the top of the bar (including a rest or blank) Auditioning the channels [ChannelListen] You can select a single channel to listen to its contents. Playback starts from the first note. See the procedure on page 72. Playback continues as long as you press and hold down this button. A B NO C Deleting data from each channel [ChannelClear] YES D Use these buttons to select the desired channel for playback. TIP • Channels that do not contain any data are not displayed. However, for some songs, all channels (including the channels that contain no data) may be displayed. • Save the edited song data to memory or disk. (See page 50.) Specifying the range and playing back repeatedly [FromToRepeat] You can specify a range (in steps of beats) in a song to play back repeatedly. • Playback repeats after it reaches just prior to the beat specified as the end point. • If you start playing back a song with “Repeat On” selected, the count down starts, followed by the repeated playback of the specified part until you press the [STOP] button. • If you select “Repeat Off,” normal playback starts. See the procedure on page 72. Use these buttons to select “Repeat On.” Setting range: Ch1 - Ch16 TIP Usually, channels that do not contain any data are not displayed. However, for some songs, all channels (including the channels that contain no data) may be displayed. A B NO C Use these buttons to specify the start point of the repeated range. YES D Use these buttons to specify the end point of the repeated range. NOTE When you select another song, the specified range is automatically cancelled and the Repeat function is turned off. CLP-970 75 Detailed settings for recording and playback [SONG SETTING] Playing back the phrase specified by the phrase number [PhraseMark] If you select a song from an ensemble collection disk, such as the “Disk Orchestra Collection” or one of the “XG for Piano” disks, you can specify phrase numbers in the score to play back from the score from the mark point, or to play back the phrase repeatedly. • If you start playing back a song with “Repeat On” selected, the count down starts, followed by the repeated playback of the specified phrase until you press the [STOP] button. • If you select “Repeat Off,” normal playback starts from the specified phrase. See the procedure on page 72. Use these buttons to select “Repeat On.” A You can repeatedly play back all songs or a single song selected from the 50 preset songs or from the floppy disks. • When you start playback, the Clavinova plays the song you selected using the front panel, then starts repeat playback of the specified songs until you press the [STOP] button. See the procedure on page 72. Use these buttons to select “On.” A B NO C D YES Setting range: [DiskSongs] C D Use these buttons to specify the phrase number. Setting range of the phrase number: Off (not specified) 1 - the last phrase number of the song If you select any song other than those from the “Disk Orchestra Collection” or one of the “XG for Piano” disks, you can select only “Off.” 76 CLP-970 YES Use these buttons to specify the repeated songs. B NO Playing back a song repeatedly [SongRepeat] All songs in the floppy disk inserted in the disk drive [MemorySongs] All songs in the Clavinova’s memory [Disk+Memory] All songs from “DiskSongs” and “MemorySongs” [PresetSongs] All 50 preset songs [ALL] All songs from “DiskSongs,” “MemorySongs,” and “PresetSongs” [OneSong] One song selected from the front panel Detailed settings for the metronome METRONOME [SETTING] You can set the time signature, volume level, and voice of the Clavinova metronome. Procedure Press the [METRONOME SETTING] button to access the Metronome Setting menu. METRONOME [SETTING] DEMO CLP-970 SONG SELECT TRACK 1 TRACK 2 EXTRA TRACKS FILE STOP START/ PAUSE REC SONG SETTING METRONOME START/ STOP SETTING A B PIANO CONTRAST E. PIANO/ BASS HARPSICHORD MALLET ORGAN PIANO/ E. PIANO HARPSI/ MALLET ORGAN/ STRINGS BASS STRINGS/ CHOIR REVERB CHORUS MIDI SETTING BRILLIANCE OTHER SETTING MAIN NO NEW SONG MIN MAX TRANSPOSE SONG BALANCE DOWN YES SPLIT POINT UP EXIT SYNCHRO START MASTER VOLUME SONG C TEMPO Setting the metronome time signature [TimeSignature] LEFT VOICE EFFECT Selecting the metronome voice [MetronomeSound] See the procedure on page 72. See the procedure on page 72. A A B NO C Use these buttons to set the numerator of the time signature. D VOICE SETTING B NO YES C D Use these buttons to set the denominator of the time signature. For example, to specify “3/4,” use the C [–]/[+] buttons to select “3” and the D [–]/[+] buttons to select “4.” Setting range for the numerator: 1 - 16 Setting options for the denominator: 2, 4, and 8 YES D Setting range: [BellOff] [EnglishVoice] [GermanVoice] [JapaneseVoice] [FrenchVoice] [SpanishVoice] [BellOn] Click (standard metronome sound) Click and “1, 2, 3, 4” in English Click and “1, 2, 3, 4” in German Click and “1, 2, 3, 4” in Japanese Click and “1, 2, 3, 4” in French Click and “1, 2, 3, 4” in Spanish Click and bell TIP To mute the beat count, select “BellOff.” Setting the metronome volume level [MetronomeVolume] See the procedure on page 72. A B NO C YES D Setting range: 0-127 CLP-970 77 Detailed settings for the voices [VOICE SETTING] This menu enables you to make various detailed settings for the voices in Dual or Split mode and the effects. You can make these settings for each voice (or each combination of voices) individually. You can listen to the notes you play on the keyboard while changing the settings. Procedure 1. Select a voice and press the [VOICE SETTING] button to access the “Voice Setting” menu. DEMO CLP-970 SONG SELECT TRACK 1 TRACK 2 EXTRA TRACKS FILE STOP START/ PAUSE REC SONG SETTING METRONOME START/ STOP SETTING A B PIANO CONTRAST E. PIANO/ BASS HARPSICHORD MALLET ORGAN PIANO/ E. PIANO HARPSI/ MALLET ORGAN/ STRINGS BASS STRINGS/ CHOIR REVERB CHORUS MIDI SETTING BRILLIANCE OTHER SETTING MAIN NO NEW SONG MIN MAX TRANSPOSE SONG BALANCE DOWN YES SPLIT POINT UP EXIT SYNCHRO START MASTER VOLUME SONG C TEMPO D VOICE SETTING LEFT VOICE EFFECT [VOICE SETTING] 2. Press the A [–]/[+] buttons to select the part for which you wish to change the voice. The range of the displayed part varies depending on the selected voice. [Main] MAIN voices (displayed with a single voice or in Split mode) [Main × Layer] MAIN Voice 1 and Voice 2 (displayed when the MAIN side is in Dual mode) [Left] LEFT voice (displayed in Split mode) [Left × Layer] LEFT Voice 1 and Voice 2 (displayed when the LEFT side is in Dual mode) TIP In Dual mode, parameters with the “*” mark are set for Voice 1 and Voice 2 individually. Setting the octave [Octave]* You can shift the pitch up and down in octave steps. See the procedure on page 72. A B NO YES Setting the volume level [Volume]* You can set the volume level for each voice part. See the procedure on page 72. A B NO C C In Dual mode: A B NO C YES D Voice for editing (Voice 1 or Voice 2) Setting range: –2 (two octaves lower - 0 (no pitch shift) - +2 (two octaves higher) 78 CLP-970 YES D D Detailed settings for the voices [VOICE SETTING] Setting range: In Dual mode: A B NO C YES –20 - +20 (With positive values, the pitch of Voice 1 is raised and the pitch of Voice 2 is lowered. With negative values, the pitch of Voice 1 is lowered and the pitch of Voice 2 is raised.) D Voice for editing (Voice 1 and Voice 2) Selecting the reverb type [ReverbType] Setting range: 0 - 127 Setting the position of right and left channels [Pan]* You can specify the position in the stereo image from which you hear the sound. See the procedure on page 72. A TIP You cannot set this parameter for the voice parts “Left” and “LeftXLayer.” See the procedure on page 72. A B NO YES B NO YES C D Setting range: C D In Dual mode: A B NO C YES D Voice for editing (Voice 1 or Voice 2) Room Simulates reverberation in a room. Hall Simulates reverberation in a concert hall. Hall2 Reverberation is slightly longer than that of “Hall1.” Stage Reverberation suitable for a solo instrument sound. Plate Reverberation from the vibration of a metal plate. Setting range: L64 (hard left) - C (center) - R63 (hard right) Setting the reverb depth [ReverbSend]* Fine tuning the pitch (only in Dual mode) [Detune] TIP The reverb effect is not applied if the ReverbSend parameter is set to “0.” You can slightly shift the pitch of two voices selected for Dual mode. See the procedure on page 72. A See the procedure on page 72. A B B NO NO C C YES YES D D CLP-970 79 Detailed settings for the voices [VOICE SETTING] In Dual mode: In Dual mode: A B NO C A B YES D NO C Voice for editing (Voice 1 or Voice 2) YES D Voice for editing (Voice 1 or Voice 2) Setting range: Setting range: 0 - 127 0 - 127 Selecting the chorus type [Chorus Type] TIP You cannot set this parameter for the voice parts “Left” and “Left × Layer.” Setting the chorus on/off [ChorusOnOff] You can set the [CHORUS] button on or off for each voice. When you select a voice, the chorus on/off setting for the voice automatically changes according to this parameter. See the procedure on page 72. A B NO C YES See the procedure on page 72. D A Setting range: Chorus Celeste Flanger TIP Even if this parameter is turned on, the chorus effect is disabled if the ChorusSend parameter is set to 0. Adds a rich, spacious sound. Adds swell and a spacious sound. Adds swell effects of an ascending or descending jet plane. B NO C YES D Setting range: On/Off Setting the chorus depth [ChorusSend]* Selecting the variation effect type [VariationType] See the procedure on page 72. A B NO YES You can select other effects (than reverb and chorus). See the procedure on page 72. A C B D NO C 80 CLP-970 YES D Detailed settings for the voices [VOICE SETTING] Setting range: DelayLCR Delay applied at left, center, and right positions. DelayLR Delay applied at left and right positions. Echo Echo-like delay CrossDelay Left and right delays are crossed. Symphonic Adds a rich and deep acoustic effect. RotarySpeaker Adds the vibrato effect of a rotary speaker. Tremolo The volume level changes in rapid cycles. VibeRotor The vibrato effect of a vibraphone. AutoPan The sound pans left to right and back and forth. Phaser The phase changes periodically, swelling the sound. AutoWah The center frequency of the wah filter changes periodically. SoundBoardRev Simulates the reverberation of a piano soundboard. Off No effect. Setting the touch sensitivity [TouchSense]* This parameter enables determines the manner and degree to which the volume level changes in response to your touch on the keyboard (how hard you play). Since the volume level of the harpsichords and pipe organs do not change regardless of how you play the keyboard, the normal setting for these voices is 127. (See the setting range below.) See the procedure on page 72. A B NO C YES D In Dual mode: A B NO C YES D Voice for editing (Voice 1 or Voice 2) Setting the variation effect depth [VariationSend]* See the procedure on page 72. A Setting range: 0 (softest) - 64 (largest changes in the level) - 127 (loudest and fixed) B NO C YES Setting the right pedal function [RPedal] D See the procedure on page 72. In Dual mode: A A B B NO NO C C D D Voice for editing (Voice 1 or Voice 2) Setting range: 0 - 127 YES YES Setting range: SustainCont Damper function that sustains the sound longer as you press the pedal deeper. Sustain On/Off switch type damper function. PitchBend Changes the pitch continuously. Off No function. Normal setting: SustainCount CLP-970 81 Detailed settings for the voices [VOICE SETTING] Setting the center pedal function [MPedal] See the procedure on page 72. A You can assign a function to the pedal connected to the Clavinova’s AUX PEDAL jack. See the procedure on page 72. B NO Setting the auxiliary pedal function [AuxPedal] YES A C NO D Setting range: Sostenuto Sostenuto pedal function. (See page 31.) RotarySpeed Changes the number of rotations of the rotary speaker effect in the JazzOrgan voice. (Pressing the pedal repeatedly toggles between fast and slow rotation speeds.) VibeRotor Turns vibrato of the Vibraphone voice on and off. (Pressing the pedal repeatedly toggles between on and off.) Off No function. Normal Setting: Sostenuto Setting the left pedal function [LPedal] See the procedure on page 72. A B NO B YES C YES D Setting range: Expression Sustain Makes the sound softer or louder. On/Off switch type damper function. (See page 31.) SustainCont Damper function that sustains the sound longer as you press the pedal deeper. (See page 31.) PitchBend Changes the pitch continuously. Sostenuto Sostenuto pedal function. (See page 31.) Soft Soft pedal function. (See page 31.) RotarySpeed Changes the number of rotations of the rotary speaker effect in the JazzOrgan voice. (Pressing the pedal repeatedly toggles between fast and slow rotation speeds.) VibeRotor Turns the vibrato of the Vibraphone voice on and off. (Pressing the pedal repeatedly toggles between on and off.) Off No function. Normal setting: C D Setting range: Soft Soft pedal function. (See page 31.) RotarySpeed Changes the number of rotations of the rotary speaker effect in the JazzOrgan voice. (Pressing the pedal repeatedly toggles between fast and slow rotation speeds.) VibeRotor Turns the vibrato of the Vibraphone voice on and off. (Pressing the pedal repeatedly toggles between on and off.) Off No function. Normal Setting: Soft (for all voices other than JazzOrgan and VibraPhone) Rotary Speed (JazzOrgan), Vibraphone (VibeRotor) 82 CLP-970 Expression TIP Optional pedals • Yamaha FC7 foot controller This foot controller is suitable for controlling Expression, SustainCont, and PitchBend. • Yamaha FC4 foot controller Yamaha FC5 foot controller These foot switches are suitable for controlling Sustain, Sostenuto, Soft, RotarySpeed, and VibeRotor. MIDI [MIDI SETTING] You can make detailed MIDI settings, such as setting up MIDI transmit/receive channels. About MIDI MIDI (Musical Instrument Digital Interface) is a standard format for data transmission/reception. It enables the transfer of performance data and commands between MIDI devices and personal computers. Using MIDI, you can control a connected MIDI device from the Clavinova, or control the Clavinova from a connected MIDI device or computer. TIP MIDI performance data and commands are transferred in the form of numeric values. MIDI connectors MIDI THRU Mac PC-1 OUT IN MIDI PC-2 HOST SELECT MIDI [IN]: Receives MIDI data. MIDI [OUT]: Transmits MIDI data. MIDI [THRU]: Transmits data received at the MIDI [IN] connector as it is. TIP Prepare dedicated MIDI cables. [TO HOST] connector Use this connector to connect the Clavinova to a computer. Mac PC-1 TO HOST MIDI PC-2 HOST SELECT TIP The type connecting cable varies depending on the computer. Refer to “Connecting a Personal Computer” on page 63 for more information. Since MIDI data that can be transmitted or received varies depending on the type of MIDI device, check the “MIDI Implementation Chart” to find out what MIDI data and commands your devices can transmit or receive. The Clavinova’s MIDI Implementation Chart is listed on pages 31 and 32 in the “Reference Booklet” for the CLP-970. When you are using the MIDI connectors, set the [HOST SELECT] switch to “MIDI.” (See page 63.) TIP When you are using the [TO HOST] connector, set the [HOST SELECT] switch correctly, according to the type of computer you are using. (See page 63.) You can also obtain detailed information about MIDI from various music magazines and books. CLP-970 83 MIDI [MIDI SETTING] Procedure Press the [MIDI SETTING] button to enter MIDI setting mode. [MIDI SETTING] DEMO CLP-970 SONG SELECT TRACK 1 TRACK 2 EXTRA TRACKS FILE METRONOME START/ STOP SETTING A B PIANO CONTRAST E. PIANO/ BASS HARPSICHORD MALLET ORGAN PIANO/ E. PIANO HARPSI/ MALLET ORGAN/ STRINGS BASS STRINGS/ CHOIR REVERB CHORUS MIDI SETTING BRILLIANCE OTHER SETTING MAIN NO NEW SONG MIN MAX TRANSPOSE SONG BALANCE STOP START/ PAUSE REC SONG SETTING DOWN YES SPLIT POINT UP EXIT SYNCHRO START MASTER VOLUME SONG C TEMPO Setting the MIDI transmit channel [MidiOutChannel] This parameter enables you to specify the channel on which the Clavinova transmits MIDI data. See the procedure on page 72. A B NO C Select a voice part. VOICE See the procedure on page 72. A B YES D Specify the channel. NO C Select a channel. Setting for: Ch1 - Ch16 Setting range: Setting range: Ch1 - Ch16, Off (Not transmitted.) On/Off Normal setting: Normal setting: Main — Ch1 Left — Ch2 Layer — Ch3 Left Layer— Ch4 On for all channels Setting the MIDI receive channel (Port A) [MidiInAChannel] This parameter enables you to specify for each channel whether the Clavinova receives data at the MIDI [IN] connector or the [TO HOST] port A (CBX driver’s port A). YES D Main, Left, Layer, Left Layer CLP-970 EFFECT TIP The received data is played back using the XG voices (page 6 in the “Reference Booklet” for the CLP-970). You can also assign the Clavinova’s preset voices to part of the data. (See “XG Alternative” on page 90.) Setting for: 84 VOICE SETTING LEFT D Select On or Off. MIDI data MIDI IN TO HOST Port A Port B Sound source A Channels 1-16 Sound source B Channels 1-16 Used for song playback Used for performance and playback MIDI [MIDI SETTING] Setting the MIDI receive channel (Port B) [MidiInAChannel] This parameter enables you to specify for each channel whether the Clavinova receives data at the MIDI [IN] connector or the [TO HOST] port B (CBX driver’s port B). TIP The received data is played back using the preset voices (page 103). See the procedure on page 72. A Setting range: On/Off Normal setting: On Selecting performance from the keyboard or song data for MIDI transmission [MidiOutSelect] You can select whether your performance data or song playback data (including demo songs) is sent via MIDI. See the procedure on page 72. B A NO B YES NO C D C Select a channel. YES D Select On or Off. Setting range: Setting for: Ch1 - Ch16 Keyboard (performance data played on the keyboard) Song (song playback data) Setting range: Normal setting: On/Off Keyboard Normal setting: On for all channels Selecting a type of data received via MIDI [ReceiveParameter] Setting Local control on/off [LocalControl] “Local Control On” is a state in which the Clavinova produces the sound from its tone generator when you play the keyboard. In “Local Control Off ” state, the keyboard and the tone generator are cut off from each other. This means that even if you play the keyboard, the Clavinova will not produce the sound. Instead, the keyboard data can be transmitted via MIDI to a connected MIDI device, which can produce the sound. The “Local Control Off ” setting is useful when you wish to play an external sound source while playing the keys on the Clavinova. See the procedure on page 72. A C A B NO C Select a type of data. YES D Select On or Off. Type of data: Note, Control, Program, Pitch Bend, SysEx (System Exclusive) Setting range: On/Off B NO This parameter enables you to specify which MIDI data the Clavinova can receive. See the procedure on page 72. YES Normal setting: On for all types of data D CLP-970 85 MIDI [MIDI SETTING] Selecting a type of data transmitted via MIDI [TransmitParameter] This parameter enables you to specify which MIDI data the Clavinova can transmit. See the procedure on page 72. A B NO C YES Transmitting the initial settings on the panel [InitialSetup] You can transmit the panel data, such as voice selection, to a connected sequencer. Before you record performance data to a connected MDF3 or sequencer, it is useful if you first send and record (at the beginning of the performance data) the panel setup data for your performance during playback. See the procedure on page 72. D A Select a type of data. Select On or Off. B NO YES Type of data: Note, Control, Program, Pitch Bend, SystemRealTime, SysEx (System Exclusive) Setting range: Normal setting: On for all types of data You can transmit the voice data specified in the “Voice Setting” menu (page 78) as MIDI bulk data. You can interrupt voice data bulk dump transmission by pressing the B [– (NO)] button. See the procedure on page 72. Executing song data bulk dump [SongBulkDump] You can save current song data on the Clavinova as MIDI bulk data by transferring it to a connected MIDI data filer (such as an MDF3) or a sequencer. To play back the saved song data, send the bulk data back from the storage device to the Clavinova and follow the usual playback procedure. You can interrupt song data bulk dump transmission by pressing the B [– (NO)] button. See the procedure on page 72. A B NO 86 CLP-970 D Executing voice data bulk dump [VoiceBulkDump] On/Off C C YES D A B NO C YES D Other settings You can make detailed settings for touch, tuning, scale, etc. Procedure Press the [OTHER SETTING] button to enter Other Setting mode. DEMO CLP-970 SONG SELECT TRACK 1 TRACK 2 EXTRA TRACKS FILE METRONOME START/ STOP SETTING A B PIANO CONTRAST E. PIANO/ BASS HARPSICHORD MALLET ORGAN PIANO/ E. PIANO HARPSI/ MALLET ORGAN/ STRINGS BASS STRINGS/ CHOIR REVERB CHORUS MIDI SETTING BRILLIANCE OTHER SETTING MAIN NO NEW SONG MIN MAX TRANSPOSE SONG BALANCE STOP START/ PAUSE REC SONG SETTING DOWN YES SPLIT POINT UP EXIT SYNCHRO START MASTER VOLUME SONG C TEMPO D VOICE SETTING LEFT VOICE EFFECT [OTHER SETTING] Selecting a touch response [TouchResponse] Fine tuning the pitch [Tune] You can fine tune the pitch of the entire instrument. This function is useful when you play the Clavinova along with other instruments or CD music. See the procedure on page 72. You can specify a touch response (how the sound responds to the way you play the keys). See the procedure on page 72. A A B B NO NO C C D D Setting range: Light YES YES With a soft touch, the Clavinova produces a loud sound. The volume level of tones tends to be consistent. Medium Standard touch response. Heavy You must hit the key very hard to generate a loud volume. This allows for versatile expression, from pianissimo to fortissimo tones. Fixed No touch response. The volume level will be the same regardless of how hard you play the keys. Use the B [–]/[+] buttons to set the volume level. Setting range: A3=427.0Hz - 453.0Hz (0.1Hz steps) Selecting a tuning curve for a piano voice [PianoTuningCurve] You can select a tuning curve from “GrandPiano1” and “GrandPiano2.” Select “Flat” if you feel the tuning curve of the piano voice does not quite match that of other instruments voices. See the procedure on page 72. A B Setting range of the “Fixed” volume level: NO 1 - 127 C YES D Setting range: Stretch Flat Tuning curve particularly for pianos Tuning curve in which the frequency is octave doubled over the entire keyboard range CLP-970 87 Other settings If you select a scale other than Equal, you need to specify the root note using the B [–]/[+] buttons. Selecting a scale [Scale] You can select various scales. Equal Temperament is the most common contemporary piano tuning scale. However, history has known numerous other scales, many of which serve as the basis for certain genres of music. You can experience the tunings of these genres. See the procedure on page 72. A YES Equal One octave is divided into twelve equal intervals. Currently most popular piano tuning scale. PureMajor/PureMinor Based on natural overtones, three major chords using these scales produce a beautiful, pure sound. They are sometimes used for chorus parts. Pythagorean This scale, designed by Pythagoras, a Greek philosopher, is composed of only five pitches. The 3rd produces swells, but the 4th and 5th are beautiful and suitable for some leads. MeanTone This scale is an improvement of the Pythagorean in that the swell of the 3rd has been eliminated. It spread during the late 16th century through the late 18th century. Handel used this scale. WerckMeister/KirnBerger These scales combine Mean Tone and Pythagorean in different ways. With these scales, modulation changes the impression and feel of the songs. They were often used in the era of Bach and Beethoven. They are also often used now to reproduce the music of that era on harpsichords. Equal 88 CLP-970 NO C YES D I b I b b C, C , D, E , E, F, F , G, A , A, B , B Setting range: Depth of string resonance [StringResonanceDepth] D Setting range: Normal setting: B B NO C A This parameter is effective only on “GrandPiano1.” See the procedure on page 72. A B NO C YES D Setting range: 1 - 10, Off Depth of sustain sampling for the damper pedal [SustainSamplingDepth] This parameter is effective only on “GrandPiano1.” See the procedure on page 72. A B NO C Setting range: 1 - 10, Off YES D Other settings Setting the speed of vibraphone’s vibrato effect [VibraphoneRotorSpeed] This parameter enables you to set the speed of vibrato when you select the Vibraphone voice and use a vibe rotor pedal. See the procedure on page 72. A TIP If you assign the START/PAUSE function to a pedal and turn the function On, the pedal function assigned to the pedal in the Voice Setting menu (pages 81 and 82) is disabled. See the procedure on page 72. B NO Assigning the START/PAUSE function to a pedal [PedalStart/ Pause] YES A B NO C C Setting range: 1 - 10, Off Select a pedal to assign the function. Set to On or Off. Left, Middle, AUX Setting range: On/Off This parameter enables you to select whether the sound is sustained while you press the keys on the keyboard (“PianoLike”) or the sound is sustained only while you press and hold down the sustain pedal, like playing a real vibraphone (“Normal”). See the procedure on page 72. A D Setting for: Selecting a pedal function for vibraphone [VibraphonePedalMode] B NO C YES D YES D Normal setting: Off for all pedals Selecting a type of auxiliary pedal [AuxPedalType] A pedal connected to the [AUX PEDAL] connector may switch on and off differently. For example, some pedals turn on the effects and others turn them off when you press them. Use this parameter to reverse this mechanism. See the procedure on page 72. Setting range: PianoLike, Normal A B NO Normal setting: YES PianoLike C D Setting range: Make, Break CLP-970 89 Other settings Setting the point at which the damper pedal starts to affect the sound [HalfPedalPoint] You can specify how far down you should press on the right pedal until the damper effect (page 31) starts working. This setting is effective when the right pedal function (page 81) is set to either SustainCont or Sustain. See the procedure on page 72. A C The CLP-970 provides the XG tone generator for the purpose of playing GM, XG, or DOC music data (page 60). You can replace some XG voices with the preset voices on the panel for playback. This parameter enables you to select “Native” (using the preset voices) or “XG” (using the XG voices). See the procedure on page 72. A B NO Replacing the XG voices with preset voices [XGAlternative] B NO YES C D YES D Select the desired item. Select on or off. Setting range: –2 (effective with the shallowest press) - 0 - +2 (effective with the deepest press) Setting for: All preset voices on the panel Setting range: Pitch bend range [PitchBendRange] Native Using the preset voices XG Using the XG voices Normal setting: This parameter enables you to set the range of continuous pitch change made by the Pitch Bend function. • This parameter is effective only on the keyboard performance sound. • You can set the range in semitone steps. See the procedure on page 72. A B NO C YES D Setting range: –12 (Pitch is lowered by 12 semitones [one octave] when you press the pedal.) - +12 (Pitch is raised by 12 semitones [one octave] when you press the pedal.) Normal setting: –2 90 CLP-970 GrandPiano1 Other voices Native XG (using the preset voices) (using the XG voices) Other settings Selecting items saved at shutdown [MemoryBackUp] Restoring the normal (default) settings [FactorySet] You can back up some settings, such as voice selection and metronome setting, so that they will not be lost after you turn off the power to the Clavinova. • Memory songs (saved in the Clavinova’s memory), the backup on/off setting (this parameter setting), and the “CharacterCode” parameter setting (page 56) are always backed up. See the procedure on page 72. A B NO You can reset the Clavinova to its normal (factory default) settings. • The CharacterCode parameter setting in the File menu does not change. • The MemoryBackUp parameter setting (On/Off) (left column) is reset to the normal setting. • You can specify whether the memory songs are erased or kept. See the procedure on page 72. Reset the Clavinova. YES A C Select the desired item. B NO D YES Select on or off. Setting for: Transpose, Brilliance, ReverbOnOff, SplitPoint, Main/ LeftVoice, MetronomeSetting, SongSetting, SongBalance, MidiSetting, and OtherSetting Setting range: C D Select a value for memory songs. Selecting for “MemorySong”: MemorySongExcluded MemorySongIncluded Memory songs are kept. Memory songs are erased. On/Off Normal setting: The Transpose, Main/LeftVoice, and MetronomeSetting parameters are set to Off. Other parameters are set to On. Other method for restoring the normal settings Press and hold down the white key on the right end (C7) and press the [POWER] switch to turn on the power to the Clavinova. In this case, the Memory songs saved in the storage memory are not erased. If you wish to erase Memory songs at this time, press and hold down the right-most white key (C7) and black key (Bb6) and press the [POWER] switch to turn on the power to the Clavinova. B 6 C7 [POWER] CLP-970 91 Message List The messages are listed in alphabetical order. Message Meaning This message is displayed following the message “BulkDataReceiving Song/ Voice.” Receiving bulk data is complete. After this message appears, you can proceed to the next step. Receiving bulk data has failed. Check the parameter settings and try again. The Clavinova is receiving the song bulk data while this message is displayed. Wait until the message disappears, then proceed to the next step. The Clavinova is receiving the voice setting bulk data while this message is displayed. Wait until the message disappears, then proceed to the next step. You have cancelled the “SongBulkDump” (page 86) or “VoiceBulkDump” (page 86) transmission by pressing the B [–(NO)] button. This message is displayed following the message “Executing.” The Clavinova’s internal processing is complete. You may proceed to the next step. Writing or reading data from the disk has failed. Try again. If you still see this message, the disk may be damaged or the disk drive may have malfunction. If you see this message while using a brand new disk, it is more likely that the disk drive is malfunctioning. Ask your Yamaha dealer for repair. The floppy disk space is full and can no longer record data. Use a new disk (page 53) or delete unnecessary files from the disk (page 53) to make room for new data. You attempted to eject a floppy disk from the disk drive while the drive was writing or reading. The writing or reading operation is not complete yet. Try it again. 92 CLP-970 Message List Message Meaning You tried to save a song by changing its title (using the “RenameSong” (page 54), “SaveToMemory” (page 52), or “SaveToDisk” (page 53) parameter), but a song with the same name already exists in memory or on the floppy disk. Three seconds after this message appears, the previous screen is restored. Rename the song. This message prompts you to execute a file-related operation. Press the B [+ (YES)] button to proceed, or press the [EXIT] button to cancel. The Clavinova is processing the data internally. Wait until the message disappears, then proceed to the next step. The normal (factory default) settings (except for the memory song setting) (“FactorySet” on page 91) have been restored. This message also appears if you press and hold down the C7 key and turn on the power to the Clavinova (page 91). The normal (factory default) settings (including the memory song setting) (“FactorySet” on page 91) have been restored. This message also appears if you press and hold down the C7 and Bb6 keys and turn on the power to the Clavinova (page 91). The Clavinova’s flash memory (storage memory) has expired. Consult your Yamaha dealer. If this message appears, the Clavinova will not back up the songs and settings in memory. Press the [EXIT] button to return to the previous screen. In the CopyDisk operation (page 55), the copy source disk has not been inserted to the disk drive. Insert the disk. In the CopyDisk operation (page 55), the copy destination disk has not been inserted into the disk drive. Insert the disk. You turned off the power to the Clavinova while it was writing a song to storage memory. This message appears next time you turn on the power. The Clavinova checks if the contents of storage memory can be recovered. This message appears following the message “LastPowerOffIllegalMemorySongChecking,” indicating that the Clavinova recovered data in the storage memory as much as possible. CLP-970 93 Message List Message Meaning This message appears following the message “LastPowerOffIllegalMemorySongChecking,” indicating that the Clavinova could not recover data in the storage memory and that all memory songs were deleted. There is not enough memory space left and you cannot save any more songs. Save songs to a floppy disk (page 53) or delete some songs in the storage memory, then save new data to memory. A floppy disk has not been inserted into the disk drive for a disk-related operation. Insert the disk and continue. You tried to delete a song that does not exist in the storage memory or on disk. You cannot delete the song. This message prompts you to select whether you wish to overwrite the existing data with new data when you add recordings to a song. Press the B [+ (YES)] button to allow overwriting. Press the B [– (NO)] button to cancel. You tried to start playing a song or perform another operation right after you select the song. Wait until the message disappears. 1. You tried to write, copy, or delete data on a disk that has its “write protect” tab on, or a disk that is internally protected against writing. Set the protect tab to off (unprotected) (page 14) and try again. If you still see this message, the disk is internally protected (such as commercially available music data). You cannot write or copy to such a disk. 2. This message also appears when you try to copy data on an internallyprotected disk onto another disk using the CopyDisk function (page 55). You cannot duplicate such a disk. You tried to copy or delete data in internally-protected files (such as commercially available music data). You cannot write to, copy, or delete such files. 94 CLP-970 Message List Message Meaning 1. After you load an internally-protected song into the Clavinova’s Current memory or storage memory, you tried to save the song to a floppy disk. You cannot save such a song to another disk. You cannot write or copy to such a disk. 2. This message also appears if you try to transmit bulk data (page 86) of an internally-protected song (such as commercially available music data). You cannot transmit bulk data of such songs. This message prompts you to select whether you wish to save the edited settings. Press the B [+ (YES)] button to save the settings. Press the [EXIT] button to cancel. You tried to perform another operation before saving the recorded song to storage memory or a floppy disk. If you continue the operation, the recorded song will be lost. To delete the new recording, press the B [– (NO)] button. To keep the recording, press the B [+ (YES)] button. The Clavinova displays the “SaveToMemory” (page 52) or “SaveToDisk” (page 53) parameter screen. If necessary, select “SaveToMemory” or “SaveToDisk” accordingly and save the recorded song, then proceed to another operation. The Clavinova has found some defects in the selected (or playing) song. Select the song and play it again. If you still see this message, the song data may be damaged. The Current memory space is full during recording. Recording stops automatically. The data recorded up to that point remains. This message also appears when you try to enter recording mode to make an additional recording but the song data already fills the Current memory. In this case, you cannot make an additional recording. Use the “ChannelClear” parameter (page 75) to delete unnecessary tracks (if any) to make more room in memory. The size of the selected song is larger than the Current memory (page 97). The CLP-970 cannot read the song. Select another song. This message prompts you to start the operation. To start, press the B [+ (YES)] button. Press the [EXIT] button to cancel the operation. CLP-970 95 Message List Message Meaning This message prompts you to confirm the execution. Press the B [+ (YES)] button to continue. Press the B [– (NO)] button to cancel. There is a malfunction with the TO HOST connector. When you are using the CLP-970 with a connected computer: The power to the computer is turned off, the cables are connected incorrectly, the [HOST SELECT] switch is set incorrectly, or the driver or MIDI application on the computer works incorrectly. Turn off the power to the CLP-970 and the computer, then check the cable connections and the [HOST SELECT] switch setting. Then, turn on the power to the computer and the CLP-970 in this order and check to see if the driver and MIDI application on the computer work properly. When you are using only the CLP-970: This message appears if a cable is connected to the TO HOST connector on the CLP-970. In this case, turn off the power to the CLP-970, remove the cable from the TO HOST connector, then turn on the power to the CLP-970. If the cable is left connected to the TO HOST connector, the CLP-970 may not work correctly. You tried to perform a file- or disk-related operation using an unformatted disk. Eject the disk, format it using the “FormatDisk” parameter (page 56), and try again. You tried to perform a file- or disk-related operation using an unformatted disk. To cancel the operation, press the B [– (NO)] button. To format the disk and try again, press the B [+ (YES)] button to display the “FormatDisk” parameter (page 56). You tried to copy data to a different type of disk (e.x.: 2DD →2HD, 2HD→2DD) during the CopyDisk operation (page 55). Eject the disk and insert an appropriate disk. You used a period or space at the beginning of a song name or you tried to change a song name that includes a character (or characters) not supported by the CLP-970, and the CLP-970 could not process the name. The Clavinova displays the previous screen in three seconds. Rename the song correctly. 96 CLP-970 Questions about Operations and Functions ■ The buttons do not respond. While you are using a function, some buttons not used for the function are disabled. If the song is playing, stop the playback. Otherwise, press the [EXIT] button to return to the main screen. Then, perform the desired operation. ■ The sound sustains and does not decay when I press the sostenuto pedal. With the voices in the ORGAN or STRINGS/ CHOIR group, the sound continues sustaining while you are holding down the sostenuto pedal. ■ Higher or lower notes does not sound correctly when the transpose or octave setting is made. The setting range for the transposition and octave setting is C2 - G8. (With the normal setting, the Clavinova’s 88 keys covers the range of A1 - C7.) If the lowest key is set to a note lower than C2, it will produce a sound one octave higher. If the highest key is set to a note higher than G8, it will produce a sound one octave lower. ■ How can I return to the recording or song select screen during song recording or playback? Press one of the SONG SELECT [ buttons once. ] and [ ] ■ The tempo does not change even though I recorded with tempo changes. Depending on the timing of tempo changes, the changed tempo may not be recorded. In this case, the recording will be played back at the original tempo. Make tempo changes when the recording track is selected and a red track indicator is flashing. The same trick applies to editing the tempo after recording. ■ Performance in Dual or Split mode is not recorded. Track data is lost unexpectedly. For Dual or Split mode recording, the recording track for the second voice (that is, the voice for the left-hand part) is automatically assigned (page 48). Therefore, if the track already has data, the data will be overwritten during recording. Also, switching to Dual mode or Split mode in the middle of the song is not recorded. Therefore, the notes you played with the second voice (or the notes lower than the Split point) are not recorded. ■ What type of data is recorded? Data recorded in the tracks: • Note data (notes you play) • Voice selection • Clavinova pedals and external pedals on/off • Reverb depth “ReverbSend” • Chorus depth “ChorusSend” • Variation effect depth “VariationSend” • Voice octave setting “Octave” • Voice volume level “Volume” • Stereo image of each voice “Pan” • Fine tuning of two voice pitch (Dual mode) “Detune” • Volume level changes for each voice with response to the way you play “TouchSense” Data recorded globally in all tracks: • Tempo • Time signature • Reverb type • Chorus type • Variation effect type You can change all data except for note data after recording. You can change the time signature at the beginning of the song, or at a position in the song to which you move, by using the B [–]/[+] buttons while the song is stopped. CLP-970 97 Questions about Operations and Functions ■ I cannot change the key signature in the song after recording. Press the [STOP] button to locate the top of the song, use the B [–]/[+] buttons to locate the measure in which you wish to change the key signature, then change it. ■ How much data can I record? • Current memory (page 50): About 600KB • Storage memory (page 50): About 750KB • 2DD floppy disk (page 13): about 720KB • 2HD floppy disk (page 13): about 1.4MB ■ The on/off setting of the pedal connected to the AUX PEDAL jack is reversed. Some types of pedals may turn on and off in opposite fashion. Use the “AuxPedalType” parameter (page 89) in the “OTHER SETTING” menu to change the external pedal setting. 98 CLP-970 ■ The song title is not correct. The “CharacterCode” setting may be different than that used when you named the song. Also, if the song was recorded on another instrument, the title might be displayed incorrectly. Use the “CharacterCode” parameter (page 56) in the FILE menu to change the setting. However, if the song was recorded on another instrument, changing the “CharacterCode” parameter setting may not resolve the problem. ■ What is the difference between “TouchSense” and “TouchResponse” MIDI data? “TouchSense” determines the manner and degree to which the volume level changes in response to your touch on the keyboard. It causes MIDI exclusive data (that controls the tone generator) to be output. “TouchResponse” determines the touch sensitivity as an instrument and causes MIDI note-on velocity data to be output. Appendix CLP-970 99 Troubleshooting Problem The Clavinova does not turn on. A click or pop is heard when the power is turned on or off. Noise is heard from the Clavinova’s speakers. The overall volume is low, or no sound is heard. Cause The Clavinova has not been plugged in properly. Electrical current is being applied to the instrument. The noise may be due to interference caused by the use of a mobile phone in close proximity to the Clavinova. The [MASTER VOLUME] is set too low. Headphones are connected. The Local Control function is turned off. The damper pedal has no effect, or the sound continuously sustains even when the damper pedal is not pressed. The pitch and/or tone of the piano voices in certain ranges do not sound right. Mechanical noise is heard during performance. 100 CLP-970 The pedal cord plug is not connected. The Clavinova’s piano voices attempt to precisely simulate actual piano sounds. However, as a result of sampling algorithms, overtones in some ranges may sound exaggerated, producing a somewhat different pitch or tone. The Clavinova’s keyboard mechanism simulates the keyboard mechanism of a piano. Mechanical noise is also heard on a piano. Solution Securely insert the female plug into the socket on the Clavinova, and the male plug into a proper AC outlet. (See page 19.) This is normal, and is no cause for concern. Turn off the mobile phone, or use it further away from the Clavinova. Raise the [MASTER VOLUME] level. (See page 20.) Unplug the headphones. (See page 20.) Turn the Local Control function on. (See page 85.) Securely insert the pedal cord plug into the proper jack. (See step 5 on page 107.) This is normal. This is normal. Data Compatibility This section covers basic information on data compatibility: whether or not other MIDI devices can playback the data recorded by CLP-970, and whether or not the CLP-970 can playback commercially available song data or song data created for other instruments or on a computer. Depending on the MIDI device or data characteristics, you may be able to play back the data without any problem, or you may have to perform some special operations before the data can be played back. If you run into problems playing back data, please refer to the information below. Basic Check Points Sequence Format The data and the MIDI device must match in regards to the items below. • Disk Format • Sequence format • Voice allocation format The system which records song data is called “sequence format.” • Playback is only possible when the sequence format of the disk matches that of the MIDI device. [Common Sequence Formats] Disk format Floppy disks are the main storage medium for data used with various devices, including computers. Different devices have different systems of saving data, therefore it is necessary to first configure the floppy disk to the system of the device being used. This operation is called “formatting.” • There are two types of floppy disks: MF2DD (double sided, double density) and MF2HD (double sided, high density), and each type has different formatting systems. • CLP-970 can record and playback with both types of floppy disks. • When formatted by the CLP-970, a 2DD disk saves up to 720 KB (kilobytes) and a 2HD disk saves up to 1.44 MB (megabytes). (The figures “720 KB” and “1.44 MB” indicate the data memory capacity. They are also used to indicate the format type of disk.) • Playback is only possible when the MIDI device to be used is compatible with the format of the disk. ■ SMF (Standard MIDI File) This is the most common sequence format. • Standard MIDI Files are generally available as one of two types: Format 0 or Format 1. • Many MIDI devices are compatible with Format 0, and most commercially available software is recorded as Format 0. • The CLP-970 is compatible with both Format 0 and Format 1 (for Format 1, up to a maximum of 17 chunks). • Performance data recorded on the CLP-970 is saved in the SMF format 0 in a floppy disk. ■ ESEQ This sequence format is compatible with many of Yamaha’s MIDI devices, including the Clavinova series instruments. This is a common format used with various Yamaha software. • The CLP-970 is compatible with ESEQ. CLP-970 101 Data Compatibility Voice Allocation Format With MIDI, voices are assigned to specific numbers, called “program numbers.” The numbering standard (order of voice allocation) is referred to as the “voice allocation format.” • Voices may not play back as expected unless the voice allocation format of the song data matches that of the compatible MIDI device used for playback. [Main Voice Allocation Formats] ■ GM System Level 1 This is one of the most common voice allocation formats. • Many MIDI devices are compatible with GM System Level 1, as is most commercially available software. • The CLP-970 is compatible with GM System Level 1. ■ XG XG is a major enhancement of the GM System Level 1 format, and was developed by Yamaha specifically to provide more voices and variations, as well as greater expressive control over voices and effects, and to ensure compatibility of data well into the future. • The CLP-970 is compatible with XG. • Performance data recorded with preset voices on the CLP-970 can be played on other XG-compatible instruments. ■ DOC (Disk Orchestra Collection) This voice allocation format is compatible with many of Yamaha’s MIDI devices, including the Clavinova series instruments. This is also common format used with various Yamaha software. The CLP-970 is compatible with DOC. • Even if the devices and data used satisfy all the conditions above, the data may still not be completely compatible, depending on the specifications of the devices and particular data recording methods. 102 CLP-970 Preset Voice List Voice name Stereo sampling Touch Sense Dynamic sampling Key-off samples String resonance Voice description GrandPiano1 ● ● ● ● ● This voice has been sampled from a full concert grand piano. It features five-stage dynamic sampling, tone changes with damper pedal operation, and a subtle voicing at the release of the keys. It simulates the ultimate acoustic piano sound. It also reproduces a string resonance that is typical of acoustic pianos. This voice is suitable not only for classical music but for piano music of any genre. GrandPiano2 ● ● × × × A bright, expansive piano sound which is ideal for rock and popular genres. E.Piano1 ● ● ● × × An electronic piano sound created by FM synthesis. Extremely “musical” response with varying timbre according to keyboard dynamics. E.Piano2 × ● ● ● × The sound of an electric piano using hammerstruck metallic “tines.” Soft tone when played lightly, and an aggressive tone when played hard. SynthPiano × ● × × × This voice simulates the electric piano sound produced by synthesizers in popular music. It also goes well with the acoustic piano sound. WoodBass ● ● ● ● × This voice simulates the sound of an upright bass played with the fingers, and is suitable for jazz and Latin music. Stereo sampling has improved the acoustic feel. ElectricBass × ● ● × × Electric bass for a wide range of music styles, jazz, rock, popular, and more. Bass&Cymbal ● ● ● × × WoodBass sound and stereo-sampled cymbal sound are layered. This voice is very effective for a jazz walking bass. Harpsichord8' ● × × ● × The harpsichord is often used for Baroque music. The volume level is always consistent regardless of how you play. The instrument generates a peculiar voice when you release the keys. “8’” means that it produces the same octave sound as the keys. Harpsichord8'+4' ● × × ● × This voice combines the 8’ and 4’ harpsichord sounds. “4’” means that it produces a sound one octave higher than the actual keys. × This is the voice of a keyboard that produces sound by striking the strings with magnetic pickups. This funky sound is popular in black contemporary music. Because of its unique structure, the instrument produces a peculiar sound when you release the keys. × This voice simulates a vibraphone played with a soft mallet. The harder you play, the more metallic it sounds. Use the “VibraphonePedalMode” parameter in the “OTHER SETTING” menu to select whether the sound sustains while you hold down the keys, or the sound sustains only when you press the pedal. An actual vibraphone has a rotor inside the resonance tube, which rotates via the motor to create the vibrato effect. Pressing the left pedal applies this effect; pressing the pedal again turns the effect off. ElectricClavichord Vibraphone × ● ● ● × ● ● × CLP-970 103 Preset Voice List Voice name Marimba Touch Sense Dynamic sampling Key-off samples String resonance Voice description ● ● ● × × This voice simulates a concert-type marimba sound. Stereo sampling helps reproduce a real acoustic spread. Celesta ● ● ● × × A celesta is a percussive instrument. When you play the keyboard, the hammer hits a metallic board to produce the sound. This instrument is famous for the impressive sound in “Dance of the Suger-Plum Fairy” of The Nutcracker Suite by Tchaikovsky. PipeOrganPrincipal ● × × × × This voice features the combination of pipes (8'+4'+2') of a principal (brass instrument) organ. It is suitable for Baroque church music. × This voice features the combination of pipes (8'+4') of a flute (woodwind instrument) organ. Its soft sound is suitable for the accompaniment of hymns. PipeOrganFlute1 104 Stereo sampling ● × × × PipeOrganFlute2 ● × × × × This voice features the combination of pipes (8'+4'+1 1/3') of a flute organ. It sounds more brilliant than PipeOrganFlute1 and is suitable for solo performance. PipeOrganTutti ● × × × × This voice features a full coupler of a pipe organ, famous for the sound used in Toccatta and Fugue by Bach. JazzOrgan × × × × × The sound of a “tonewheel” type electric organ. Often heard in jazz and rock idioms. Strings ● ● × × × This voice features a string ensemble that accurately simulates all string instruments, including contrabass, cello, viola, and violin. SynthStrings ● ● × × × Sampled strings, processed for spread and warmth. This voice is suitable for a pad in ensemble music. SlowStrings ● ● × × × This voice features a string ensemble sound with a slow attack. It is suitable for a duet with piano or electric piano. Choir ● ● × × × A big, spacious choir voice. Perfect for creating rich harmonies in slow pieces. SlowChoir ● ● × × × This voice features a chorus sound with a slow attack. It is suitable for a duet with piano or electric piano. Scat ● ● ● × × You can enjoy jazz “scatting” with this voice. Depending on how hard and what note range you play, different sounds will be produced. CLP-970 Voice Combination Examples (Dual and Split) Dual MAIN + MAIN GrandPiano1 + E.Piano1 GrandPiano1 + E.Piano2 GrandPiano1 + SynthPiano MAIN + MAIN GrandPiano2 + GrandPiano2 MAIN + MAIN E.Piano1 + SlowChoir MAIN + MAIN E.Piano2 + ElectricClavichord MAIN + MAIN Harpsichord8' + Strings MAIN + MAIN Celesta + SynthStirngs MAIN + MAIN This combination is often used in popular music. This produces a fantasy, spacious piano sound. This combination sounds as if you are playing two notes that are two octaves apart. It is suitable for the accompaniment of Salsa music. This is suitable for romantic ballads. This is suitable for funk, rhythm & blues, and soul music. This combination is very suitable for Baroque music. This combination adds strings and bell sound. A delay effect is automatically applied. Split MAIN / LEFT GrandPiano1 / WoodBass or Bass&Cymbal MAIN / LEFT Celesta / Choir MAIN / LEFT Choir / GrandPiano1 MAIN / LEFT Scat / WoodBass MAIN / LEFT E.Piano2 / Scat This is recommended for light Jazz music. The damper pedal is effective on the voice assigned to the right-hand range. This is suitable for a peaceful, somewhat cute song. Play these voices elegantly along with piano arpeggio. Playing the Choir voice in chords would be more effective. This combination features a cool (stylish) jazz chorus. The Scat voice is touch sensitive, adding a variety of expressions. Playing the Scat voice for a bass part may create an interesting sound. Dual + Split MAIN + MAIN / LEFT GrandPiano1 + SynthString / GrandPiano1 MAIN + MAIN / LEFT GrandPiano2 + E.Piano1 / ElectricBass MAIN + MAIN / LEFT + LEFT Harpsichord8' + 4' + Strings / Harpsichord8' + Strings This combination creates the thick sound of a layered piano and strings. This sound is suitable for fusion. Deeper reverb and chorus (pages 79 and 80) will improve the groove. The damper pedal is effective on the voice assigned to the right-hand range. This combination makes a very brilliant sound. CLP-970 105 CLP-970.E.book Page 106 Monday, December 11, 2000 5:36 PM CLP-970/970M/970C: Keyboard Stand Assembly CAUTION • Be careful not to confuse parts, and be sure to install all parts in the correct direction. Please assemble in accordance with the sequence given below. • Assembly should be carried out by at least two persons. • Be sure to use the correct screw size, as indicated below. Use of incorrect screws can cause damage. • Be sure to tighten up all screws upon completing assembly of each unit. • To disassemble, reverse the assembly sequence given below. Have a Phillips-head (+) screwdriver ready. 1. Attach the side panels to the pedal box. Place the plastic bag that contained the side panels on the floor when assembling the stand to prevent scratches to the floor or stand. The parts shown in the “Assembly Parts” illustration will be used. Follow the assembly instructions and select the parts as needed. Assembly Parts Make sure the indented surface on the side panel and the rear surface on the pedal box will match correctly, without creating a step. side panel (right) 6 x 16 mm 2 flat-head screws x4 4 4 x 20 mm tapping screws x4 side panel (left) Cord holders x 2 (2) Use the four long round-head screws 1 to attach the pedal box. First attach one side panel, then attach the other side panel. 3 4 x 12 mm round-head screws x2 2. (1) Untie and straighten out the bundled cord attached to the bottom of the pedal box. Don’t discard the vinyl tie, you’ll need it later in step 6. Attach the rear panel. (2) Secure the top of the rear panel to the side panel brackets using two thin round-head screws 3. side panel (left) rear panel side panel (right) pedal box Bundled pedal cord inside 106 CLP-970 AC power cord (1) With the rear panel on the feet’s protruding edge, align the panel with the groove and secure the top of the panel. R main unit (3) Secure the bottom of the rear panel to the pedal box using four tapping screws 4. L 1 6 x 25 mm round-head screws x4 CLP-970/970M/970C: Keyboard Stand Assembly 3. Mount the main unit. CAUTION • Fingers can become pinched between the main unit and the rear or side panels, be extra careful so as not to drop the main unit. • Do not hold the keyboard in any position other than the position shown in the above illustration. Be sure to place your hands at least 10 centimeters from either end of the main unit when positioning it. 5. Connect the pedal cord. (1) Pass the pedal cord plug from the rear as shown, and insert the plug into the PEDAL jack. 6. Secure the pedal cord. (2) Use a vinyl tie to take up any slack in the pedal cord. at least 10 cm Fix the main unit. (1) Center the main unit to produce equal clearance on the left and right sides. 7. Set the voltage selector and connect the power cord. Voltage Selector Before connecting the AC power cord, check the setting of the voltage selector which is provided in some 127 areas. To set the selector for 110V, 127V, 220V or 240V main voltages, use a “minus” screwdriver to rotate the selector dial so that the correct voltage for your region appears next to the pointer on the panel. The voltage selector is set at 240V when the unit is initially shipped. After the proper voltage has been selected, connect the AC power cord to the AC INLET and an AC wall outlet. A plug adaptor may be also provided in some areas to match the pin configuration of the AC wall outlets in your area. 110 (2) Use short flat-head screws 2 to secure the main unit from the front. * Use the rear hole on the front brackets to attach the screws. 220 240 4. (1) Attach the cord holders to the rear panel as shown, then clip the cord into the holders. CAUTION • An improper voltage setting can cause serious damage to the Clavinova or result in improper operation. CLP-970 107 CLP-970.E.book Page 108 Monday, December 11, 2000 5:02 PM CLP-970/970M/970C: Keyboard Stand Assembly 8. Set the adjuster. When moving the instrument after assembly, always hold the bottom of the main unit. Do not hold the keyboard cover or speaker box. Improper handling can result in damage to the instrument or personal injury. Rotate the adjuster until it comes in firm contact with the floor surface. Key cover Speaker box After completing the assembly, please check the following. • Are there any parts left over? • Review the assembly procedure and correct any errors. • Is the Clavinova clear of doors and other movable fixtures? • Move the Clavinova to an appropriate location. • Does the Clavinova make a rattling noise when you shake it? • Tighten all screws. • Does the pedal box rattle or give way when you step on the pedals? • Turn the adjuster so that it is set firmly against the floor. • Are the pedal and power cords inserted securely into the sockets? • Check the connection. • If the main unit creaks or is otherwise unsteady when you play on the keyboard, refer to the assembly diagrams and retighten all screws. 108 CLP-970 Index You can search the desired section using not only the terminology in this manual but also commonly-used words. The * mark indicates that the corresponding page includes the terminology explanation in the right column. Numerics D J 50 greats for the Clavinova 15 50 Piano Preset Songs 26 Practicing a one-hand part 28 Damper (right) pedal 31 Data Compatibility 101 Data type 59 Default (Normal) setting* 32 Demonstration tunes 24 Detailed Settings 70 Metronome 77 MIDI 83 Other settings 87 recording and playback 74 voices 78 Disk Copy 55 Format 56 Disk song 50 Display contrast 20 DOWN (TEMPO) 50 Piano Preset Songs 27 metronome 40 Dual Detailed settings 78 Recording 49 Dual mode → combining two voices 35 Jacks AUX IN 62 AUX OUT 61 AUX PEDAL 62 PEDAL 63 PHONES 20 TO HOST 62, 64 A Adding reverberation to the sound → REVERB 33 Adding variation to the sound → Effect function 32 Assembly 106 Assigning the START/PAUSE function to a pedal 89 AUX IN jacks 62 AUX OUT jacks 61 AUX PEDAL jacks 62 Auxiliary pedal function 82 B BackUp 91 Bench 15 BRILLIANCE 32 C Center pedal 31 Center pedal function 82 Character Code 56 Characters 56 CHORUS 33 combining two voices → Dual mode 35 computer 63 Connection Audio 61 MIDI 66 Other Components 61 Serial 64 Speaker 62 USB 67 Connectors MIDI IN/OUT/THRU 63, 66 CONTRAST 20 E Effect function 32 EXIT 23 EXTRA TRACKS → the third or more tracks 46 F FactorySet 91 Fast forward 27, 58 FILE 50 Floppy Disk 13, 14 Formatting a floppy disk 56 H Headphones 20 HOST SELECT switch 62 L LCD → Screen 23 Contrast 20 Left pedal 31 Left pedal function 82 LEFT voice group buttons 37 List Demonstration tunes 24 Detailed Settings 70 Message 92 Preset Voice 103 M MAIN voice group buttons 30 Maintenance 14 MASTER VOLUME 20 Memory 50 Memory song 50 MemoryBackUp 91 Message List 92 Metronome 40 Detailed settings 77 METRONOME SETTING 77 MIDI 83 Detailed settings 83 MIDI cables 66 MIDI connectors 63, 66 MIDI driver 64 MIDI SETTING 83 Music Data 57 Music stand 18 N New Song 41 Normal setting* 32 CLP-970 109 Index O S Other settings 87 Scale 88 Screen 23 Select 50 piano preset songs 26 Demo Songs 24 Recorded Songs and Music Data 57 Selecting a touch response 87 SETTING metronome 77 Volume 20 SMF (Standard MIDI File) 101 Soft (left) pedal 31 Song Data Type 59 Delete 53 Detailed settings 74 Playing back repeatedly 76 Rename 54 Store 50 Store (Floopy disk) 53 Store (Storage memory) 53 SONG BALANCE 48 SONG SELECT 50 Piano Preset Songs 26 Recorded Songs and Music Data 57 Recording 41 SONG SETTING 74 Sostenuto (center) pedal 31 Sound brilliance 32 expression 32 reverberation 33 spread and spaciousness 33 Soundboard reverb 33 Split Detailed settings 78 Recording 49 Split mode → playing two voices 37 Split point 38 Splitting the keyboard range and playing two different voices 37 START/PAUSE 50 Piano Preset Songs 26 Recorded Songs and Music Data 58 Recording 42 START/STOP metronome 40 P Pedal Function Auxiliary 82 Center 82 Left 82 Right 81 PEDAL jack 63 Pedals 31 Personal computer 63 PHONES jacks 20 Playback 50 Piano Preset Songs 26 Demo Songs 24 Recorded Songs and Music Data 58 Playing back repeatedly (song) 76 Playing back repeatedly (specifying the range) 75 playing two voices → Split mode 37 POWER 19 Practicing a one-hand part (50 preset songs) 28 PRECAUTIONS 3 Preset song memory 50 Preset Voice List 103 R Recording Tape Recorder 61 Recording in Dual 49 Recording in Split 49 Recording Your Performance 41 Re-recording 43 REVERB 33 Rewind 27, 58 Right pedal 31 Right pedal function 81 110 CLP-970 STOP 50 Piano Preset Songs 27 Recorded Songs and Music Data 58 Recording 42 Storage memory 50 StringResonance 88 SustainSampling 88 Synchro Start 50 preset songs 28 Recorded Songs and Music Data 58 T TEMPO 50 Piano Preset Songs 27 metronome 40 Recorded Songs and Music Data 58 the third or more tracks → EXTRA TRACKS 46 TO HOST jack 62, 64 TouchResponse 87 Track playback on and off 59 TRACK1/TRACK2 50 Piano Preset Songs 28 Recording 41, 45 TRANSPOSE 34 Transposition 34 Troubleshooting 100 Tune 87 Type of characters 56 Type of data (recorded) 97 U UP (TEMPO) 50 Piano Preset Songs 27 metronome 40 V VOICE SETTING 78 Voices 30 Detailed settings 78 Volume Balance (SONG BLANCE) 48 Setting 20 X XG 102 IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS INFORMATION RELATING TO PERSONAL INJURY, ELECTRICAL SHOCK, AND FIRE HAZARD POSSIBILITIES HAS BEEN INCLUDED IN THIS LIST. WARNING- When using any electrical or electronic product, basic precautions should always be followed. These precautions include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Read all Safety Instructions, Installation Instructions, Special Message Section items, and any Assembly Instructions found in this manual BEFORE making any connections, including connection to the main supply. 2. Main Power Supply Verification: Yamaha products are manufactured specifically for the supply voltage in the area where they are to be sold. If you should move, or if any doubt exists about the supply voltage in your area, please contact your dealer for supply voltage verification and (if applicable) instructions. The required supply voltage is printed on the name plate. For name plate location, please refer to the graphic found in the Special Message Section of this manual. 3. This product may be equipped with a polarized plug (one blade wider than the other). If you are unable to insert the plug into the outlet, turn the plug over and try again. If the problem persists, contact an electrician to have the obsolete outlet replaced. Do NOT defeat the safety purpose of the plug. 4. Some electronic products utilize external power supplies or adapters. Do NOT connect this type of product to any power supply or adapter other than one described in the owners manual, on the name plate, or specifically recommended by Yamaha. 5. WARNING: Do not place this product or any other objects on the power cord or place it in a position where anyone could walk on, trip over, or roll anything over power or connecting cords of any kind. The use of an extension cord is not recommended! If you must use an extension cord, the minimum wire size for a 25’ cord (or less) is 18 AWG. NOTE: The smaller the AWG number, the larger the current handling capacity. For longer extension cords, consult a local electrician. 6. Ventilation: Electronic products, unless specifically designed for enclosed installations, should be placed in locations that do not interfere with proper ventilation. If instructions for enclosed installations are not provided, it must be assumed that unobstructed ventilation is required. 7. Temperature considerations: Electronic products should be installed in locations that do not significantly contribute to their operating temperature. Placement of this product close to heat sources such as; radiators, heat registers and other devices that produce heat should be avoided. 8. This product was NOT designed for use in wet/damp locations and should not be used near water or exposed to rain. Examples of wet/damp locations are; near a swimming pool, spa, tub, sink, or wet basement. 9. This product should be used only with the components supplied or; a cart, rack, or stand that is recommended by the manufacturer. If a cart, rack, or stand is used, please observe all safety markings and instructions that accompany the accessory product. 10. The power supply cord (plug) should be disconnected from the outlet when electronic products are to be left unused for extended periods of time. Cords should also be disconnected when there is a high probability of lightning and/or electrical storm activity. 11. Care should be taken that objects do not fall and liquids are not spilled into the enclosure through any openings that may exist. 12. Electrical/electronic products should be serviced by a qualified service person when: a. The power supply cord has been damaged; or b. Objects have fallen, been inserted, or liquids have been spilled into the enclosure through openings; or c. The product has been exposed to rain: or d. The product dose not operate, exhibits a marked change in performance; or e. The product has been dropped, or the enclosure of the product has been damaged. 13. Do not attempt to service this product beyond that described in the user-maintenance instructions. All other servicing should be referred to qualified service personnel. 14. This product, either alone or in combination with an amplifier and headphones or speaker/s, may be capable of producing sound levels that could cause permanent hearing loss. DO NOT operate for a long period of time at a high volume level or at a level that is uncomfortable. If you experience any hearing loss or ringing in the ears, you should consult an audiologist. IMPORTANT: The louder the sound, the shorter the time period before damage occurs. 15. Some Yamaha products may have benches and/or accessory mounting fixtures that are either supplied as a part of the product or as optional accessories. Some of these items are designed to be dealer assembled or installed. Please make sure that benches are stable and any optional fixtures (where applicable) are well secured BEFORE using. Benches supplied by Yamaha are designed for seating only. No other uses are recommended. PLEASE KEEP THIS MANUAL 92-469-2 FCC INFORMATION (U.S.A.) 1. IMPORTANT NOTICE: DO NOT MODIFY THIS UNIT! This product, when installed as indicated in the instructions contained in this manual, meets FCC requirements. Modifications not expressly approved by Yamaha may void your authority, granted by the FCC, to use the product. 2. IMPORTANT: When connecting this product to accessories and/or another product use only high quality shielded cables. Cable/s supplied with this product MUST be used. Follow all installation instructions. Failure to follow instructions could void your FCC authorization to use this product in the USA. 3. NOTE: This product has been tested and found to comply with the requirements listed in FCC Regulations, Part 15 for Class “B” digital devices. Compliance with these requirements provides a reasonable level of assurance that your use of this product in a residential environment will not result in harmful interference with other electronic devices. This equipment generates/ uses radio frequencies and, if not installed and used according to the instructions found in the users manual, may cause interference harmful to the operation of other electronic devices. Compliance with FCC regulations does not guarantee that interference will not occur in all installations. If this product is found to be the source of interference, which can be determined by turning the unit “OFF” and “ON”, please try to eliminate the problem by using one of the following measures: Relocate either this product or the device that is being affected by the interference. Utilize power outlets that are on different branch (circuit breaker or fuse) circuits or install AC line filter/s. In the case of radio or TV interference, relocate/reorient the antenna. If the antenna lead-in is 300 ohm ribbon lead, change the lead-in to co-axial type cable. If these corrective measures do not produce satisfactory results, please contact the local retailer authorized to distribute this type of product. If you can not locate the appropriate retailer, please contact Yamaha Corporation of America, Electronic Service Division, 6600 Orangethorpe Ave, Buena Park, CA90620 The above statements apply ONLY to those products distributed by Yamaha Corporation of America or its subsidiaries. * This applies only to products distributed by YAMAHA CORPORATION OF AMERICA. IMPORTANT NOTICE FOR THE UNITED KINGDOM Connecting the Plug and Cord IMPORTANT. The wires in this mains lead are coloured in accordance with the following code: BLUE : NEUTRAL BROWN : LIVE As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this apparatus may not correspond with the coloured makings identifying the terminals in your plug proceed as follows: The wire which is coloured BLUE must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter N or coloured BLACK. The wire which is coloured BROWN must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter L or coloured RED. Making sure that neither core is connected to the earth terminal of the three pin plug. (2 wires) • This applies only to products distributed by Yamaha-Kemble Music (U.K.) Ltd. CAUTION: TO PREVENT ELECTRIC SHOCK, MATCH WIDE BLADE OF PLUG TO WIDE SLOT, FULLY INSERT. ATTENTION: POUR ÉVITER LES CHOCS ÉLECTRIQUES, INTRODUIRE LA LAME LA PLUS LARGE DE LA FICHE DANS LA BORNE CORRESPONDANTE DE LA PRISE ET POUSSER JUSQU’AU FOND. (polarity) • This applies only to products distributed by Yamaha Canada Music Ltd. • Ceci ne s’applique qu’aux produits distribués par Yamaha Canada Musique Ltée. (class B) SPECIAL MESSAGE SECTION PRODUCT SAFETY MARKINGS: Yamaha electronic Battery Notice: This product MAY contain a small non- products may have either labels similar to the graphics shown below or molded/stamped facsimiles of these graphics on the enclosure. The explanation of these graphics appears on this page. Please observe all cautions indicated on this page and those indicated in the safety instruction section. rechargable battery which (if applicable) is soldered in place. The average life span of this type of battery is approximately five years. When replacement becomes necessary, contact a qualified service representative to perform the replacement. CAUTION RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT OPEN CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK. DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL. See bottom of Keyboard enclosure for graphic symbol markings The exclamation point within the equilateral triangle is intended to alert the user to the presence of important operating and maintenance (servicing) instructions in the literature accompanying the product. The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol, within the equilateral triangle, is intended to alert the user to the presence of uninsulated “dangerous voltage” within the product’s enclosure that may be of sufficient magnitude to constitute a risk of electrical shock. Warning: Do not attempt to recharge, disassemble, or incinerate this type of battery. Keep all batteries away from children. Dispose of used batteries promptly and as regulated by applicable laws. Note: In some areas, the servicer is required by law to return the defective parts. However, you do have the option of having the servicer dispose of these parts for you. Disposal Notice: Should this product become damaged beyond repair, or for some reason its useful life is considered to be at an end, please observe all local, state, and federal regulations that relate to the disposal of products that contain lead, batteries, plastics, etc. NOTICE: Service charges incurred due to lack of knowl- edge relating to how a function or effect works (when the unit is operating as designed) are not covered by the manufacturer’s warranty, and are therefore the owners responsibility. Please study this manual carefully and consult your dealer before requesting service. NAME PLATE LOCATION: The graphic below indi- cates the location of the name plate. The model number, serial number, power requirements, etc., are located on this plate. You should record the model number, serial number, and the date of purchase in the spaces provided below and retain this manual as a permanent record of your purchase. ENVIRONMENTAL ISSUES: Yamaha strives to produce products that are both user safe and environmentally friendly. We sincerely believe that our products and the production methods used to produce them, meet these goals. In keeping with both the letter and the spirit of the law, we want you to be aware of the following: 92-469 1 NORTH AMERICA CANADA Yamaha Canada Music Ltd. 135 Milner Avenue, Scarborough, Ontario, M1S 3R1, Canada Tel: 416-298-1311 U.S.A. Yamaha Corporation of America, Keyboard Division 6600 Orangethorpe Ave., Buena Park, Calif. 90620, U.S.A. Tel: 714-522-9011 CENTRAL & SOUTH AMERICA MEXICO Yamaha de Mexico S.A. De C.V., Departamento de ventas Javier Rojo Gomez No.1149, Col. Gpe Del Moral, Deleg. Iztapalapa, 09300 Mexico, D.F. Tel: 686-00-33 BRAZIL Yamaha Musical do Brasil LTDA. Av. Rebouças 2636, São Paulo, Brasil Tel: 011-853-1377 ARGENTINA Yamaha Music Argentina S.A. Viamonte 1145 Piso2-B 1053, Buenos Aires, Argentina Tel: 1-4371-7021 PANAMA AND OTHER LATIN AMERICAN COUNTRIES/ CARIBBEAN COUNTRIES Yamaha de Panama S.A. Torre Banco General, Piso 7, Urbanización Marbella, Calle 47 y Aquilino de la Guardia, Ciudad de Panamá, Panamá Tel: 507-269-5311 EUROPE THE UNITED KINGDOM IRELAND Danfay Ltd. 61D, Sallynoggin Road, Dun Laoghaire, Co. Dublin Tel: 01-2859177 GERMANY/SWITZERLAND Yamaha Europa GmbH. Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, F.R. of Germany Tel: 04101-3030 AUSTRIA CLP-970/970M/970C Yamaha Music Austria Schleiergasse 20, A-1100 Wien Austria Tel: 01-60203900 THE NETHERLANDS SPECIFICATIONS SUBJECT TO CHANGE: The information contained in this manual is believed to be correct at the time of printing. However, Yamaha reserves the right to change or modify any of the specifications without notice or obligation to update existing units. Pour plus de détails sur les produits, veuillez-vous adresser à Yamaha ou au distributeur le plus proche de vous figurant dans la liste suivante. Yamaha-Kemble Music (U.K.) Ltd. Sherbourne Drive, Tilbrook, Milton Keynes, MK7 8BL, England Tel: 01908-366700 IMPORTANT NOTICE: All Yamaha electronic products are tested and approved by an independent safety testing laboratory in order that you may be sure that when it is properly installed and used in its normal and customary manner, all foreseeable risks have been eliminated. DO NOT modify this unit or commission others to do so unless specifically authorized by Yamaha. Product performance and/or safety standards may be diminished. Claims filed under the expressed warranty may be denied if the unit is/has been modified. Implied warranties may also be affected. For details of products, please contact your nearest Yamaha or the authorized distributor listed below. Yamaha Music Nederland Kanaalweg 18G, 3526KL, Utrecht, The Netherlands Tel: 030-2828411 Model Serial No. BELGIUM Yamaha Music Belgium Keiberg Imperiastraat 8, 1930 Zaventem, Belgium Tel: 02-7258220 Die Einzelheiten zu Produkten sind bei Ihrer unten aufgeführten Niederlassung und bei Yamaha Vertragshändlern in den jeweiligen Bestimmungsländern erhältlich. Para detalles sobre productos, contacte su tienda Yamaha más cercana o el distribuidor autorizado que se lista debajo. ASIA FRANCE Yamaha Musique France, Division Claviers BP 70-77312 Marne-la-Vallée Cedex 2, France Tel: 01-64-61-4000 ITALY Yamaha Musica Italia S.P.A., Home Keyboard Division Viale Italia 88, 20020 Lainate (Milano), Italy Tel: 02-935-771 SPAIN/PORTUGAL Yamaha-Hazen Electronica Musical, S.A. Ctra. de la Coruna km. 17, 200, 28230 Las Rozas (Madrid) Spain Tel: 91-201-0700 GREECE Philippe Nakas S.A. Navarinou Street 13, P.Code 10680, Athens, Greece Tel: 01-364-7111 SWEDEN Yamaha Scandinavia AB J. A. Wettergrens Gata 1 Box 30053 S-400 43 Göteborg, Sweden Tel: 031 89 34 00 INDONESIA PT. Yamaha Music Indonesia (Distributor) PT. Nusantik Gedung Yamaha Music Center, Jalan Jend. Gatot Subroto Kav. 4, Jakarta 12930, Indonesia Tel: 21-520-2577 KOREA Cosmos Corporation 1461-9, Seocho Dong, Seocho Gu, Seoul, Korea Tel: 02-3486-0011 MALAYSIA Yamaha Music Malaysia, Sdn., Bhd. Lot 8, Jalan Perbandaran, 47301 Kelana Jaya, Petaling Jaya, Selangor, Malaysia Tel: 3-703-0900 Yupangco Music Corporation 339 Gil J. Puyat Avenue, P.O. Box 885 MCPO, Makati, Metro Manila, Philippines Tel: 819-7551 YS Copenhagen Liaison Office Generatorvej 8B DK-2730 Herlev, Denmark Tel: 44 92 49 00 FINLAND F-Musiikki Oy Kluuvikatu 6, P.O. Box 260, SF-00101 Helsinki, Finland Tel: 09 618511 SINGAPORE Yamaha Music Asia Pte., Ltd. 11 Ubi Road #06-00, Meiban Industrial Building, Singapore Tel: 65-747-4374 TAIWAN Yamaha KHS Music Co., Ltd. 10F, 150, Tun-Hwa Northroad, Taipei, Taiwan, R.O.C. Tel: 02-2713-8999 NORWAY Norsk filial av Yamaha Scandinavia AB Grini Næringspark 1 N-1345 Østerås, Norway Tel: 67 16 77 70 ICELAND Skifan HF Skeifan 17 P.O. Box 8120 IS-128 Reykjavik, Iceland Tel: 525 5000 THAILAND Siam Music Yamaha Co., Ltd. 121/60-61 RS Tower 17th Floor, Ratchadaphisek RD., Dindaeng, Bangkok 10320, Thailand Tel: 02-641-2951 THE PEOPLE’S REPUBLIC OF CHINA AND OTHER ASIAN COUNTRIES OTHER EUROPEAN COUNTRIES Yamaha Europa GmbH. Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, F.R. of Germany Tel: 04101-3030 AFRICA Yamaha Corporation, Asia-Pacific Music Marketing Group Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650 Tel: 053-460-2312 MIDDLE EAST TURKEY/CYPRUS Yamaha Europa GmbH. Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, F.R. of Germany Tel: 04101-3030 Yamaha Music Gulf FZE LB21-128 Jebel Ali Freezone P.O.Box 17328, Dubai, U.A.E. Tel: 971-4-881-5868 Tom Lee Music Co., Ltd. 11/F., Silvercord Tower 1, 30 Canton Road, Tsimshatsui, Kowloon, Hong Kong Tel: 2737-7688 PHILIPPINES DENMARK OTHER COUNTRIES HONG KONG Yamaha Corporation, Asia-Pacific Music Marketing Group Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650 Tel: 053-460-2317 OCEANIA AUSTRALIA Yamaha Music Australia Pty. Ltd. Level 1, 99 Queensbridge Street, Southbank, Victoria 3006, Australia Tel: 3-9693-5111 NEW ZEALAND Music Houses of N.Z. Ltd. 146/148 Captain Springs Road, Te Papapa, Auckland, New Zealand Tel: 9-634-0099 COUNTRIES AND TRUST TERRITORIES IN PACIFIC OCEAN Yamaha Corporation, Asia-Pacific Music Marketing Group Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650 Tel: 053-460-2312 Purchase Date HEAD OFFICE Yamaha Corporation, Pro Audio & Digital Musical Instrument Division Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650 Tel: 053-460-3273 [CL] 21 R CLP-970/CLP-970M/CLP-970C Owner’s manual IMPORTANT Check your power supply Make sure that your local AC mains voltage matches the voltage specified on the name plate on the bottom panel. In some areas a voltage selector may be provided on the the bottom panel of the main keyboard unit near the power cord. Make sure that the voltage selector is set for the voltage in your area. The voltage selector is set at 240V when the unit is initially shipped. To change the setting use a “minus” screwdriver to rotate the selector dial so that the correct voltage appears next to the pointer on the panel. Clavinova Web Site (English only) http://www.yamaha.co.jp/english/product/cl/ M.D.G., PA • DMI Division, Yamaha Corporation © 2000 Yamaha Corporation V?????? ???AP?????.?-??B0 Printed in Indonesia Yamaha Manual Library (English versions only) http://www2.yamaha.co.jp/manual/english/ CLP-970 CLP-970M CLP-970C Owner’s manual-
1
-
2
-
3
-
4
-
5
-
6
-
7
-
8
-
9
-
10
-
11
-
12
-
13
-
14
-
15
-
16
-
17
-
18
-
19
-
20
-
21
-
22
-
23
-
24
-
25
-
26
-
27
-
28
-
29
-
30
-
31
-
32
-
33
-
34
-
35
-
36
-
37
-
38
-
39
-
40
-
41
-
42
-
43
-
44
-
45
-
46
-
47
-
48
-
49
-
50
-
51
-
52
-
53
-
54
-
55
-
56
-
57
-
58
-
59
-
60
-
61
-
62
-
63
-
64
-
65
-
66
-
67
-
68
-
69
-
70
-
71
-
72
-
73
-
74
-
75
-
76
-
77
-
78
-
79
-
80
-
81
-
82
-
83
-
84
-
85
-
86
-
87
-
88
-
89
-
90
-
91
-
92
-
93
-
94
-
95
-
96
-
97
-
98
-
99
-
100
-
101
-
102
-
103
-
104
-
105
-
106
-
107
-
108
-
109
-
110
-
111
-
112
-
113
-
114
Yamaha 970M El manual del propietario
- Categoría
- Pianos digitales
- Tipo
- El manual del propietario
En otros idiomas
- français: Yamaha 970M Le manuel du propriétaire
- italiano: Yamaha 970M Manuale del proprietario
- English: Yamaha 970M Owner's manual
- Deutsch: Yamaha 970M Bedienungsanleitung
- русский: Yamaha 970M Инструкция по применению
- Nederlands: Yamaha 970M de handleiding
- português: Yamaha 970M Manual do proprietário
- dansk: Yamaha 970M Brugervejledning
- polski: Yamaha 970M Instrukcja obsługi
- čeština: Yamaha 970M Návod k obsluze
- svenska: Yamaha 970M Bruksanvisning
- Türkçe: Yamaha 970M El kitabı
- suomi: Yamaha 970M Omistajan opas
- română: Yamaha 970M Manualul proprietarului
Documentos relacionados
-
Yamaha Clavinova CLP-265GP El manual del propietario
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-